Home

Summary

1. 300 Hour 20 If you want to draw a perfect square or circle press and hold the Ctrl key Z while you draw the shape FIGURE 20 2 4 Killustrator lt unnamed gt OX Use a combination of Z File Edit View Layout Arrange Extras Help shapes and colors to 7m o SE E 22 create cool images N Proa onor tR ri oo ER a ira PR dara Krr Ka Transparent 3 he lu at Draw a Select object Ze m line GE m Freehand lines ml 2 E A filled I Rectangles Oil g square Q 200 Circles A 3 Q m An ellipse ar E F oan Create Ellipse 00 36 00 pt I 5 If you need to change the size of an object click the Selection Mode tool and then click the object that you want to resize Handles will appear around the object Click and drag a handle to see the object change shape Press and hold the Ctrl key while you are resizing the shape if you want the shape to stay in proportion to the original shape PE WY If you don t like the changes that you ve made select Undo from the Edit Z ed menu Killustrator remembers every change you make and you can undo a a your drawing until you have a blank canvas If you ve accidentally undone something select Edit Redo Saving Your Work Saving your work soon and frequently can never be stressed enough And since we re on a soapbox frequent backups are a necessity also So if you don t have a regular backup system in place go to Hour 8 B
2. Pause the game White s move Drag and drop chess pieces into position Playing X Video Games If you d rather have some action along with your games try some of the X video games You ll find these games in the AnotherLevel menus under Games Video For those of you who enjoy blasting tiny Martians to smithereens XKobo is another bang bang shoot em up outer space game If you d rather just go for a leisurely cruise try the XPilot flight simulator And no video game arcade would be complete without some version of Tetris The Linux version is called Xtrojka seen in Figure 24 4 Games 349 Start a new game Change the pace ws act FIGURE 24 4 l See how well you can line up the colored blocks Move blocks with the arrow keys Playing Linux Games Yov ll find a number of popular games being ported to the Linux operating system A couple of the forerunners in this category are the Quake games from ID Software and Civilization from Activision If you would like to purchase these games visit www macmillansoftware com catalog software_results cfm Before you install any of these programs carefully check the system require Da ar ments Many of these games require a significant amount of hard disk N D space You may also find that if you run your screen at a lower resolution such as 800x600 or if you do not have a 3D accelerator graphics card you won
3. 08 134 Finding Applications on the Linux Mandrake CD ROM 135 Downloading Packages from the Internet eee eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 136 SUMMA Y repa 05 cies ss ca a a a a aaan 138 OQA n e aE eE E EEN R E 138 Workshop arn anen e ean E Teea EES AEA R EEE ENE EE 139 QUZ aner a E EE EE EE RA 139 Exercises aiaia sasetscs2siccacbeetteavas eat tsb stead vi vats R 139 Hour 10 Networking the Small Office Home Office 141 When Is the Right Time to Build a Network 0 cceeeecceseeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 142 The Importance Of Planning c ccs s sccidesSeasecsensepscasoossscevarsaedevendseacavessiseeceseaearsiens 142 Consider How the Network Will Be Used wo eee ececseeeseereeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 143 Placement of Workstations and Peripherals 00 0 cccesesseseseeeeseeeeeeeeneeeees 143 Select Network Hardware Interface Cards and Cabling ceeeeeeeee 145 Document Everything About the Network he Keeping Equipment Records c sceseesscsasssserseseoseercoatonconceasensensesnsecnscenaneanseas Putting Together a Network Diagram cececeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeaeeaeeneeneenes Burlding an Intranet resetea a E E EEA ERE Contents ix Hooking Computers Together ccecsesceseeeeecseeeeeeeseeeseseeeeeseeeseeeeteeeeees 150 Setting up a Web Server gaas Sharinp Pernpheral Sasieta R E E Ai y has dorset Accessing a Modem and Internet from the Network ss cc 152 Sharnine Printers si 15 t5 et
4. scccsssecescssssersscoeeesscsersaroceesscsesesecees 112 Setting File Permissions 0 Gathering System Information Updatins the Time soosiana naa s eesti atisatetion a viii Sams Teach Yourself Linux Mandrake in 24 Hours Hour 8 Backing Up the Filesystem 119 Deciding How and What to Back UPesareiiissensisnrureisin ideni 120 Important Files to Back Up Using the fra Command sses eeksena doania tinantang aks Using the Backup Tools inrecnspnn innate ia Working with ta gzip and iO seisnes eA seini naO Ra 122 Working with the Dump Utility srsnissssiareecsiiipinssrersrvstdaineesinsinisasaseuri ereite 123 Working with Floppy Disk Drives serssoisssiiseiines seriosas 123 DOS Floppies scisfenhateniininateasnnciaiiacanaihaiateiaejiesils 124 Ext2 Filesystem Ploppies csscevivesvass irene assir ERR E 124 Cross Platform Piling soeren iciaee nci o E EEEE REENE apieecicete 124 Using DOS Files in Linux Mandrake a125 Using Zip Drives to Store Fil Ssconsosicors arna 126 Creating Backups on CD Read Write Media ceccceeseeeseeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeaees 126 Hour 9 Managing Applications 129 Finding Few Good Programs s c6sss csisiescasestesisonscaspesscisdbenaalncescasessicacsva desseave 130 Getting Started with Gmome RPM weccssssssssssssesncsvesscsresecessoscoscsscescsnesscsaesbesies 131 Browsing Through KPackage 0 ccessecessecsseseeeeseceeeeeseeeeseeesseeaseetaeeeteeeanes 132 Installing Applications
5. Save as Create dao Si el A tat Kone oe Based on unreleased MacOS 6 5 theme Shunji Yamanaka Tstom Toda and Mitsuhiro Miyazaki 15 Windows eal Date amp Time Help Default Apply Cancel Manager for Desktop Themes View the theme Save your current desktop setup before you experiment with themes To do so click the Create button to display the kthememgr dialog box Type a title for your desktop setup in the Name text box and type a few words to describe the desktop settings in the Description text box 78 Hour 5 2 Browse through the list of themes There are quite a few to choose from When you click a theme you ll see a sample in the preview window Notice that colors window border and icons all have their own look 3 If you want to use the theme just the way it is click OK and close the KDE Control Center If you have to have it your way continue to do a little customizing 4 Click the Contents tab Here s where you can select which screen elements to use for the theme 5 Place a checkmark next to the theme elements you want to use on the desktop Not all of the elements listed are available The availability of an element is indicated to the right of the element The theme manager will only install those items that you select and only if they are available 6 Click Apply The theme manager will unpackage and install the
6. 358 Appendix A Hour 5 Quiz 1 Where do you find the navigation controls for the virtual desktops and how do you move from desktop area to desktop area The navigation controls are found on the KDE and GNOME panels By default these controls are in the middle of the panel GNOME calls these navigation con trols the pager It s easy to move from desktop area to desktop area just click on the icon for the desktop area that you want displayed on the screen 2 When does it make sense to use sticky windows If you will be working with more than one desktop area you may want to be able to use certain application windows no matter which desktop you are using By making the window sticky the window will follow you from desktop area to desktop area 3 What options do you have when you want to change the desktop background The simplest background and maybe the easiest on the eyes is a solid color back ground Two colors can be blended to form a gradient or can be used with a pre designed pattern Graphic images can also be used as wallpaper The image can be centered to take up only a small area in the middle of the screen it can be tiled to show several small copies of the image in rows and columns or it can fill the entire screen Hour 6 Quiz 1 What command tells you where you are currently working in the filesystem The pwd command If you are working at the command line and doing file management tasks you may want to u
7. 44 Civilization Call To Power Setup efor 2 Current file CivCTP ctp_data default graphics pictures cha002 tga MO Grey Once the program 328 ehm 2 TE X knows where it will D gt a sT live the rest of the ped EN en shove installation is a snap Percent complete j 8 After the installation is complete you ll be asked if you want to create a symbolic link in several directories Click the No to All button You are then returned to the initial setup screen 9 Click the Installation Complete button at the bottom of the window 10 After you close the initial setup screen you can log into your user account and begin playing the game To start the game open an X terminal window and type usr local games CivCTP civctp and press Enter The game loads and you will see the opening screen file manager and navigate to the usr local games CivCTP directory In KFM drag the civctp file to the desktop and select Link from the menu that appears when you release the mouse button You can also place a link to the Civilization game on your desktop Open a Z Finding Games on the Internet So you haven t had enough fun yet Looking for more ways to spend your free time Time to hook up that Internet connection and take a look at what s available for Linux in the games department The Linux Portal site provides over 350 games at www linuxlinks com Software Games The games are o
8. Using Scanners on a Network Scanners like printers need to be located close to the users If they are used as a replacement for a copy machine they need to be located next to the printer for ease of use The type of scanner you need is a function of your requirements your budget and which scanner is the one best supported by Linux eens Q The SANE drivers available for Linux installations work well with a number A of scanners To find out more information about SANE point your Web w browser to www mostang com sane Tips for Administering the Network The network administrator is the person upon whom all the responsibility for maintaining and operating the network falls This administrator needs to be able to predict the future recognize the present needs of the organization and admin ister day to day network operations The network administrator s job begins with planning the network and includes just about everything having to do with the installation maintenance growth and manage ment of the network The network administrator has a long list of tasks that must be done to administer the network properly Establish Routines Set up daily and weekly maintenance routines They will help you organize your time so that you don t spend it all doing network maintenance The following tasks should be done on a schedule e Adding new users e Cleaning up the hard drives e Installing upgrades e Doing backups and
9. 1 Open the account from which you wrote the check 2 Type the number of the check in the Chk field Or if you are recording checks sequentially type the plus sign in the field and the next check number will appear in the field 3 Type the name of the person or business to whom you wrote the check in the Description field 4 Type the amount of the check in the Debit field 5 Place the cursor in the Category field and click the Splits button to open the Category Splits window as shown in Figure 13 7 6 Enter the name of the first category to which you want to record a portion of the total payment You can type the name of the first category in the Category field open the Category List and paste the category or type a single letter and press Tab to use the auto complete feature 7 Type the amount to be applied to the first category in the Amount field Since this is a payment the number needs to be preceded by a minus sign 8 Click in the Category field for the second category Notice that the amount for this category is already computed for you Enter the name of the second category 9 When the total of the categories equals the amount of the payment click the Dismiss button The Category Splits window will close and the data you entered will appear in the Category field in the entry area Checkbooks Gone Digital 213 Balance automati Second category First category cally calculated cbb
10. If you mess up and forget to save the file CBB automatically creates a backup file and saves data to this file on a periodic basis If you need to use this backup file it is named filename cbb and is saved in the same directory in which the original file is saved Checkbooks Gone Digital 209 Using Categories to Track Spending Habits Categories help CBB track where you spend your money Each type of item on which you spend money such as rent or gasoline is a separate category CBB contains a category list which you can use and edit to suit your needs or you can create your own category list Once you have a starting category list you can add and delete categories as you go along Finding the Default Category List Most people may find that using the default category list is the easiest way to start By using this default list you have an existing list of categories that you may commonly need Remember once you start using this default list you can easily modify it to suit your lifestyle and spending habits Lesson 13 2 Building a Starting Category List If you re not sure what categories you might need use the default category list Follow these steps 1 Double click the account in the Account list to which you want to apply the default categories The account will be selected in the Account list and the filename will appear in the title bar 2 Click Functions Add Default Categories A confirmation dialog box
11. Once again if you want to test your skills try the following quiz and exercises Quiz 1 What tool enables you to easily move back and forth between using a KDE desk top and using a GNOME desktop 2 You find that you are frequently searching through the application menus looking for the same program What can you do to make it easier to find and start the appli cation 3 You can use the window buttons to minimize maximize and close windows Which button do you use if you want to perform some other function to a window 4 Name the different ways you can get a window out of your way and create more desktop space 5 Explain window focus policy and the different ways you can make a window active Exercises 1 It s not always easy to remember where you may have found a certain help topic As you re browsing through the KDE or GNOME Help browsers set bookmarks for the help files you may need again The process is different for each browser Use the Add Bookmarks command in the Bookmarks menu of the KDE Help browser In GNOME use File Add Bookmark 2 Customize the Application Starter menus In KDE click the Application Starter button move the mouse pointer to Panel and click Edit Menus The Menu Editor is where you can move applications and menus around on the menu When you first open the Menu Editor the KMenuedit Handbook opens in a separate window A N A 1 N V aay 2 CNN N ay m i HOUR 5
12. This list also includes shell command separators like I 1 dash and emdash One way to make passwords easy to remember is to take a word that the users will remember and change it For example you can take the word chicken and change it to ch1CK amp to make it harder to break the code and then add something extra like ch1CK amp 32 to add to the complexity Lesson 7 1 Creating an Account for a New User Before you start adding users to the system make a list of the people to whom you want to give access Then assign usernames and passwords Your users will need this informa tion to log on the system If you are keeping a notebook for the computer system make a note of these users and their account information but not the passwords Remember to keep your notebook in a safe and secure place 1 Click on User accounts on the Normal tab of the User account configurator win dow This opens the Users accounts window shown in Figure 7 2 System Administration Tasks 107 FiGURE 7 2 Users accounts c5 x TI U You can edit add or delete users ne Users accounts Select Add to add a new definition window lists all the Account Nave Uid Group B Joe Book user 505 Joe user accounts that author C Witherspoon 501 author have been created on bantam KDE user 502 bantam fip FTP User 14 fp the System games games 12 users 5 gdm 42 gdm gopher gopher 13 gopher itchy C Withersp
13. A Never wv If Possible w Always m Local mail directory Directory Yhome jaimie nsmail Choose Cancel 5 To tell Messenger the name of your ISP s incoming mail server click on POP in the Incoming Mail servers box and then click the Edit Button to display the dialog box seen in Figure 11 11 172 Hour 11 Do you lurk the newsgroups Before you can access the newsgroups set up A a news server from the Newsgroups Servers category Figure 11 11 Netscape Communicator needs General POP to know where to pick ServerName asi nyispne 0 Incoming mail server up your mail Server Type RORI s User Name vantnaail Username F Remember password F Check for mail every Automatically check for messages 6 Type the mail server name your ISP gave you in the Server Name text box 7 Type the username for your mail account in the User Name text box Select the Remember Password option if you don t want to have to type your password each time you check for new messages 8 You may want Messenger to check your mail for you Let Messenger know how often you want it to check for mail if it is different than every 10 minutes 9 Click OK to return to the Mail Servers panel You ll see the incoming mail server listed 10 Click OK on the Netscape Preferences window to close the panel and apply the new settings You re ready to get all that mail that s been accumulati
14. Pe You can move a copy of the text and leave the selected text in place by click Sey ing the Copy button 3 Move the cursor to where you want to paste the text 4 Click the Paste button The selected text reappears in the new location If you want to copy this text to another location place the cursor at the new location and click the Paste button again You can do this until other text is pasted to the clipboard Formatting the Document After you ve cleaned up the document and made your words sound good it s time to add some formatting to make your words look good You have several options for changing how text appears on the page When you want to change the appearance of a single word or a short line of text use character formatting When you want to change the look of an entire paragraph use paragraph formatting To give your document a uniform look and be able to control formatting changes use styles which are discussed next Using Styles to Format Paragraphs Your first step to making the document look good is to change the formatting of an entire paragraph with the Paragraph Environment list found on the toolbar A paragraph environment is often referred to as a style in other word processing programs A paragraph environment is a collection of formatting attributes that can be applied to a paragraph by selecting the paragraph and then selecting the style from the Paragraph Environment list Styles come i
15. There is a utility on the Linux Mandrake installation CD called dump The dump utility examines the files on your Linux filesystem and determines which ones need to be backed up It then copies these files to the given media tape If the dump is too large for the media the dump is broken into volumes The dump utility can be used to back up entire filesystems or incrementally to back up all files that have changed since the last incremen tal backup If you want to use dump check the man pages for its command syntax Working with Floppy Disk Drives Certainly the easiest way to back up a small number of files is to copy them onto floppy disks either by simply copying them or using the tar and gzip utilities For people with only one Linux computer this might be an adequate backup plan and even suitable for a long time Of course your ability to utilize the 3 5 inch floppy drive as a backup device depends on how much data you need to back up A full backup for a large system can require as much as 2GB of storage which is way too many floppies for sure There are other options for that sized job we discuss those in the section Creating Backups on CD Read Write Media later in this hour 124 Hour 8 Although the 3 5 inch floppy disks won t store a large amount of data they still can do a fair job if your general backup plan is to save the install media for your installed applica tions and then just concern yourself with backing up y
16. graphics 3D modeling programs 317 318 animation programs 314 316 morphing programs 318 321 XMorph 319 XMRM 320 321 The Gimp 287 290 blank canvases creating 291 292 lines drawing 293 photograph enhancement 294 scanner plug in 295 starting 290 system requirements 288 289 toolbox 291 tutorials 294 User Manual 290 graphics programs Electronic Eyes 326 328 GQView 328 329 KDE Icon Editor 330 333 Klllustrator 298 309 aligning objects 310 color picker 298 colorizing drawing objects 305 307 Create Polygon tool 310 Create Polyline tool 310 designing drawings 301 304 drawing basic shapes 299 300 drawing tools 298 fill colors 305 307 grids 301 302 helplines 310 importing graphic files 309 layers 302 304 polygons drawing 310 saving work 300 301 Select Mode tool 305 text adding to drawings 307 309 toolbars moving 298 window 298 299 Zoom tool 304 KSnapshot 331 332 KView 329 330 Grid dialog box 301 grids KIllustrator 301 302 group accounts 110 111 directory access permissions setting 112 113 file permissions setting 114 sharing files 112 114 Group specification window Linuxconf 111 GUIs graphical user inter faces 50 54 Gnome see Gnome graphical user interface KDE see KDE graphical user interface switching between 52 gzip utility 123 Ho hard drives partitioning 23 Disk Defragmenter 23 24 mount points assigning 26 hardware cabling 145 14
17. s Emacs text editor Emacs can be any thing you want it to be It is complex and it can be used to write applications edit files and lots of other things You can use Emacs to write a whole operating system but it might take you a while to learn how to use it that effectively You will learn how to use Emacs for text processing and how to use the very nice calendar and other time manage ment tools Part VI Going for the Graphics is your introduction to The Gimp KIllustrator video and animation applications and many of the graphics viewers and utilities included with the distribution Part VIL Sit Back and Have Some Fun introduces you to the multimedia players and games that come with Linux Mandrake to round out your Linux education 4 Sams Teach Yourself Linux Mandrake in 24 Hours Conventions Found in This Book This book uses special typefaces and other graphical elements to highlight different types of information Notes _ 4h We use notes to mention places where more information can be found such Zs im gd as program help and the Internet reminders and references to information Sean 7 eee in other chapters of the book Tips These talk about ways in which programs can be used more efficiently and areas that can be explored to increase your skills Cautions E a We use cautions to point out places in programs where caution needs to be MM D exercised to avoid poten
18. ve seen Use the drawing tools to create shapes apply color and erase areas on the canvas Use the color picker to apply color to shapes and pixels on the canvas Taking Snapshots of Your Desktop Have you wondered how the pictures you ve seen throughout this book were created Pretty simple We used a screen capture utility There are several Linux applications and utilities that will take a picture of your desktop KSnapshot is one KSnapshot shown in Figure 22 6 is a KDE screen capture utility that can be set up to capture the whole screen or just a selected window You specify the filename for the image of the desktop and the directory in which it should be saved You also have a choice of five image file formats in which to save the screen capture You can find KSnapshot in the KDE main menu under Graphics Snapshot You can also type ksnapshot in an X terminal window 332 Hour 22 FiGURE 22 6 o REESE OX KSnapshot is an easy way to take a picture of your desktop KSnapshot Press the Grab button then click on a window to grab it KSnapshot is copyright Richard Moore rich kde org and is released under LGPL es Version 0 2 7 Type filename Nangwa Options Filename home author snapshot01 gif W Auto raise Image file format F_ Delay seconds Help RETo Fe Browse I Hide KSnapshot window I Only grab the window contkining the curso
19. 90 X Windows system 61 Wine Development Headquarters Web site 352 Wine Windows emulator 352 workgroups 106 working directory 90 workstations documenting configuration 148 Zoom tool 387 X Z X starting 29 X games 348 X server setting up 36 37 X terminal window 90 X Windows configuring 34 37 X Windows CD player 339 X Windows system 61 XChat program 176 177 Xconfigurator 29 35 37 45 XF86Config file 35 XF86Setup 35 XMorph 319 XMRM 320 321 xpat2 353 Xtrojka 348 ypbind daemon 15 Zip Drive mini HOWTO Web site 126 Zip drives 126 Zoom tool KIllustrator 304 The IT site you asked for InformIT NN InformIT is a complete online library delivering information technology reference training news and opinion to IT professionals students and corporate users Find IT Solutions Here www informit com InformIT is a trademark of Macmillan USA Inc Copyright 2000 Ma caai USA I By opening this package you are agreeing to be bound by the following agreement The code from the author s is copyrighted by the publisher and author s Individual programs and other items on the CD ROM are copyrighted by their various authors or other copyright holders Some of the programs included with this product are governed by the GNU General Public License which allows redistribution see the license infor mation for each product for more information Other programs are i
20. Changing Your View of the Desktop The previous hour was spent exploring both the KDE and GNOME desktop environments You learned where to find some fun and useful applications You may have spent some time customizing the panel so that you can more easily find favorite applications Then to wrap things up there was a tour of the workings of windows This hour builds on this knowledge by showing you how you can arrange all those windows onto multiple desktops Then you can have some fun and spruce up your desktop with colors window dressings and wallpapers We cover both KDE and GNOME again during this hour At the end of the hour you ll be e Organizing windows using virtual desktops e Sprucing up the desktop with background colors and wallpapers e Using screensavers to lock others out of your user account e Changing the appearance of window borders and other elements with color schemes and themes 68 Hour 5 Commuting in a Virtual World One of Linux s strong suits is that it is a true multitasking operating system The cool thing about this is that you can have a multitude of applications open on your desktop and not notice much degradation in your computer s performance In the previous hour you learned how to work with multiple windows and arrange them on the desktop You ll now learn to more efficiently manage open applications by working with multiple desk top areas These multiple desktop areas or virtual desktops
21. Figure 20 3 shows the design phase for a brochure cover Different elements of the brochure cover are placed on different layers so that text can be changed to create covers for different products You ve already seen that KIllustrator does a great job at creating basic images It also contains tools that help you lay out your design and keep things in order One way to create balance in your drawings is to use a grid A grid separates your draw ing area into a series of rows and columns Select Layout Grid if you want to use a grid to help arrange your drawing The Grid dia log box shown in Figure 20 4 is where you will set up the dimensions of your grid 3 0 2 Hour 20 Create balance with grids FIGURE 20 3 Sketch your design ideas on paper before you begin your drawing Separate design elements into layers Use helplines to align objects Plan special effects Make preliminary sketches Doodles can be A Color scheme block Auke ape pi productive to aN Gee va Say Choose drawing colors FIGURE 20 4 Gna Grids help organize Bk lt _ _ FT your drawing into Horizontally 140 000 4 pt x logical sections Vertically 90 000 E pt Measurement unit I Snap To Grid Align objects to closest gridline ee cua Show gridlines OK Cance Help j onscreen Set spacing Set the distance between each grid marker for grid lines that appear across the page and gri
22. Follow these steps to do so 1 Display the calendar for the year and month for which you want to record the birth marriage or other event 2 Select the date on which the event occurred 3 Use the I A command to create the diary entry 4 Type the information about who was born or who got married You ll have an entry that looks something like diary anniversary 1 22 1901 Grandma Goodie s birthday This entry will appear on January 22 of every year after Grandma s birth in 1901 5 Save the diary file Entering Recurring Appointments You may have meetings or things to do on a regular basis whether that be weekly monthly or yearly If an event occurs regularly there s no need to select each day the event occurs and make separate entries You can tell Emacs how often the event occurs and Emacs will make all the necessary entries The diary file in Figure 18 4 shows an example of each of the commands used to keep track of recurring events 280 Hour 18 Ficure 18 4 emacs diary File Edit Apps Options Buffers Tools macs uses a specia dateformeroecp BHA A OA O Af track of items that Nov 6 1999 To start your diary entry just begin typing Use Shiftrenter to AER new line and remember to leave a space or two occur on a regular on each line after the cate a Nov 24 1999 8an 10am Dentist Reminders for 1 Staff meeting in Graig s office events that basis Friday Back up network files Apr 15 Ta
23. Once Ss oe Py aaa you have done so Linuxconf will open In order to start Linuxconf as the superuser open an X terminal window and at the com mand prompt type su and press Enter You ll be asked for a password Type the root password and press Enter Now type linuxconf at the command line and press Enter When Linuxconf opens the Config tab should appear To work with user and group accounts click Users accounts Doing so opens the User account configurator shown in Figure 7 1 FIGURE 7 1 Linuxconf 1 16 subrev 2 1 _ i e x Give each user an This is the main entry to Linux configuration re bee Use the TAB key to navigate between the field individual ace ount and section and the button bar at the bottom e use groups for file Check out the help for this screen It is an User account configurator amp introduction to Linuxconf This package allows you to add delete sharing between users and manage user accounts Normal special accounts Email aliases Policies Add users Main Linuxconf window Work with user and group accounts Closing Linuxconf When you are finished using Linuxconf you ll need to click the Quit button at the bot tom of each of the open windows After you ve pressed all these buttons the Status of the system panel will tell you that the state of the system is not in sync with your new changes All you need to do is tell Linuxco
24. Sams Teach Yourself Linux Mandrake in 24 Hours Time Management with Emacs 273 Trying the Ema s Calendar snina nea eE EA Starting the Calendar nimaeimen aap a e RRE Moving from Date to Date A Fow Fun Features orsoni te a E covets tophcaene Displaying Holidays is ccsccesccseeceszivavedeedicsanepcasisssesvescoveesdbncensosnensescdedescensneateecs Tes Ful Moom Again ricin saaka a e ei aaea D at Diary srep rsssen sisenema ree EENAA EERE E O EEEE ER Keeping Track of Appointment 000 0 ceeeceeseeecseeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseeetaeseeeeetes 278 Searching the Diary Files sa inararo E E EE 281 Part VI Going for the Graphics 285 Hour 19 The Gimp 287 Getting Ready foran Art Adventure ssciscccssceccnesiciiasctesdsisessestecsoscansontiees ccasisanse 288 System Requirements fissan ereer E AREE EEES 288 Scanning Photo traphSsessninne siera na E E EE 289 And Here s e GIMP som e ARN 290 Hour 20 Getting Started SUMMA reris a a a a a a OQA ranneke e E deena EO antonaanee ees WOrkShOD sie erans Ea R IREE EO Aa AERO REET NEEE ETE aE aieea OUZ E E O ANE carters uessseneanes EXErCISES Asii A A dot dea texctieeesenta KIllustrator 297 Gettine Started with Kill strator sesoses diets 298 Exploring the Kill strator Window siiis prain isernia 298 Saving Yo t WOK sccusescsscasssianseviisoessaveedseusssssaseoss sa inp roa i iieiea teni aas SEN aka 300 Settms Up Your Drawing essare chan tia wactiissctiviss E wana EEI EEUE ENA 301 Co
25. This preparation will help you avoid the trail hazards and stay on track to the scenic viewpoints With the right preparation you can map out those areas with loose rocks blind corners and cliff hazards and avoid the major problems as you move along It ll be fun you ll probably want to stop and enjoy the view along the way There are some secrets to discover and a few hidden surprises along the road to a successful installation But you don t need to worry you are beginning the trip in the best of company with Linux Mandrake Linux Mandrake is one of the easiest GNU Linux distributions to install and configure During the next hour you ll work through the Linux trail guide and learn the secrets 10 Hour 1 to successfully installing Linux Mandrake on your computer During the following hour you ll prepare for the installation by e Determining whether your computer meets the minimum system requirements e Deciding where Linux Mandrake will reside on the computer e Selecting which applications and services you want to install e Making sure that your equipment is compatible with Linux Mandrake Before You Begin There are many ways to work with Linux Mandrake and we can t cover them all in one book This book concentrates on using the distribution on a standalone workstation and introduces a selection of applications that you might use at home or at work Home users will enjoy the assortment of Internet and personal management app
26. figuration tool to correct this but before you begin make sure you know the I O port and IRQ and DMA settings for the sound card To configure the sound card log into the root account and type sndconfig at the command prompt This runs the sound configuration tool If your sound configura tion tool does not detect your sound card you ll need to select from the list You can also use the soundcard configuration tool found in DrakConf Open DrakConf and select the Hardware configuration option DrakConf will try to detect the soundcard and other devices From the list of devices select the sound card and run the configuration tool to test the sound Q Which players can I use if I want to play MPEG files A If you want to play mp3 format files try the KDE MPEG audio player kmpg The KDE MPEG audio player not only plays MP3 files but you can listen to broad casts off the Internet There s also the Kmp3 player Workshop With all the singing and dancing going on during this hour you may have thought we would forget to test what you ve learned over the past hour We ll skip the talent show but here are a few questions that test your performance skills Quiz 1 What is the easiest way to keep a database of all your music CDs 2 What are some of the popular sound file formats that are found on the Internet Exercises 1 You may find that you have other multimedia needs than those covered during this past hour There are o
27. give you the feeling you are working with multiple computer screens When using virtual desktops you can play games on one desktop area and then quickly move to another desktop area that contains a spreadsheet and calculator with which you re putting together an important report for the boss You ll find the navigation controls for these virtual desktop areas on the panel On the KDE panel you ll find four buttons that are labeled One Two Three and Four In GNOME you ll see a box divided into four rectangular areas Working with Multiple Desktop Areas Figures 5 1 and 5 2 show the navigation controls for the KDE and GNOME desktop areas One difference you ll notice is that the KDE desktop areas have names One Two Three Four and the GNOME desktop areas only contain the outline of any windows that are open on that desktop Most likely you are working in the first desktop area which is the top left virtual desktop button If you want to look at another desktop just click another desktop button By default there are four desktop areas that you can use The virtual desktop icon for the desktop area you are viewing will be highlighted To move to a different desktop click one of the other virtual desktop icons The GNOME pager contains a Tasklist button When you click this button a list of open application windows appears Just click the Tasklist icon for the window you want displayed when you can t remember on which deskt
28. good idea to read through this page while you are here Here is another example of the way man works say you are looking for information on the 1s command At the command line type man 1s and press Enter man displays a sum mary of what the 1s command does and its syntax and options The same is true for all Linux commands At the top of each manual page the first heading is NAME and beneath it is a short one line description of the command Using the apropos command you can search these one line descriptions If you don t know exactly what you are looking for type a key word and institute a keyword search with the apropos command like so apropos print This command returns a listing of all of the man pages that have print in the short description In Table 3 4 you ll find a useful short list of Linux commands that you may want to explore on your own Each command is listed with a short description of what it does This listing is by no means complete but you may find some useful tools in it To find out more about what each command does and how it is used simply type man and the name of the command you are interested in and press Enter 42 Hour 3 Taste 3 4 Useful Linux Commands Try This Command To Learn How To alias Create other names for commands at Run programs on a preset schedule atq List the programs waiting for at atrm Remove programs from the at queue list cat Concatenate files sticks them end to e
29. ll also find a few differences along the way You ll see some of these similarities in Figure 4 3 which shows a KDE desktop and Figure 4 4 which shows a GNOME desktop e KDE contains a taskbar that runs across the top of your screen Whenever you are working with an application you ll see an icon for that application on the taskbar The taskbar also shows icons for applications that are open but minimized If you want an application window to appear at the front of all others or if you want to display a minimized window click the application s icon on the taskbar On both the KDE and GNOME desktops you ll see quite a number of desktop icons These icons open applications files folders and start utilities Desktop icons can be rearranged or deleted and new icons can also be added The panel lives at the bottom of the screen in both KDE and GNOME by default You ll use the panel when you want to open applications and switch between vir tual desktop areas The panel also tells you the time and it can be hidden to create more desktop space In GNOME the Main Menu button lists available applications and utilities In KDE you ll find the same list by clicking the Application Starter button Living in a Graphical Workspace 55 Desktop icons Taskbar KDE World Wide wi FIGURE 4 3 The KDE desktop is very customizable and provides easy access to a variety of applica tions and utilities
30. or the GNOME tasklist M Customizing the Virtual Desktop After working with the four virtual desktop areas you may find that you can get by with fewer desktop areas or you may find that you need more 70 Hour 5 The path you follow to get to the tools to change virtual desktops in KDE and GNOME is different You ll also find that the tools look different The method for changing the number of desktop areas in GNOME is quick Just right click on the desktop to open the Enlightenment Settings menu and click The dialog box contains two sliders one horizontal and one vertical as shown in Figure 5 4 When you move the sliders the number of desktops will change FIGURE 5 4 Viua Deskop Settings In GNOME you can Virtual Desktop size 2x2 Screens in size change the number of virtual desktops and the array they are dis played in as Panel Ee icons _J Enable edge flip Resistance at edge of screen ok Aen cose Use sliders to change number Number of of desktop areas desktop areas Lesson 5 2 Changing the Number of Desktop Areas in KDE To make it easier for you to navigate your virtual world KDE gives you the flexibility of renaming the desktop area icons In addition you can also change the number of desktop areas with which you can operate Follow these steps 1 Click the Application Starter button and move the mouse pointer to Panel Configure to open the KPanel Configuration dia
31. property options setting 64 sizing 61 title bar buttons cus tomizing 63 CD player applet 64 desktop 54 56 background settings 72 75 80 color schemes 76 icons 78 79 pager settings 80 screensavers 75 76 themes 77 80 virtual desktops 68 72 Help browser 58 logging out 52 54 menus 56 panel 58 60 application launchers adding 59 icon screen notes creating 59 60 icons rearranging 64 GNOME printer icons creating 240 GNOME System Monitor 116 GNOME Tali 347 GNOME Web site 31 79 graphical user interfaces 377 Gnome RPM 131 applications finding installed applica tions 131 132 installing 135 136 installed package list 353 starting 131 Web find utility 138 gnorpm command 131 GNU GMAN 317 GNU Midnight Commander 95 directories deleting 100 renaming 99 views 96 97 files deleting 100 moving between directo ries 99 renaming 99 selecting 97 98 subdirectories creating 98 GnuChess 348 GnuLactic Conquest 346 gpm daemon 14 GOQView 328 329 gradient backgrounds desk tops 73 74 gradient colors KIllustrator 306 307 graphical file managers 95 98 directories deleting 100 renaming 99 views 96 97 files deleting 100 moving between directories 99 renaming 99 selecting 97 98 subdirectories creating 98 graphical user interfaces GUIs 50 54 Gnome see Gnome graphical user interface KDE see KDE graphical user interface switching between 52 378 graphics
32. s total of 5s 6 s total of Gs Upper total Bonus 3 of a Kind total 4 of a Kind total Select your score 5 a x Large Straight 40 Click the dice Yahtzee 50 Chance total to re roll Lower Total Grand Total Roll the selected dice uman You re up Wait for other players to take their turns 348 Hour 24 Playing X Strategy Games There s another menu in GNOME that lists a number of X games The X games are games that run on the X server that you configured for your Mandrake system during installation If you want to test your strategy and your patience give a few of these games a try Start at the GNOME Main menu and move the mouse pointer to AnotherLevel menus Games Strategy Here you ll find some of your favorite board games such as backgammon and chess and other games where you try to solve the puzzle in the shortest amount of time possible One of the best chess games available is the GnuChess chess engine GnuChess is played using XBoard shown in Figure 24 3 as the graphical user interface To start XBoard look for it in the AnotherLevel menus or type xboard in an X Terminal window FIGURE 24 3 xio gnuchessx vs gnuchessx P J File Mode Action Step Options Help When you want a White 4 42 Black 4 55 quiet comfortable ItO d ACET game of chess open 5 Be7 5 W 0 18 c2c4 d7d6 adc6 b7c6 d2d4 e5d4 lt lt lt gt gt gt the XBoard Keep track of moves
33. select the text and Z choose Edit Text Properties Remove Properties from the menu 258 Hour 16 Formatting Text There are a number of formatting attributes that you can apply to text Before you can apply the attribute you need to select the text Text formatting attributes can be found in the Edit menu under Text Properties Face You have two options for using commands to format text If the text that you want to for mat already appears in the buffer select the text and then use one of the formatting com mands listed in Table 16 5 If you want to set the text formatting before you enter the text place the cursor where you want the next text to start use the formatting command and then begin typing the text TaBLE 16 5 Applying Text Formatting Text Format Attribute Command Default text format Ctr1 X Shift F D Bold text Ctrl X Shift F B Italic text Ctrl X Shift F I Bold and italic text Ctrl X Shift F L Underline text Ctrl X Shift F U To view text formatting select the text and click Edit Text Properties List H Properties Lesson 16 4 Changing the Default Tab Positions If you want to line up text in rows and columns the easiest way is to use tabs By default Emacs sets tab positions every 10 spaces Follow along and change the tab stops for your document 1 Place the cursor in the document at the place where you want to use tabs 2 Use the Tab Stops command by typing Alt X edit tab stops an
34. these instructions and you see the result on your screen Hour 18 Quiz 1 What is the quickest way to move to a date that is several months or years away from the currently selected date You can go to a specific date by using the G D command Answers 367 2 How do you keep track of appointments and other events that happen on certain days of the week month or year Use the I W I M and I Y commands to create these entries To use the command you ll first need to select the specific day on which the event occurs and then use the appropriate command Emacs will enter the appropriate date format All you need to do is type enough information so that you ll know what is going to happen on that date 3 How do you display your appointment list and other diary entries for the current date Use the Alt X diary command This command displays all the entries in the diary that use the current date It does not matter which date is selected in the calendar Hour 19 Quiz 1 What file format should you use when working on images and photographs in The Gimp The Gimp uses the xcf file format as its native file format By using this file for mat you retain all the Gimp s features in your working files The xcf format is needed to retain layers channels and other elements that make it possible to work on separate areas of an image 2 How do you change the color that s applied to a drawing object Click the foreground color ico
35. 1 Select a package Amusements 9 Applications Archiving Communications Editors Emulators Engineering GFile GFinance internet Click to expand list Display packages in a category e Lesson 9 1 Finding Installed Applications with Gnome RPM Gnome RPM can tell you quite a bit of information about the applications you installed with Linux Mandrake For this exercise you do not need to be logged into the root account Any user on the system can view information about installed applications Here s how to learn more about what you can do with your Linux system 1 Select a package from one of the categories and click the Query button to display the package information for the application An example is shown in Figure 9 2 132 Hour 9 Program execution command Version number FIGURE 9 2 fa Package Info ox Query packages to find xanim out what they do anim 28010 5mdk Size 1515045 Install Date Sun Dec 05 11 22 24 GMT 1999 where they are located Build Host locutus mandrakesoft de Build Date Mon Jul 05 10 39 22 GMT 1999 a ji dl Distribution LinuxMandrake Vendor MandrakeSoft ana where you can fin Group Applications Multimedia Packager Bernhard Rosenkraenzer more information The XAnim program is an animation video audio viewer for the X Window System XAnim can display a large variety of animation audio and Program description video formats
36. 1 At the login prompt type the username that you selected during the installation and press Enter You ll see the password prompt on the next line 2 Type your password and press Enter You won t see any characters entered or the cursor move while you type the password if you chose the default setting of using shadow passwords during the installation You ll see a prompt that looks something like the following where author is replaced with your username author localhost author Living in a Graphical Workspace 51 This is the handy dandy command line Linux geeks live for this command line experience For right now you can use it to get to the default user interface KDE 3 Type startx and press Enter You ll see a black and white screen with a black X This X is the cursor You ll need to wait a minute longer and KDE will appear on your screen Before you move on to the next lesson there are a few things you need to be acquainted with The desktop in Figure 4 1 shows KDE and a few of the features you ll need to know about before you go any further FIGURE 4 1 ileymome gander The GIMP Konsole The KDE desktop a Advanced Editor E Games gt Emacs A Graphics gt amp Ghostview Internet kFilecoder p A Multimedia r gt klyx Application Starter Settings gt me E me a kreglo 4 Konsole OX stem 2 ii 7 enu an amp Text Editor A Eile Se
37. 1s command are files or directories You don t The 1s command can be used with a modifier to display more information about the contents The Marvelous Mystical Filesystem Tour 91 3 To find out the modifier options you have to ask the shell Type 1s help and press Enter The whole list of command modifiers and their uses appears on the screen Use the scrollbar on the terminal window to read through the list of modi fier options Lots of options aren t there 4 To display more information about the directory contents you ll need to modify the 1s command to use the long list format Type 1s 1 and press Enter This com mand returns information in the following format total 3 drwxr xr x 5 Joe Joe 1024 Nov 9 08 18 Desktop drwx 3 Joe Joe 1024 Nov 9 14 37 books rw rw r 1 Joe Joe Nov 9 14 40 practice drwxr xr x 2 Joe Joe 1024 Nov 9 08 15 tmp Now all of this may seem like garble to you so let s straighten it out some The listing above is made up of eight columns Just remember that the first line in the display tells you the number of subdirectories in the directory Each line that follows lists each item The first character in the first column indicates whether the item is a directory d or a file In this example the first second and fourth items are directories and the third item is a file The next nine characters in the first column are in groups of three characters each and they reflect th
38. 261 split windows 249 starting 246 247 text editing 256 257 262 text entry 253 254 text formatting 257 262 toolbar 247 Screem 221 222 druids 223 installation 222 Web sites creating 224 230 The Gimp 287 290 blank canvases creating 291 292 lines drawing 293 photograph enhancement 294 scanner plug in 295 starting 290 system requirements 288 289 toolbox 291 tutorials 294 User Manual 290 properties system properties 17 Properties dialog box 305 pwd command 90 OR Qt 322 quiz answers 355 371 random daemon 14 rawrite program creating installation boot disks 22 23 ray tracing 317 reconciling accounts Check Book Balancer 216 217 recording checks Check Book Balancer 211 213 recurring transactions Check Book Balancer 215 relative filenames 88 renaming directories files 99 repeating characters entering in Emacs 254 Report document class KLyX 185 restoring files from KDE trash 101 Rice University Digital Image Processing course Web site 319 rm command 94 rmdir command 94 root directories 87 Root Password screen installa tion program 28 routed daemon 14 Royal Frazier s GIF Animation Web site 314 Soo SANE Scanner Access Now Easy 289 290 SANE drivers 153 saving accounts Check Book Balancer 208 files Emacs 251 Klllustrator 300 301 scanners SANE Scanner Access Now Easy 289 290 sharing 153 Xscanimage plug in Gi
39. Add a new category Add Delete Paste Dismiss If you don t think you ll need a category highlight the category and click the Delete button You ll be asked to confirm your choice If you need to add a category to the list click the Add button and fill in the information to describe the new category Lesson 13 3 Creating a New Category If you want to keep track of where you spend your money you ll need a category for each type of spending You may also want to create separate categories for your different income sources Follow these steps 1 Open the Category List 2 Click the Add button to display the Add New Category dialog box shown in Figure 13 5 zimi Please enter a new category and description Category Advertising Category name income and expense Description Advert Category description categories i Tax Related See category list Add to the category list Do not add to the list Figure 13 5 Create additional Used for tax purposes Add category to list 3 Type a name for the category that describes the type of income or the type of expense 4 You may want to add a few words to remind you what the category is used for in the Description text box 5 If the category is an item that you claim on your tax return select the Tax Related option Checkbooks Gone Digital 211 6 When you ve finished click Add to the category list The new category will
40. E 7 Ei AAAR PR AALSA E E S A SETI A L S EEEE AEE A A email addresses Then you can post your page to the Inteznet using Navigator Gold s Publish feature FIGURE 11 13 Replace text and images to create a Web page that is uniquely you File Create tables Example Image Format text A Welcome to Floribunda pulrveyors of the world s finest blooms and Replace text gardening products 4 Edit to your heart s content and don t forget to save your work every now and then 5 When you are done editing check with your ISP for instructions on how and where to publish your Web pages on their servers Getting on the Internet 175 Transferring Files with gFTP Who says Linux applications aren t slick If you need a utility to transfer files across the Internet try gFTP FTP or File Transfer Protocol is one of the oldest of the Internet util ities and it is still the best method for file transfer gFTP can get you access to any FTP site whether you need an anonymous login or if a password is required You ll also find one of your favorite browser features the capability to keep a list of FTP sites that you visit frequently See Table 11 4 for the directions to gFTP TABLE 11 4 Finding gFTP From This Direction GNOME Main Menu X terminal window Follow This Course Slide on over to Internet gftp Type gftp and press
41. Edit You ll be presented with the Edit Figure dialog box shown in Figure 12 10 Figure 12 10 E Fatigue X Determine how the EPS Figure parots eps Browse Finda r Width r Height m Display picture should appear C Default EN DINAN picture on the page from the lee C cm Display as grayscale Edit Figure dialog box Bree C inches Display in color C of Page Hi C Do not display this figure Set picture size of Column C of Page Options A I I Display Frame r Rotation Angle f0 Do Translations I Subfigure Caption Apply Cancel Full Screen Preview 4 Click the Browse button to locate the EPS image file 5 Set the height and width for the image as it should appear in the printed document Consider these options e Default inserts the image at its original file size e Use inches or cm centimeters to set the size at which the image will appear on the page Type the height or width in the text box at the bottom of the list of options Document Processing with KLyX 199 e To retain the image aspect ratio set the width in inches cm or percent of the page Then select the Default option button for the height 6 If you want to add some descriptive text about the picture type it in the Caption text box Hide images on your screen if you want the document to display faster by A selecting the Do not display this figure option
42. Edit menu and click your favorite program from the list The program you select will open on the desktop with the image displayed in its image window You can add and subtract external editors from the Edit menu Select Edit Options Click the External Editors tab and type the name and execution command for the editor you want to add to the list X i X SS I pr it SES Watching Slideshows with KView Just as Electric Eyes is the image viewer for GNOME K View is the generic image viewer for KDE You can use K View to crop rotate and flip images K View can also create slideshows To open K View from the KDE main menu select Graphics Image Viewer You can also type kview in an X terminal window You can open several files select File Open one after another and K View will keep track of them To view a list of the open files click Images List to display the Image List shown in Figure 22 4 330 Hour 22 Open an image Display Image List Open image files FiGURE 22 4 F enment themes Linux Mandrake backgroundsfimagesfdqthar g gt lt Z Eile Edit Zoom Transform To Desktop Filter Images Help Display the Image List A to start the slideshow 4 kview Image List o X file home author fishanim png file nome author mandrake jpg EAVES prey Shuffle N it Ready Start slide KE gt l J View slideshow When you click a file in the Image List the
43. Excheck cbb File Edit Functions External Chk Date FIGURE 13 7 Transaction amounts can be divided between multiple categories ic x a a Description Debit Credit Comment Category ate gory lt 10 01 99 Begin Balance Enter check isz2 10726799 uper Big Market 66 97 0 00 m information Example credt EXcheck Example checki Example savings account Open account Saving transgctions to Excheck cbb Assign multiple categories Sum 66 87 Dismiss Apply split to transaction 10 When the transaction is complete click the Accept Transaction button The transac tion will appear in the account register and the account balance will be reduced by the amount of the check as shown in Figure 13 8 FIGURE 13 8 If you ve been follow ing the example this is how your checkbook register should look File Edit Functions External Chk Date Description Debit Credit Total Comment Category 0 00 10 01 99 Begin Balance 500 00 1521 10 26 99 Henry Rossman 500 00 0 00 0 00 November rent ees Example credt card accou Example checking account 66 87 66 87 EXsave Example savings account 1000 00 1000 00 Saving transactions to EXcheck cbb 214 Hour 13 Posting Deposits You ll find that entering a deposit into CBB is much the same as entering a check The only difference is that you don t use a check number and the a
44. Gnome RPM is the GNOME graphical front end for Red Hat s package management system a tool that makes manipulating applications and comparing installed programs with their source code and other such complicated technical things into simple tasks All the good simple tasks like installing upgrading and uninstalling packages have to be done by the root account But users can query packages and verify them to determine their status To find Gnome RPM select System GnoRPM from the main menu You can also type gnorpm in an X terminal window Take a moment to examine the Gnome RPM window shown in Figure 9 1 The directory tree that appears on the left lists the categories of packages that are installed The right panel displays the list of packages contained in each category To expand the directory list just click the plus sign next to a directory name G Gnome RPM 0X FIGURE 9 1 Gnome RPM lists all the packages that are installed with the Linux operating system Packages Operations Help eo x 3o Yg Install Unselect Uninstall Query i Find Web find Ce gnome gnome ImageMagick kdegraphica 1 kdemultimedia bar progs 2 audio 1 media 1 1 2 3mdk 0 0 7mdk 0 9 1 1mdk 2 8 1mdk 1 2 2mdk n mikmod 3 mpg123 0 inate 2 pama 2 pomis rhsound 1 1 5 6mdk 59q 7mdk 4 8mdk 8 2mdk GNetworking rit ack Productivity S s S sndcontigd sox 12 xpaint 2 E P 34 3mdk___ 16 3mdk 4 3 Smadk Packages selected
45. HTML code but also can manage every aspect of your Web site Screem will automatically update your site if you rename or rearrange pages in the site Q amp A Q Ihave Web pages that I created in another Web page editor Can I use these pages in Screem A It s quite simple to open these files in Screem Click the Open Site button and navi gate to the directory in which the Web pages are stored Screem will ask you to enter the site information once the files have been imported Q Id like to learn more about how to write HTML code Can you recommend any good sources A There must be tons of books that will teach you how to create Web pages by writ ing your own HTML code One of the better books that we ve come across is Sams Teach Yourself Web Publishing with HTML in 21 Days by Laura Lemay Building a Web Site with Screem 231 If you want to surf the Internet for HTML help check out About com About com is a Web portal that contains information for everyone There are two areas of About com that Web designers will find most useful html about com and webdesign about com To go straight to the HTML authorities visit the World Wide Web Consortium HyperText Markup Language Home Page at www w3 org MarkUp Workshop It s now time to check up on your Web site design skills Here are a few quiz questions to test the knowledge you gained over the past hour There are also a couple of exercises to help you create an even better Web
46. Hat Linux Print System Manager This tool also called printtool manages any printers that are attached to your computer Not only can you add and delete printers but you also can limit the size of the files that are sent to a printer The printtool can configure about 60 printer types for use as the local or network printer A local printer is attached directly to a computer workstation usually through a parallel port only that workstation can send jobs to that printer If your computer is attached to a network you may have access to a printer through the network And you may have to walk down the hall to pick up your printed document Easy for you because the system administrator is responsible for setting up new equip ment on the network and making sure everything is configured and working correctly To get to the Red Hat Linux Print System Manager you must first be logged into the root account Then type printtool in an X terminal window M You can also access the Red Hat Linux Print System Manager from DrakConf A Select the Printer Configuration option You ll find that the DrakConf printer Z configuration method looks slightly different from the Red Hat print tool A series of Error windows will appear Don t worry about these These errors let you know about packages that are not installed on your computer You won t need these to configure a local printer The opening printtool window appears as shown in Figure
47. KIllustrator 310 Create Polyline tool KIllustrator 310 Desktop Switching Tool 373 Creative Open Source Web site 38 crond daemon 14 cursor commands Emacs 255 256 cursor position Emacs dis playing 263 custom installation 12 15 daemons selecting 13 15 installation packages select ing 12 13 customizing virtual desktops 69 71 window title bar buttons 63 cyclic diary entries Emacs cal endar 282 D daemons 13 15 date and time changing 115 116 dates Emacs calendar select ing 275 definition lists KLyX creat ing 195 deleting directories 94 100 files 94 100 text KLyX documents 186 user accounts 110 deposits posting Check Book Balancer 214 Describe Function command 270 Describe Key command 268 description lists KLyX creat ing 195 design elements KLyX docu ments adding 197 designing Web pages Screem 228 230 Desktop Switching Tool 52 374 desktops desktops Gnome desktop 54 56 background settings changing 72 75 color schemes 76 icons customizing 78 79 pager settings 80 screensavers 75 76 80 themes 77 80 virtual desktops 68 72 KDE desktop 54 56 background settings changing 72 75 color schemes 76 icons customizing 78 79 screensavers 75 76 themes 77 78 virtual desktops 68 72 diagrams network 149 dialog boxes Configure Filter 236 Display Settings 73 Edit Local Printer Entry 236 Grid 301 KLyX Configure Paper Format 1
48. Linux Mandrake distribution 2 How do you find software programs that are installed on your Linux computer but do not show up in the KDE or GNOME menus 3 Where can you find packages that can be installed on your Linux computer Exercises 1 Use Gnome RPM to create a desktop shortcut for any applications to which you d like to have quick access Select the application and click Packages Create desktop entry You ll be asked to select an icon for the desktop shortcut and a location for the shortcut Save the shortcut in the home username gnome desktop directory 2 Keep track of updates on some of your favorite Linux programs When a new ver sion comes out you may want to upgrade it Use the Web Find utility in Gnome RPM to keep up to date with your software HOUR 1 0 Networking the Small Office Home Office Linux is a good choice for networking in general This is evidenced by all the networks in existence today running on some member like Linux of the UNIX family of operating systems Linux is a particularly good choice for a small office network Because Linux is smaller and friendlier than its big UNIX cousins it is a little less intimidating to work with And Linux can help you as you create and man age your Linux Web based Intranet Setting up a network and tailoring it to meet your present needs planning for its future growth and using it to further your business goals all require careful planning The speed
49. Mandrake distribution and all Linux distribu tions use this template This template also works well as a starting point for a book layout Document Processing with KLyX 189 e If you are planning a presentation and want to use slides or overhead trans parencies use the slides 1yx template 5 Click OK A new document template with placeholders for documents elements an example of the slide template is shown in Figure 12 5 appears in the KLyX window FIGURE 12 5 AI RE review ig Changed elol Eile Edit Layout Insert Options Documents Help JBBRPBRER ZAG a of Df O T o BS T tx ss fe zf fw oo Use templates for a quick start to design ing documents Kij T E il w NewSlide f Test slide Use styles to format text NewOverlay Test overlay Placeholder text NewNote Test note EndAl1l LyX film_review lyx Changed Slide template ing Layout Document and choosing a different document class from the You can change the document class once the document is created by select Z Class drop down list Opening and Closing Documents You may now have several documents open in the KLyX window You may want to switch back and forth between documents or you may want to close a document and maybe the KLyX program before you leave the computer You can always open files again when you return You can perform these tasks from
50. One point that you may have noticed when you read the Linux Mandrake compatibility list is that very few modems are supported You find almost no internal modems on the list and you certainly won t find any Winmodems Your best bet for a modem is an external serial modem that works with any operating system If you want to check your system and see where your modem is located open an X ter minal window and type dmesg You ll find lines in the output that look like the following ttyS00 at 0x03f8 irq 4 is a 16550A The ttySOO designation is the first serial port on the computer You ll need this informa tion when you configure the connection a little later a Linux and DOS use different numbering systems for naming communication j ports The DOS equivalent of COM1 is ttyO and COM2 is tty1 Serial ports in Linux are named cua0 cua1 and so on i Now that you ve collected the information from your ISP and you have a modem con nected to your computer it s time to decide how you want to use the connection and who will be using the connection Getting on the Internet 161 Setting Up a PPP Connection Setting up a PPP connection allows you to connect to the Internet through a modem and a telephone line The tools you use to create that connection are a matter of preference This section outlines two scenarios for creating the PPP connection The first is Linuxconf which was used in Hour 7 System Admin
51. Song Collections Options Help A Learn to sing with the Z 8 gnunaoltceonw mia KMid karaoke player 0 00 0 15 0 30 0 2 00 2 15 2 34 od 45 1 00 115 1 30 1 45 1 daydream kar LL Open a karaoke or TDAYDREAM BELIEVER MIDI file TThe Monkees eTwritten by John Stewart Oh I could hide neath the wings of the bluebird as she sings Sing along with the The six o clock alarm flashing words Watching Videos For all you television and movie addicts there are several movie players included in the Linux Mandrake distribution The most versatile of these video players is aKtion shown in Figure 23 9 You ll find action in the KDE main menu under Multimedia or you can type aktion in an X terminal window aKtion can handle avi mov and mpg video file formats FIGURE 23 9 Saami OX aKtion will play most video file formats gt Gr mw arv Summary Multimedia is some of the latest news in application development for the Linux operat ing system This hour shows you a few of the music and video players available in the Linux Mandrake distribution You ll find these players extremely easy to use If you want to learn more about Linux multimedia keep your ear tuned to the Internet for the latest in Linux news Multimedia 343 Q amp A Q I ve tried playing WAV and MIDI files but I can t hear any sound What can I do A Your sound card is probably not configured correctly You can use the sound con
52. Started with CBB Creating Account Files Saving Data Before You Exit CBB recroiser 208 Using Categories to Track Spending Habits 0 0 cece cece eee cee recente 209 Finding the Default Category Listrier rosser eeieneiresieids 209 Editing the Category List cs ccsstsssiscrentsastisecvussrsas n EEEE 209 Recording Transactions esene A NE ES 211 Recording Checks e Postino DE POSIUS ars ae e E E E E e Transferring Funds Between Accounts c csseseeseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeneenes 214 Editing TAN SAC ONS s55 te css2 ess vs ness catunesve soe s5ty ts taseceseh iach edt sna se tsadsiaaserte capers 215 Working with Recurring TransactionSoscusssnrer rania ia a 215 Balancing an ACCOUNT opsein siiveke nana IEAA RE AE ENEAS EEA E 215 Creating Reports to Find Reconciliation Problems eseseseserererereeeere 217 Hour 14 Building a Web Site with Screem 221 Getting Ready to Screem seisear iraan a E NENNE ESEN E ETETE ES SETO aSa 222 Starting Your First Web Site oo n229 Adding Web Pages to Your Web Site ss cizcocecessssancscassseinasseseeauenssavesseazesansaes 226 Designing Web Pages scienna aN A 228 SUMIMALY AR EESTE 230 OBA E E E T 230 Contents xi Hour 15 Printing and Faxing Documents 233 Getting Ready to Print Your Document 0 c ccc eects sirietieniseiieii osian 234 Using the Red Hat Linux Print System Manager s 235 Working with HP LaserJet Printers cc ccceeseeeeceeeseeseeeeeeeenetaeessnee
53. Text Mode Now that you ve learned how to move around Emacs it s time to learn about a few different Emacs working modes Modes are used when doing certain tasks such as text processing or programming By putting Emacs into a mode the program can help you do your job easier Emacs contains several major modes that function independently of each other as well as a number of minor modes that can be used in conjunction with a major mode This section shows you how to work with formatted text in Emacs by using Text mode a major mode and Enriched mode a minor mode By using a combination of these two modes you can create documents that contain formatted paragraphs and text colored text and highlighting and bold and italics Lesson 16 3 Starting a Text File Before you begin entering and formatting text you need to make sure that Emacs knows that you want to work with enriched text Let s get in the mode by creating a new file and typing a few commands 1 Create a new file in a new frame Use the Ctr1 X 5 F command or choose File Open in New Frame 2 Select the directory in which you want the new file stored and type a name for the file You can use the doc extension for enriched text files 3 Turn on Text mode by typing Alt X text mode and pressing Enter Text Processing with Emacs 253 4 Turn on Enriched mode by typing Alt X enriched mode and pressing Enter Be sure that you enable Text and Enriched mode bef
54. The Rendering Times at www spake org rtimes You ll find information to help you create some impressive 3D effects Creating Animations with Morphing Software Morphing is an animation sequence that changes one image into another image Pixels in the source image are mapped to pixels in the destination image Distorting both the source and destination images to the same shape and then dissolving them together cre ates the animation The distortion is reversed and one image transforms into the other image The number of images pics to be saved from this sequence is selected by the user The morphing program performs its job in increments that are saved as separate images called pics The sequence of pics is then run as an animation Understanding the Difference Between Warping and Morphing Images can be distorted warped and then digitally changed into each other morphed The central idea of morphing is specifying a warp that distorts the first image into the second Of course running the process in reverse distorts the sec ond image into the first As the program moves through the process the first image is gradually distorted while it slowly fades out At the same time the second image begins distorted and it warps toward the first as it slowly fades in Morphing Is for Comedians 319 Assigning vectors that define influence fields in both the source and destination images creates a warp The closer a pixel is to the vector the more
55. View HTML gt HEAD gt TITLE gt About Us lt TITLE gt fHEAD gt BODY bgcolor fffft text 000000 gt H1 gt Writers in Love lt H1 gt a href http Avwaw mcp com gt Macmillan Computer Publishing lt a gt TAH Screem Link Wizard X rLink Text Macmillan Computer Publishing Link To fuww mep com A A http v fip mailto v local Target k oK X Cancel Leave the Wizard The Wizard remembers open and create the information you ve more hyperlinks entered previously 2 2 9 230 Hour 14 Inserting Images For our last wizard trick of the hour see Figure 14 8 click the Image Wizard button on the toolbar or select Insert Image You can use this wizard to add images to your Web pages FIGURE 14 8 Screem Image Wizard Z The Image Wizard Preview Image sere tae lca sow atte Hold the mouse over gt 4A width fess Calculator a text box to display A catcutator F Height fies Calculator a screen tip lf z Pe Alignment bottom A KI p Image Details Border i Initial Width 298 Hpac fi b Initial Height 168 a VSpace f1 S File Size 5815 bytes _j Make thumbnail I Copy to page s location oK yY Apply X Close Summary In this hour you learned how to begin creating a Web site with Screem Screem is more than just a Web page editor With Screem you not only can create
56. Windows systems which can just restart themselves more or less when the power comes back members of the UNIX family of operating sys D tems including Linux can be damaged by having the power shut off abruptly The system needs to be able to shut down in an orderly fashion to avoid damage to important files Make Network Peripherals Accessible Network printers must be placed in an area that provides easy access for users If printers will be connected to the server you should remember that parallel cables should not exceed 25 feet If the printer cannot be located that close to the server another solution must be found _ Even if the printer can be located within the 25 foot cable length the over all performance of the network may be reduced because of the server s Set ane 4 a need to allocate resources to the network printing function The best solution is to attach the printer directly to the Local Area Network LAN which provides flexibility about its location There is a box made by Intel called a netport that will allow you to connect a printer anywhere on the network A second choice is to connect the printer to a workstation that serves as the print server The drawback to this solution is that the workstation s capacity to do other work is reduced and it may not be available to use as a workstation while it is printing a big net work print job Other components of the network must be accessible to users
57. Yes you can add text that has some shape to it by aligning the text to either an ellipse freehand line bezier curve polyline or polygon You first need to type the text and then create the shape When this is done activate the Selection Mode tool and click the text Then select Arrange Text along Path and click the place where you want the text to appear Hour 21 Quiz 1 Which types of software applications create moving pictures Animation programs create movement by displaying a series of pictures each in a different frame The images used in each frame are created in a drawing program such as The Gimp Morphing programs create movement by transforming one object into another The transformation takes place in increments and each change can be recorded so that the entire sequence can be played as one movie Video editing applications take digitized video and allow you to add animations text voice and other sounds to the video 2 What is animation Animation describes a sequence of drawings in which each drawing is contained in a separate frame Each drawing is slightly different from the one before Displaying the frames in a timed sequence creates the effect of movement or ani mation Answers 369 3 What is the difference between warping and morphing When an image is warped it is distorted When it is morphed the image is changed so that it looks like another image Hour 22 Quiz 1 Which graphics utility
58. a file is created you may want to apply one or more major and minor modes such as Text mode Enriched mode or Outline mode 366 Appendix A 3 Which commands move the cursor to the beginning of the buffer file and to the end of the buffer file The Alt lt command moves the cursor to the beginning of the text in the file The Alt gt command moves the cursor to the end of the document 4 How many asterisks precede a third level heading in an outline There should be three asterisks before a third level heading First level headings require one asterisk and second level headings require two asterisks You also need to make sure that you are working with the Outline minor mode so that you can collapse your outline to show only the headings You can also expand the outline to show the body text Hour 17 Quiz 1 Where do you find the man command In the Help menu There is no command key sequence that starts the man com mand In Emacs for X11 select Help Manuals Read Man Page In XEmacs click Help Manuals UNIX Manual 2 How do you find documentation on a command Use the Describe Key command by typing Ctr1 H K followed by the command key sequence For example to display the documentation for the Numeric Argument command type Ctrl H K Ctrl U 3 What is Lisp Lisp is the programming language that was used to write Emacs Lisp code is a series of lists that sends instructions to the computer The computer then acts on
59. account configurator win dow Linuxconf 110 User account creation window Linuxconf 107 user accounts 106 110 creating 106 108 deleting 110 group accounts creating 110 111 directory access permis sions setting 112 113 file permissions setting 114 sharing files 112 114 passwords 106 109 changing 109 updating 108 109 workgroups 106 user data files 86 User groups window Linuxconf 110 111 User information window Linuxconf 109 ser manuals 17 serNet 165 166 sers accounts window Linuxconf 106 UTP unshielded twisted pair cabling 146 Gas Vo video configuring 45 video configuration 34 37 video files playing 342 video production 321 322 Free Film Project 323 Videonics Video Glossary Web site 322 virtual desktops 68 72 changing number of desktop areas 70 71 customizing 69 71 navigation controls 68 relocating windows 69 sticky windows 71 72 W Wacom XInput drivers 289 wallpaper desktops selecting 74 75 80 WAV files listening to 340 343 Web browsers Netscape Navigator 169 Web page editors Screem 221 222 druids 223 installation 222 Web sites creating 224 230 Web pages creating with Netscape Composer 173 174 creating with Screem 226 230 Programming in Emacs Lisp 269 Web servers 152 Web sites 3DLinux org 318 4Front Technologies 38 Advanced Linux Sound Architecture ALSA 38 Aimee s Studio 314 Animation Learner s S
60. and efficiency of Linux can be harnessed and made to work well for you in almost any network environment as long as you have a good plan 142 Hour 10 Q The focus of this hour is on network planning and the information is mostly A directed toward the job of planning for a network large enough to require a some measure of network administration Some of you may find this to be beyond your present needs and it also may seem a little daunting The information contained in this hour will become more useful and comprehen sible to you as your network knowledge and requirements grow If you are planning a small office network or a home network with several workstations and would like to get the ball rolling the guidelines in this hour will help you get started with a good plan In this hour you assess your needs and assets and plan a successful network installation by learning about the following e When to start planning for a network and putting a network plan in place e Keeping good documentation and equipment records e Setting up an Intranet e Keeping your network in good working order When Is the Right Time to Build a Network The right time to build a network is as soon as the need for one arises The purpose of a network is to serve people A network should serve people in ways that make them more productive It should help them by removing bottlenecks and obstacles from their working processes and by speeding communic
61. and for maintenance tasks as well Select Network Hardware Interface Cards and Cabling Networks run on a system of cables hubs routers servers and other peripherals Depending on which network layout you choose you may reduce your need for network hardware The distance between components will determine what number of switches routers and additional network components are required Placing your workstations and peripherals in close proximity will reduce the network hardware requirements 146 Hour 10 Networks are normally connected by one of four types of cable e Coaxial cable contains a central conductor surrounded by an insulating layer that is covered by a mesh layer conductor It is relatively immune to electromagnetic interference and good for noisy installations where signal interference from other cables or equipment usage may exist e Unshielded twisted pair UTP cable is probably the most popular choice for small networks because it can be used for every situation except for those requiring fiber optic cabling Telephone cable in many buildings is UTP and there is almost always extra capacity that can be used for networking G UTP cable comes in different grade categories which are designated by 103 numbers The grade for network use is UTP category 5 e Shielded twisted pair cable resembles coaxial cable in the way that it is con structed The difference is that shielded twisted pair cables have a central
62. and its attachments you have an invaluable assistant for maintaining the network once it is installed Documentation also provides an indispensable tool for planning changes and growth Also having the network fully documented from the planning stage all the way through to its powering up greatly helps any other users who might act as the network administrator Workshop Building a network is not an easy task There s a lot to consider before you begin the task of hooking computers printers scanners and other devices together So before you begin to plan the network review what you ve learned over the past hour and then decide if you are ready to purchase a few hundred feet of cable and tackle the network beast Quiz 1 What is the first task you should perform before you start building a network 2 Why is it important to design your network on paper before you begin the actual creation of the network 3 Why is the job of network administrator so important 156 Hour 10 Exercises 1 Throughout this book we ve talked to you about keeping a notebook next to your computer so that you can keep track of your Linux installation any changes you ve made to the system and user and group information Now it s time to add a new section for network planning to your notebook Reproduce the forms you ve seen in this hour and start collecting the information you ll need when you attach the workstations and peripherals to your
63. and the directory structure used to share files A N A 1 V aay 2 CNN N ay m p HOUR 8 Backing Up the Filesystem Making backups is one of the most important maintenance jobs required of the system administrator or of anyone who owns a computer Whether you have a single computer or many networked computers you need to maintain a good backup system to ensure that your data is protected from loss or cor ruption It is therefore important for you to spend some time organizing your data and establishing a good backup system When planning a backup strategy it is important that you know what you should back up what media you can back it up on and what tools you can use to control your backups Today you learn about the following e Which important files need to be backed up e How to use backup and archive commands e How to use backup media 120 Hour 8 Deciding How and What to Back Up There is hardly any doubt that as you learn to fly with Linux Mandrake some of your experimental maneuvers may result in unexpected customizations to your Linux sys tem Sometimes these changes can t be restored easily and you may not even be able to restore things the way you would like them by simply reinstalling the system from scratch But since your CD ROM or original floppies can serve as an excellent backup it might not be necessary to back up your whole system The Upgrading Your Linux Distribution mi
64. appear in the Category List in alphabetical order you can create categories on the fly Just type a title for the category in the Category field of the entry area You ll be asked if you want to add the category to the list If you are entering transactions and need to add a new category to the list Recording Transactions Once you have set up CBB by entering a starting date for transactions setting up your accounts and creating a custom category list it s time to start entering all those checks deposits cash machine receipts and credit card slips Recording Checks Probably the most common transaction is for checks you write to pay bills You ll find that the transaction entry area in CBB looks much like the lines in your paper checkbook register If you re familiar with the paper checkbook register you ll find the CBB trans action entry area very similar Figure 13 6 shows a simple checking account transaction Check number Check paid to Check amount Enter transaction in register Figure 13 6 st 10726799 Henry Rossman 500 00 0 00 E ri November rent Housing R Create a register entry for bills you pay by check Date Explanation or Category other comments To enter the information about the check click in each of the fields in the entry area and type the check number date pay to and amount information as written on the check Then add a category When all the information has
65. application windows 62 files between directories 99 windows on multiple desktops 69 MPEG files playing 343 Mtools 125 multimedia aKtion video player 342 CD players 338 340 KDE Media Player 340 KDE MIDI and karaoke mul timedia player 341 KDE MIDI player 341 KDE MPEG audio player 343 multiple desktop areas 68 72 changing number of desktop areas 70 71 customizing 69 71 navigation controls 68 relocating windows 69 sticky windows 71 72 music CDs playing 338 340 mvComicsMaker 315 316 N naming accounts Check Book Balancer 218 directories 99 files 99 navigating Emacs documents 255 256 navigation controls desktop areas 68 Navigator Netscape 169 netfs daemon 14 netports 145 Netscape Communicator 169 Composer 173 174 Messenger 170 172 Navigator 169 network administrators 153 Network Configuration screen installation program 27 Network Configurator Linuxconf 162 network daemon 14 network diagrams 149 network utilities KDE 178 networks 141 142 administration 153 154 cabling 145 146 documenting 147 equipment records 147 149 importance of 155 network diagrams 149 importance of 155 intranets building 150 152 NICs network interface cards 147 planning 142 145 shared resources 152 153 topologies 146 New Account dialog box 167 nfs daemon 14 NICs network interface cards 147 installing 150 151 numbering options KLyX 196 O ope
66. archiving e Restoring damaged or lost files and data 154 Hour 10 e Monitoring network traffic flow e Collecting data for accounting and optimization e Generating reports for management Establish Security Procedures It is probably safe to say that maintaining the availability of your network s resources is vital to your company s operations Your users must be able to access resources they need and perhaps be channeled away from those they don t need and users who aren t supposed to have access to things should be prohibited from doing so Here are some tips for practicing good configuration management security e Load the file server with only authorized distribution software e Make only authorized changes to the network configuration e Maintain a copy of the current network configuration worksheets e Periodically review device configurations e Maintain a backup of the server software e Test software before introducing it into the network Maintain the Network Maintaining a network can be a lot of work A big part of the job is to manage the daily operations of the network and these include e Establishing network documentation e Providing support for the network user e Developing training programs e Managing network configuration e Experimenting with new technologies Plan for the Future In addition to all the other jobs the network administrator must keep abreast of new technology and applications and
67. be tempted to just start typing text but before you begin consider these different routes that you can take to get started 184 Hour 12 e If you just want to begin typing you can use the default document class and asso ciated styles by clicking on the New button on the General toolbar This displays the Open dialog box where you select a directory in which you want to store the new file and type a name for the new file e The default page layout can be changed if the majority of your documents will look similar You can change the paper orientation page margins default document class fonts paragraph spacing and columns used for each new document you create e There are several pre designed templates that are a good starting point if you create letters short articles or book manuscripts Click the New From Template button If one of these templates does not exactly suit your needs modify the template and save it under a different name Lesson 12 1 Setting the Default Document Layout If the majority of the documents you create use the same basic layout you can change the default page layout features This means that you don t have to make layout changes each time you start a new document Once the default document layout is saved each time you click the New button your preferred layout is used To change the default docu ment settings follow these steps 1 Click the New button to create a blank page This displays an
68. be able to respond to the user s ever increasing demands for network services It will be necessary for you as the network administrator to focus your attention toward e Increasing network performance e Assessing new hardware and software products e Expanding network services e Connecting to other networks Networking the Small Office Home Office 155 Summary In this hour you were introduced to the planning process that you need to go through before you build a network It is essential that you plan your network and its growth before you start hooking computers and peripherals together This advance planning will help you avoid problems such as incompatible equipment and running out of room to add more workstations to an existing network Q amp A Q Do I really need a network I just have one workstation in my home office and a laptop that I carry around when I call on my clients A A network can be very useful in this situation What would happen if you forget to upload important client files from your workstation to your laptop If you had a network you could dial up your workstation from your laptop while in your client s office and download the needed files Q Is it really that important that I keep track of every piece of computer equip ment I own and want to attach to a network A It is difficult to overemphasize the importance of maintaining detailed documenta tion of your network By keeping track of the network
69. can display files and directories as text or as text with a description The Midnight Commander has four icons on the toolbar that change the directory view You can also change the view from the Settings menu In KFM you need to select a view from the View menu The Marvelous Mystical Filesystem Tour 97 FIGURE 6 2 Expand directories to see subdirectories in the tree view select directories to see the contents in the direc Return to your user directory Double click to ee open file B8 doc f G AfterStep 1 7 111 GAnotherLevel 0 9 B BeroList 2 5 9 H Gra Select to display is G Gxeuit 1 23 Assembly Bash Prompt f HOWTO HOWTO HOWTO contents Show all files e The Icon view is useful if you are looking for a quick way to determine file types This view shows a picture icon that represents a file type with the name of the file underneath e The Brief or Short view is a simple list of the files and subdirectories stored in the directory e The Detailed or Long view gives you the file s size and its make or creation date and time e Text View provides a simple text list of the files with some information about file ownership and permissions KFM can display a miniature graphic of the contents of some files use View Show Thumbnails This is nice for previewing graphic files and other file A formats that KFM recognizes Selecting Files In order to do any work on files such as renaming o
70. cscsseaedidecssedenssdesussatesosisestehvsdeieaeetssisecsientoeeease Watching Videos anmone fick Sai hess iey Geta eters nasi EEEE ES xiv Hour 24 Games Sams Teach Yourself Linux Mandrake in 24 Hours Fun Stuff that Comes with Linux Mandrake Looking at What KDE Has to Offer Finding Games in GNOME Playing X Strategy Games Playing X Video Games Playing Linux GamE Sesioa al agai daneb caedvtdnesstavsGststtocstisiavessae Finding Games On the Internet v iccoccsse ssessessestecesssvestearovevasdetaasssseedavassaracdeannstenave Playing Windows Games with Wine Contents XV Hour Meena s a A a e an E 364 QUIZ a as N R E a RSE SASAE ESTINSE ES KREERET ARIE ESEN EEEE 364 IE LOIDE n Eo E E E AA A TE E AA E EAA E 365 QUIZ 25 T E E E E E E E S 365 Hour Oeren a a A E rpeerenet ets 365 QUZ aaee ann r e a a naoee eaten ete oeet ea 365 T LOID n EE EE AA ATAT E OEN E 366 OUI oss oss oe A E A T A E S 366 PROUT leen esner E EERE RA E R EE 366 Q anna eaa aE a EE EE E EEEN 366 Hour 19 co cote Sees vale da cieezenbie tar devtec sane Seco ies ease casledet edi devesed easate diet eeate Ceavies Mespatseces 367 QUIZ 2a E caters taseay ut senaa vias dus tancvadeiecec E I E E 367 PROUT 2 Oisosics sactey vec cays vers ve tess E A E aa ch uasin Woh ottoleuseaat i 367 O TA ca ssn ch Se vace crac E cecnaecaacvaseae cauneesex teaser eesseunrssazsoee conn cvevecteessesunereereser sa 367 PROUT 2 lh AAAS E T AA AE EST EE TAE 368 QUA ea E a E vores 3
71. detailed information about all the equipment that you have on the network Conduct the most detailed inventory you can of existing hardware This will facilitate any changes you need to make to workstations or peripher als in the future help you to allocate workstation resources and give you important guidelines for making decisions about purchasing additional equipment In order to configure the network properly the documentation for the equipment on the network must contain specific bits of information We created a number of forms for our business that we use as guidelines for collecting the information for each piece of equip ment attached to the network We share a few of these forms with you as we look at the different network components that require detailed documentation 148 Hour 10 tion needed for the equipment inventory sheets This is also an excellent You may have to look inside the equipment to collect some of the informa Z opportunity to get out the canned air and clean things up Determining Workstation Configuration You need to collect information about each computer on the network The Workstation Information Worksheet shown in Figure 10 1 lists the major points that you should docu ment about each component of the network FiGuRe 10 1 Document the user Workstation Information Worksheet location and internal Name of Primary User Location of the Workstation Network Server Oth
72. distraction A good use of an image is a logo on a letter or a picture of something mentioned in the text It s easy to add an image just select the place in the document where you want to insert the picture and then click the Insert Figure button on the toolbar This button adds a pic ture placeholder to the document Once the picture placeholder is in the document you can resize it by clicking the image to display the Edit Figure dialog box Use the Width and Height options to make the image larger or smaller You can also change the position on the page by changing the paragraph environment 198 Hour 12 image and click Layout Paragraph Change the Alignment options in the To change the picture alignment place the cursor on the same line as the Z Paragraph Environment dialog box Lesson 12 6 Adding an Encapsulated Postscript Image Before you try to add pictures or other graphic images to your document convert the files to PostScript format Once this is done your next step is to create a placeholder for the image and then decide where on the page the image will appear To insert an image follow these steps 1 Click where you want to insert the image and select Insert Figure from the menu Yov ll be presented with the Insert Figure dialog box 2 Click OK to select the default option of Encapsulated Postscript and to display a placeholder in the document 3 Right click the figure placeholder and select
73. drop down list e Select the modem speed from the Baud Rate drop down list e Select the modem manufacturer from the Modem Type drop down list 3 Click the Fax tab and replace the small x s in the phone number text box with the phone number to which the computer is attached 4 Click OK when you are finished making your changes You can now send a fax with your new fax program Creating a Kvoice Fax Job KVoice allows you to send a fax that contains plain text or you can send a fax cover sheet with a file that is stored on your computer To start a new fax select Fax New Fax This opens the fax window displayed in Figure 15 7 240 Hour 15 FiGURE 15 7 File Edit Hel Fill out the KVoice heet and attach ig cover sheet and attac ROM 55 2222 The recipient s fax any needed files Hi Heny number I m still sitting over here doing my homework Can you help me with a small project Please read over the attached and let me know what you think Send the fax Thanks Write a short message Colettd Attach any files to be E a sent with the fax It s easy to send a fax Just type the recipient s fax number in the To text box and write a short note in the space below that If you need to attach any files select File AddFile A dialog box will open and you can search the filesystem for the file you want to attach When you re done click the Send Message button The fax will be placed in the
74. e Take a picture of your desktop with KSnapshot Coloring and Resizing Images with Electric Eyes Electric Eyes is a rare find It s an image viewer and a graphics display and editing utility all handily packed into one Electric Eyes provides many of the tools that most of us are looking for when the crunch hits Electric Eyes makes a nice helping hand when you are struggling to resize all the pic tures submitted for the company newsletter s Best Lawn Bowler Trophy Picture of the 1920s contest It s helpful at crisis times such as when you must manage disaster con trol when all your boss s sales promotion slides turn out to be a strange shade of green and the wrong size Electric Eyes can edit the color brightness and contrast of your images You can crop images edit and resize them and display them as thumbnails miniature versions of the original images You may also display them in a slideshow and save them in a variety of formats To start Electric Eyes look for it in the KDE and GNOME main menus under Graphics or type ee in an X terminal window When Electric Eyes opens it displays the splash screen shown in Figure 22 1 The first order of business is to display the Edit Controls window the Image List window and the toolbar You ll find these by right clicking the Electric Eyes splash screen and selecting the View menu Graphics Viewers and Utilities 327 FIGURE 22 1 The Electric Eyes Wied Wat Zogt
75. edge of the text is on the left margin and the right edge of the text is on the right margin This alignment is difficult to read in large blocks of text e Right aligns each line along the right margin The left edge of the paragraph is jagged e Unfilled aligns each line along the left margin The right edge of the paragraph is jagged You can indent paragraphs to add emphasis Select the entire block of text that you want to indent and then choose Edit Text Properties Indentation Z Indent More Adding Color to a Document There are two ways to add color to text You can change the color of the text characters the foreground color You can also apply a color to the area behind the text the background color 260 Hour 16 Before you begin applying color to your text display the list of colors from which you can choose From the menu select Edit Text Properties Display Colors The Colors buffer will appear in a split window at the bottom of the frame as seen in Figure 16 7 FIGURE 16 7 5 Color can be app lie d File Edit Apps Options Buffers Tools to the text or to the SAHJNEVOVANEOZKA area around the text The Complete Angler by Izaak Walton emacs mscript doc EEE The first day Select text tonference betwixt an Angler a Falconer and a Hunter each commending his Recreation Chapter I Pisaator Venator Aucens a HEmacs mscript doc ie SEA Tezxt_Enriched_Fill Top m
76. editing entries 282 opening 277 recurring appointments entering 279 280 searching 281 vacation time scheduling 280 emacs file customizing 281 holidays displaying 276 Moon Phase Calendar 276 starting 274 emacs command 246 emacs file customizing 281 Emacs Web site 271 email Netscape Messenger 170 172 Encapsulated Postscript files KLyX 197 Encapsulated Postscript Image KLyX documents adding 198 199 enhancing photographs The Gimp 294 376 enriched text mode enriched text mode Emacs 252 cursor commands 255 256 text editing 256 257 text entry 253 254 text files creating 252 253 text formatting 257 260 equipment documentation 147 importance of 155 printer information 149 workstation configuration 148 Ethernet cards 147 executable files 86 exploits org Web site 322 ext2 filesystem floppy disks 124 E S faxes KVoice program 238 241 file commands 90 93 file permissions setting group accounts 114 File Transfer Protocol FTP gFTP utility 175 176 filenames 88 89 92 files 86 backing up 120 126 backup tools 121 123 with CD Read Write drives 126 cross platform filing 124 126 DOS files 125 126 find command 120 121 with floppy disk drives 123 124 important files to back up 120 moving files to DOS par titions 125 Zip Jaz drives 126 creating Emacs 249 252 253 deleting 94 100 DOS files backing up 125 126 emacs file customizing 281 ex
77. entering the same information over and over again you can use CBB s memory function Start by entering the check number and the date Type a few characters of the description and press Tab CBB will search its memory for the closest match and fill in the rest of the information for you If the information is correct click the Accept Transaction but ton You can also make any changes to this entry as needed If you don t want to use the information that was filled in press Ctrl Tab the cursor must still be in the Description field Only the information that you typed will remain You will then need to complete the transaction yourself You can ask CBB to search its memory only once per trans action Balancing an Account At sometime during the month your bank sends you a statement for your accounts It s your job to make sure that the information provided by the bank matches what you have stored in CBB Your first step is to grab that statement open the corresponding account in CBB and click the Balance button After you go through the process of telling CBB 216 Hour 13 the statement ending balance and which transactions appear on the statement hopefully your records and the bank s records agree If not you need to do some investigative research into the cause of this mystery There are several reports you can run that give you a few clues Fr Once the account has been balanced the next time you reconcile the account
78. fax queue until you select Fax Send spooled Summary Since it s hard to get away from the need for paper documents printing and faxing are still popular ways of communicating with others In this hour you learned how to set up your Linux computer to print from all your favorite applications You also learned how to fax those documents to others using K Voice Q amp A Q Is there any way to get quick access to printing files A You may want to place a printer icon on the desktop or the panel To place a printer icon on the panel from the GNOME main menu select Panel Add applet Utility Printer Applet When you want to print a file open a file manager window select the file you want to print drag it to the printer icon and drop it The file will print automatically In KDE use the KDE Configuration Wizard found in the Utilities menu to place an icon on the desktop You can also drag a file from the file manager and drop it on the printer icon to print a file Printing and Faxing Documents 241 Q The header line for faxes that I send through Kvoice doesn t contain the right information How do I fix this A Here s the answer everyone loves to hear You need to edit the etc mgetty send fax faxheader file The easiest way is to open a text editor such as gEdit GXedit KEdit or Emacs which is covered in Hour 16 Text Processing with Emacs and then open the file Replace the text between the asterisks with your name or
79. file Location home H Gbin t boot Directory for workgroup Edit properties to change directory permissions Properties Show all files 2 Right click the directory and select Properties from the menu that appears This opens the Properties dialog box for the directory see Figure 7 10 FIGURE 7 10 Assign permission to the group to access the directory garden Properties Statistics Permissions File Permissions Current mode 0755 Read Write Exec Special user 7 seruo Set group manager Group acl oner 77 _ 7 siw File ownership Select to allow the group to save changes to files in the directory Owner Jhenry Group Garden A Select group Apply changes from list 3 Clear the text in the Owner text box and type the member of the group who will manage the directory structure and files for the group Only the owner of the direc tory will be able to write files to the directory 4 Click the Group list box down arrow and select the group who will be using the directory Group members will have access to the directory but cannot place new files in the directory 5 If the owner of the directory wants to give the group members the ability to make changes to files in the group directory and save those files back to the directory select the Group Write button 6 Click OK The members of the group can now begin to work with their group s f
80. from the pop up menu The file is moved or copied You can transfer a file from a Windows partition to a Linux partition in the SH same manner Using DOS Files in Linux Mandrake There are some types of DOS files that Linux can read like txt files for example and there are viewers for most graphics formats except for some like Microsoft s Windows Metafile wmf format There is also a collection of tools developed before Linux con taining support for non native filesystems called Mtools The Mtools package contains a collection of commands that allow you to manipulate Windows directories and files from Linux The Mtools package is installed during the Linux Mandrake installation if you selected DOS Windows connectivity To find more information about the Mtools com mands and their actions see the man pages for the following commands attrib cd m m mcopy mdel mdir mformat mlabel m m m m m m 126 Hour 8 There are several Linux applications that can deal effectively with files in Windows for mats Emacs Maxwell and WordPerfect can read doc files and export Rich Text Format RTF files There are also office productivity suite applications such as StarOffice and Applix Ware that can convert files with varying amounts of accuracy but you may have to edit the translated files by hand to get exactly what you want Using Zip Drives to Store Files Iomega Zip and Jaz drives have been around fo
81. go You re connected You have your connection established using either UserNet or Kppp as the dialer and all you need now is some Internet software to surf Web sites and read your email You may also need a good FTP client We ll explore gFTP If you enjoy chatting with others on the Web in real time check out XChat Working on the Web with Netscape Communicator There are many Web browsers email utilities and newsgroup readers packaged with the Linux Mandrake distribution and they work with both KDE and GNOME The most popular of the bunch is Netscape Communicator Communicator contains a full line of Internet applications including a Web browser email client newsreader and Web page designer With the aid of Communicator and a few other Internet applications such as FTP and IRC chat which are covered later in this hour your Internet activities are pretty much covered Before you begin looking around the Communicator suite use your favorite connection method and dial up your ISP Exploring Navigator We ll start the lineup with the Netscape Navigator Web browser You ll find an icon for Navigator on the KDE and GNOME panels You ll also find it in the Internet menu in both KDE and GNOME You ll notice that Navigator has the same look in Linux as it does in Windows and it has the same functionality If you ve found a new site to visit just type the URL address in the Netsite text box and press Enter The Web page you req
82. group is assigned a user account and make a note of each user s username You ll then need to open Linuxconf and display the User account configurator window 1 Click the Group definitions button to open the User groups window You can see in Figure 7 6 that several groups have been created already Each user is assigned an individual group and there are system groups that are used to control the operating system Don t make any changes to these system groups System Administration Tasks 111 FiGurE 7 6 You can edit add or delete groups Use groups to man Select Add to add a new definition age file sharing sup gt atenate members Joe 506 between users adm 4 root adm daemon User groups cdrom 62 cdwriters 64 System groups annn Create a new group 2 Click the Add button to display the Group specification window shown in Figure 7 7 FiGuRE 7 7 Group specification You ll need each user s You must specify at least the name username before you Base in Directories can assign them to a Groupnamg Garden Name the group Group ID 508 I group Alternate members opt henry bantam itchy Assign user to the group Accept Cancel Del Help Apply the changes 3 Type a name for the new group in the Group name text box 4 Click in the Alternate members opt text box and type the username for the first user you want to add Then press the spacebar and typ
83. have The Gimp on your screen you may want to take a look at some of the available Gimp help Follow these steps to start your art adventure with The Gimp 1 If you can t find The Gimp in the KDE or GNOME menus or as an icon on your desktop type gimp in an X terminal window and press Enter An installation dialog box lets you know that before the program can start several files need to be installed in your user home directory 2 Click Install to load the necessary files When the installation is complete the User Installation Log tells you that the files were installed in your home directory mege Q The files that are stored in your user home directory are initialization files Ef A and modules This design makes it possible for each user on the system to customize The Gimp for their individual user account Other user accounts are not affected 3 Click Continue and The Gimp splash screen appears while the program and plug ins load When The Gimp appears you see the Toolbox and a Tip of the Day message 5 Read through a few of the tips by clicking the Next Tip button When you re finished with the tips click Close You may want to download the latest Gimp User Manual from manual gimp org The Gimp 291 Getting Started The Gimp toolbox shown in Figure 19 1 contains tools that help you draw objects and select areas of an image The toolbox also contains menus that open and save file
84. have a calendar available on every desktop area you visit Sticky windows move with you as you hop from desktop area to desktop area So no matter which desktop area is displayed your calendar will always be there to remind you of important dates Lesson 5 3 Sticking Windows to the Desktop Area To create sticky windows follow these steps 1 Click the Window menu for the window that you want to appear on all the desktop areas and select Sticky in KDE or Stick Unstick in GNOME In KDE you ll notice that the Sticky icon the pushpin located next to the Window menu icon changes 7 1 72 Hour 5 2 Click any of the virtual desktop icons The window that you made sticky will appear on each window 3 If you don t want the window to appear on each desktop area click the Sticky icon or go back to the Window menu in GNOME The window will now only appear in the original window in which it was opened Adding Desktop Backgrounds and Wallpapers One way to make your desktop attractive is to use a color a combination of colors or an image as the desktop background Both KDE and GNOME provide the same back ground options and are handled almost the same way We ll use the KDE interface in the following lessons to show you how you can make your desktop more colorful There are several ways in which you can change the desktop background To get to the place where these changes are made try one of the metho
85. important files in the filesystem that should be backed up 2 Which backup tools can be used to back up and archive important files 3 What type of media can be used to store backups Exercises 1 Here s another opportunity to add a section to the notebook you ve been using to keep track of your Linux system Create a backup plan for your Linux system Decide which files need to be backed up and how often Then choose a medium floppy tape or CD on which to store your backups Then find a secure place to store the backup media 2 Get on the Internet and see whether you can find other applications that will help you back up files and create compressed archives such as the zip files you may be accustomed to in the Windows operating system A N A 1 V aay 2 CNN N ay m p HOUR 9 Managing Applications A few hours ago in Hour 4 Living in a Graphical Workspace you learned how to browse through the KDE and GNOME menus to find some of the applications that are available on your Linux computer After looking through all those menus and the lists of applications you may have thought to yourself There couldn t possibly be any more applications included with this Linux distribution Well think again The GNOME and KDE menus contain only a few of the hundreds of appli cation packages found on the Linux Mandrake CD ROM There are a large number of applications that are installed but are not inc
86. in Text mode If you remem ber the command that enabled Text mode is Alt X text mode The text mode portion of the command is the Lisp function You may have also noticed the Lisp function name on the first line of the documentation displayed by the Describe Key command The GNU Emacs text editor is written in the Lisp programming language Lisp stands for LISt Processing This programming language uses code that is written in lists of instructions These instructions tell the computer what to do when a command is presented Lisp keeps these lists in order by marking the boundaries of a list with parentheses This makes Lisp code look odd to the non programmer If you want to learn more about Lisp programming check out the Programming in Emacs Lisp Web page at www gnu org manual emacs lisp intro If you want to customize Emacs a basic background in Lisp programming is essential If you want to use Emacs as an electronic mail reader you need to write a short Lisp func tion so that Emacs knows where to pick up your mail 270 Hour 17 The Describe Function command displays the documentation for a requested Lisp func tion Type Ctr1 H F to display the following in the minibuffer Describe function Type the function name and press Enter If you want to know more about the function associated with the Text mode command type the following text mode and press Enter The documentation for the function appears
87. interact play a most important role in the overall management of users and network assets You mustn t forget the human factor it will influence where the color printer goes for example as well as other modified placements of peripherals Accessing a Modem and Internet from the Network Yes everyone on the network can share the modem for Internet access The connection with the ISP is made through the network server by the root account The connection can then be configured for each user on the network There are situations where this is not possible Some or all of the users may have accounts with a different ISP or perhaps some of them are still using AOL The informa tion about setting up an Internet account is found in Hour 11 Getting on the Internet Sharing Printers Printers once were the only real reason for having a network It is the one peripheral that can vary the most from device to device That variation by itself can make configuring them a long process Until very recently printers were one of the most expensive components attached to the network and the ones that are used most As with any expensive piece of equipment maximum utilization is a goal Networking the Small Office Home Office 153 Since printers vary so much there is a real need to make sure that their configuration information is readily available For information about configuring printers refer to Hour 15 Printing and Faxing Documents
88. it easier to find and start the application Place an icon for the application on the panel If you find that your stack of icons is too much for the panel you might consider placing the icons on the desktop Open the Main Menu click and hold on the application you want to launch from the desktop and drag the icon onto an empty area of the desktop 3 You can use the window buttons to minimize maximize and close windows Which button do you use if you want to perform some other function to a window The Window menu displays a list of commands that you can perform on a window It goes beyond just minimizing and closing You can shade stick and remember window states If you re working in KDE click the Window Menu button to display the Window menu In GNOME you ll need to right click on the window title bar 4 Name the different ways you can get a window out of your way and create more desktop space Minimize the window so that it is an icon on the KDE taskbar or the GNOME panel You can also shade the window so that all you see is the title bar 5 Explain window focus policy and the different ways you can make a window active Focus policy settings are used to determine the keyboard or mouse actions needed to make a window active One way to make a window active is by clicking inside the window You can also set the focus policy so that all you have to do is move the mouse pointer over the window area to make the window active
89. makes desktop d cor a snap Apply background to iat all desktop areas Ss Colors Wallpaper Use a solid One Color background Browse Play with a two color Two Color di Arrangement Tiled gradient Setup I Random F Dock into the panel Cache size kB et No wallpaper Select a photo image Arrange wallpapers Help Default Apply Cancel The Two Tone Touch A gradient is a combination of two colors usually one light color and one darker color Each color is shaded from light to dark as it blends in with the other color which is also shaded from dark to light Lesson 5 4 Creating a Gradient Background Creating a gradient starts by selecting two colors and then by applying one of the gradient options 1 Create the first color by selecting the One Color option button and then clicking the color bar The color you select will display in the color bar 2 Select the second color for the gradient by selecting the Two Color option and clicking the color bar After you ve selected the color you ll notice the change in the preview screen 7 3 74 Hour 5 3 Click the Setup button to display the Two color backgrounds dialog box 4 Select a blend option or you can use a two color pattern When you have made your selection click OK to return to the display settings e When you want a horizontal gradient use the Blend colors from top to
90. map Simo E 1 i Play player to listen to WAV Palais files Playing 0 01 scream2 way Open a WAV file Elapsed Filename time Another media player that you may find useful is the KDE MIDI player To find the KDE MIDI player shown in Figure 23 7 look in the KDE main menu under Multimedia or type kmidi in an X terminal window FIGURE 23 7 A Midi player Download MIDI files 08 from newsgroups and a TS play the songs with the a mem MIDI player Create a Volume Shuffle through play list control play list If you are using the KDE Desktop you can open WAV and MIDI files from the file manager Open the file manager and click the file you want to play A The appropriate player will open and begin playing the file Karaoke in Your Own Backyard Do you like to sing but don t always know the words to the songs you hear on the radio Do you and your friends have a garage band and need more material One of the easiest ways to learn new songs is to download karaoke files they have a kar extension from the Internet Then find a karaoke player and begin memorizing those tunes To find the KDE MIDI and karaoke multimedia player shown in Figure 23 8 look in the KDE main menu under Multimedia or type kmid in an X terminal window M LA You can also play mid files with the karaoke player 342 Hour 23 Create a play list Change musical instruments FIGURE 23 8 KMid daydream kar TAX File
91. months or years away from the currently selected date 2 How do you keep track of appointments and other events that happen on certain days of the week month or year 3 How do you display your appointment list and other diary entries for the current date Exercises 1 Sit down at the end of the day when life has quieted down and spend time with your diary Tell your diary what you did during the day your goals and aspirations your grumps and gripes successes and failures Once in a while go back in time and read your diary 2 Find out when the sun is going to rise and fall on certain days in your hometown Before you begin you need to know the latitude and longitude of your location You can find the sunrise and sunset times by going to the Apps menu and selecting Calendar Sunrise Sunset You can also select a date on the calendar and use the Shift S command The minibuffer will prompt you for the information it needs in order to give you the times Qrt 1 N N D PART VI Going for the Graphics Hour 19 20 21 22 The Gimp Killustrator Morphing is for Comedians Graphics Viewers and Utilities A N A 1 V aay 2 CNN N a A HOUR 1 9 The Gimp One of the more popular and most sophisticated programs in the Linux lineup is The Gimp The Gimp is the all purpose graphics tool that can han dle everything from simple drawings to heavy duty photo editing Ev
92. myisp net The c 5 option tells the ping command to send data packets to your ISP s server for five thousandths of a second It then reports back to you how long it takes the server to transmit the packet back to your computer You can change the amount of time if you want You ll also want to use the domain name of your ISP in place of myisp net You can also use this command to test the connection between your computer and other servers on the Internet Q But maybe I don t want to use the command line to find out about response times And maybe I d like to know more information about what s happening on the Internet Do you have any more suggestions A Today s your lucky day KDE contains a set of network utilities You ll find them in the KDE menu under Internet Network utilities From a single interface you ll find ping traceroute host resolution and finger utilities If all you want is a finger utility there s one of those in KDE also It s also in the Internet menu but under User information Getting on the Internet 179 Workshop Hopefully you had some fun during the past hour playing on the Web Well not to burst your bubble although it seems we do this to you every hour it s time to test your Web savvy Quiz 1 What is the most efficient way to set up an Internet connection that can be used by all user accounts 2 How do you set up an Internet connection that is used only by the user who set up t
93. new network 2 Take a break and do some shopping Before you start buying NICs hubs and cables see what is available and at what prices Remember your network needs to be within your budget Before you buy anything make sure that the equipment is compatible with Linux and the rest of your hardware and software 1 q N a m p A PART IV Putting Linux Mandrake to Work Hour 11 Getting on the Internet Document Processing with KLyX Checkbooks Gone Digital Building a Web Site with Screem Printing and Faxing Documents A N A 1 V aay 2 CNN N ay m p HOUR 1 1 Getting on the Internet Checking the email and reading the morning headlines on the Internet is becoming a part of the morning ritual for more people every day What draws so many people to this information medium The Internet is bursting with new ideas entertainment job opportunities music pictures news sports and the weather We won t bore you with a long commentary on the Internet because we know you want to get connected and start surfing At the beginning of this hour we give you two options for creating your Internet connection If several users are sharing the same machine and all users need access to the same Internet account use Linuxconf to create a universal connection that all users can share If a single person will be using a connection try the Kppp dialer that is part of the K desktop environment
94. on the Web Before you begin collect the information you received from your ISP to create the connection Then fire up Linuxconf In order to use Linuxconf to configure a PPP connection you need to be logged in as the root user You ll find the many ways to locate Linuxconf in either KDE or GNOME by using Table 11 1 If you forgot to log into the root account open an X terminal window in GNOME and at the prompt type su and press Enter You ll be asked for a A password KDE opens a dialog box that asks you for the root password when you attempt to open Linuxconf If you can supply the root password you ll be logged in as a superuser with root privileges 162 Hour 11 Taste 11 1 Opening Linuxconf From This Starting Point Open Linuxconf By KDE Desktop Clicking the DrakConf icon and selecting Linuxconf GNOME Main Menu Navigating to System LinuxConf X terminal window Typing linuxconf and pressing Enter The main Linuxconf window contains two tabs the Config tab and the Control tab On the Config tab click Networking to display the Network Configurator the Client tasks tab should be displayed shown in Figure 11 1 Find Internet access configuration Supply IP address Create PPP connection FiGure 11 1 Linuxconf 1 16 subrev 2 1 i e x This is the main entr Linux configuration Linuxconf performs a y z Use the TAB key to napigate between the field number of system section and the button
95. or as graphical elements in other application programs such as a word processing program or another graphics program A N A 1 N V aay 2 CNN N ay m i HOUR 21 Morphing Is for Comedians Are you a professional artist or do you plan to be an artist when you grow up Are you tired of flat graphics that stay in one place Are you ready to push your art and creative skills to the limit If you answered yes to any of these questions you are ready to spend this next hour looking at some of the new and exciting graphics programs being developed by the Linux community Particular areas where Linux is quickly gaining ground are animation 3D rendering and video editing This represents a great opportunity for artists on a budget and for those who want to learn about these techniques Once again many of the animation rendering and video applications dis cussed during this hour aren t found on the Linux Mandrake CD you need to download these programs from the Internet But this is the beauty of Linux If you can find it on the Web you can download it for free test out the program and keep it if you like it If not you can uninstall it and all you lose is your download time 314 Hour 21 During the next hour you meet a number of video and animation programs You learn where to find these programs how to do the basics and then use the programs to per form these tasks e Animate drawings you ve created
96. programs can place an image on your desktop and which programs can convert the desktop into an image file Several programs can convert an image into wallpaper for your desktop Programs that you can use include Electric Eyes and Kview If you need to take a snapshot of either your entire desktop or just a single window of the desktop you can use Electric Eyes or Ksnapshot You ll even find a screen capture utility in The Gimp look in the Xtns menu 2 Which graphics utilities can change the appearance of an image file Electric Eyes can change the color size and orientation of an image You can select a file in GQview and use GQview to open the file in graphics editor such as The Gimp KIllustrator or Electric Eyes Kview can crop images and change the orientation 3 What are thumbnails Thumbnails are miniature representations of images Thumbnails are often used as previews in file browsers Thumbnails give you an opportunity to view a file before you open it Hour 23 Quiz 1 What is the easiest way to keep a database of all your music CDs The GNOME and KDE CD players can download information about music CDs that you place in the CD ROM drive You need to be connected to the Internet to download the database information The information that is downloaded includes the title of the album the artist and the song list 2 What are some of the popular sound file formats that are found on the Internet MIDIs and WAV file
97. selected image will appear in the K View window If you want the files to appear in a slideshow fashion click the Start Slide button In addition to being an image viewer K View can rotate and flip images remove unwanted areas from an image and use an image as the desktop wallpaper Creating Icons with the KDE Icon Editor The KDE Icon Editor is used to create icons If you feel creative you can design icons to use on your desktop Or if you re feeling really creative you can design new icons as part of a desktop theme But if you feel you need a little practice make a copy of an existing icon file and play with it That way you can go back to the original version if you don t like your end product Most of the icons you find in your Linux system are in xpm format 7 To open the Icon Editor display the KDE main menu and select Graphics Icon Editor see Figure 22 5 You can also type kiconedit in an X terminal window Graphics Viewers and Utilities 331 FIGURE 22 5 Lf file mome authoricards Icon Editor ox File Edit View Icon Tools Options Help bea es m2 9 e width Edit an existing icon file or create an origi nal icon amp I z Z Z Z 2 MLLMALLLLLETELE R Preview System Colors Drawing tools Color picker vnege0 oFOss 54 11 56 x 46 1 8 Colors 17 The Icon Editor works like other bitmap drawing programs you
98. share pixmaps Q Are there any other useful image utilities included in the distribution A kuickshow supports the most popular image file formats It also acts as a file browser and you can look for files that meet your search criteria kshow can dis play a series of images in a slideshow and can make copies of files If you need to convert images from one file format to another format try xv There are also two other paint programs that you may want to try kpaint and xpaint Q Id like to create my own mandelbrots fractal art to use as desktop back grounds Are there any programs that can do this A Use the Fractals Generator kfract to create mandelbrots You can save the images in the bmp format You can then use other image viewers described in this hour to use the image as desktop wallpaper Workshop There are many pictures you can draw photographs you can enhance and images that you can collect You ll therefore need a few graphics utilities to help you manage all this artwork Test your skills and see how well you ll be able to keep up with your ever growing collection of priceless art Quiz 1 Which graphics utility programs can place an image on your desktop and which programs can convert the desktop into an image file 2 Which graphics utilities can change the appearance of an image file 3 What are thumbnails 334 Hour 22 Exercises 1 In this day you were introduced to the KDE Icon Editor You lear
99. snctesbateasexnazvesssastesnnecstevecssrseed Working with Multiple Desktop Areas Customizing the Virtual Desktop sscsscscvecscesicadescseecdeccebcsiecseesedersdssasssscnaestr sted Wing Sticky WINdOWS saaran aa des dsastac ean coset a aa ee Adding Desktop Backgrounds and Wallpapers ccsesesceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeaeeaees T2 The Plain Vanilla Desktops genrene een aapi eo ii 72 The Two Tone Toucher nene er AEAEE T3 Selecting a Desktop Wallpaper sscssssssssessscersereotesssssssoresnoanoesosscaeserses 74 Changing the D cor with ScreemSavels sss sscisesiesssctessevesancisesieienscsiensessaaes 75 Adding New Color to Windows Contents vii PART Ill Understanding the Filesystem 83 Hour 6 The Marvelous Mystical Filesystem Tour 85 Exploring the Directory Structure ie eeeseceesseesecseeceeeneeessecesseeaceeeseeaesees 86 Of Directories anid SubdirectOries snini isinisisi iise nss enni 87 Getting Into the Home Directory oo eee eeeeeeesceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeee 89 Understanding Linux File Commands 00 ce eeeeseeecseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeseeee 90 Determining Your Location with the pwa Commando eee 90 Changing Courses with the ca Command eseeeseeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseee 92 Managing Directories from the Command Line 00 cece eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 93 Creating Dir CtOrieS scossi iaee reoi dse rnos roa iaei o eiaa sona Easa 93 Deletins Directories acs nren EEEE TEE sE NES 94 Getting Started
100. structure in which to store his project files Joe started with a subdirectory called books He also needed a subdirectory for each project Joe s current project is called Linux Then he needed a place to store different elements of the project so he has a chapters subdirectory Finally there is a file in the directory All this results in the following filename home Joe books Linux chapters Hour6 L Long filenames are a pretty common occurrence in Linux but they can make j a mess out of typing things on the command line Filenames can be as long as 256 characters and they can contain letters both upper and lowercase and numbers You can also use special characters like the dot dash and underscore _ characters Filenames cannot contain reserved metachar acters like the asterisk or question mark J To make Linux a little easier to deal with there are two versions of Linux filenames The one explained previously would be tiring to type in again and again It is called an absolute filename Absolute filenames always begin with the slash character which indicates the root directory and then slashes are used to specify the exact path through the directories to the file s location Absolute filenames work from anywhere in the filesystem The second type of filename refers to a file s location in respect to the working direc tory s location It is called a relative filename Relative filena
101. template There is a book template for creating longer works that require chapters sections cross references and a table of contents If you give presentations try the slides template When you create a document from a template you ll need to specify a directory in which to store the file and a filename before you can select a template Once the document is created all you need to do to save your changes is click the Save Changes button 1 Click File New from template to display the Open dialog box 2 Double click the subdirectory in your home directory in which you want to store the file 3 Click in the Location text box type a name for the file and click OK The Open dialog box for the templates directory appears as shown in Figure 12 4 FIGURE 12 4 eT Select a template for as TAGA A K fiempates z the new document dinbrief lyx iletter lyx latex_letter lyx linuxdoctemplate lyx Click a template Location ust share apps klyx templates slides lyx x Eilter LyX Documents lyx v Show hidden Help OK Cancel 4 Select a template You may find the following templates helpful e To create a standard business letter use the latex_letter 1lyx template e There is a template that you can use if you want to volunteer your writing talents and write a user manual or HOWTO for the Linux Documentation Project named linuxdoctemplate 1lyx You ll find that most of the applica tion help files in the Linux
102. that not all comput ers are set up to handle the types of files you create and not everyone wants their email box filled with file attachments If you have a hard time editing documents on the screen you may want to print a copy of the file In these cases you ll need to attach a Linux compatible printer to your computer and then tell Linux how to use the printer Another hindrance to the paperless office is the fax machine Fax is still a popular way to transmit documents not everyone uses email One way to reduce paper usage with the fax machine is to use one of the fax software programs This will cut your paper use in half the fax you send is saved as an electronic file and only the recipient receives a paper copy 234 Hour 15 During the next hour you learn how to use your computer to print and fax documents Specifically you learn how to do the following e Determine whether a printer is already configured for your system e Configure a local printer e Change printer settings for Hewlett Packard LaserJet printers e Send faxes with K Voice Getting Ready to Print Your Documents During the Linux Mandrake installation you were given the option to set up a printer If you didn t do this during the installation you need to configure a printer before you can print any of your files First check to see that your printer is attached to the parallel port plugged into a power source and turned on If you use a pass through pa
103. the layer where you want the text to appear Then select the Text tool and click the place on the canvas where you want to place the text And finally begin typing the text Once the text is on the page you can select the text and drag it to a new position Right click the text and select Properties from the menu to change the font style and size 308 Hour 20 PE If you want to use text that is stored in another document copy the text E using the Edit Copy command from the application To paste the text into St your Killustrator drawing use Edit Paste You can then move the text any place you need it Lesson 20 4 Arranging Text Around a Shape Text does not always have to follow a straight line You can give your text a little curl or some curves by aligning it with an object You can use one of several shapes to set the path for the text Shapes that you can use are freehand lines polylines bezier curves polygons and ellipses Here s how to create text that bends or waves 1 Select the Text tool and type a few words on the canvas It does not matter where you place the text 2 Create a drawing object to which you will align the text 3 Select the text you created in step 1 An example is shown in Figure 20 9 FIGURE 20 9 Killustrator lt unnamed gt gt ar Ex eriment with ali n Z File Edit View Layout Arrange Extras Help S 7 3 20e a g fos x ing text along
104. the Check Dependencies option 1 3 7 138 Hour 9 e When you select the Test do not install option KPackage looks at the filesystem to determine whether the installation of a package will succeed Use this method to determine whether a bothersome application is installed properly 4 Click Install after you have made your selections KPackage will begin the installa tion After the package is installed you will be returned to the KPackage panel with nothing showing in the right pane Summary During the past hour you learned that there might be more Linux applications available on your computer than you first thought After looking through the Linux Mandrake CD and maybe some of the other Linux distributions you probably found even more appli cations that may be useful to you And if all this isn t enough you can get on the Internet and download Linux applications to your heart s content and the size of your hard drive Q amp A Q Is it possible to install or uninstall more than one package at a time with KPackage and Gnome RPM A If you are using Gnome RPM each time you click a package it is selected Notice at the bottom of the Gnome RPM window that the status line tells you how many packages are selected If you click the Uninstall button all the selected packages will be removed from your system If you want to deselect all the selected pack ages click the Unselect button KPackage has two m
105. the Device Manager tab A list of the devices installed on the computer is displayed in a list 3 Click on the plus sign next to a device type to expand the list and show all the devices of that type 4 Click on the Print button to display the Print dialog box as shown in Figure 1 1 Check the printer settings You can change the printer and the print options Aa by clicking on the Setup button 5 Click on the All devices and system summary option button This will print a summary of the entire system including IRQ and IO port summaries memory and DMA usage and disk drive information A report of all the system devices follows 6 Click OK to send the report to the printer Collecting Your Computer User Manuals Our business has a raggle taggle assortment of computers each with its own peculiar set of attachments video cards monitors CD ROMs ZIP drives network cards CPUs user manuals and everything else In order to keep track of what s installed or configured on each machine we keep logbooks and files containing all the manuals directions and warranties that came with the machine It makes changing the operating system on the computer more manageable by keeping the information all in one place We have a three ring binder for each machine into which entries are made whenever any thing is changed With the speed at which technology is changing you need to hold on to all the documentation supporting each machine
106. the basic Linux commands and programs are kept e The boot directory is where boot configuration files and commands are kept e The dev directory is where the device files are stored for the hardware components on your computer e The etc directory contains the system configuration files and initialization scripts The Marvelous Mystical Filesystem Tour 87 The home directory contains the user accounts for all of the users on the system except for the super user who has the root directory see below Each user has a home directory in which to store personal files You cannot access another user s files from your user account e The lib directory contains the libraries for C and other programming languages e The lost found directory is where to look for a file if Linux has lost it e The root directory is the home directory for the superuser or system administrator e The sbin directory contains tools for the system administrator to use e The tmp directory is a directory where all users can store files temporarily but if the system is rebooted all the files stored here will be lost e The usr directory contains files that are not a part of the Linux operating system like the X Window system files and the Linux game collection Of Directories and Subdirectories The Linux DOS and UNIX filesystems are all similar in that they are organized in a tree directory structure The directory at the bottom of the tree the
107. the dialog box 3 When you have selected a header style click OK You are returned to your docu ment You ll see those headers when you send the document to the printer Design Elements for Your Documents For some fun and color you can add graphical images to your documents KLyX can import any image that you can convert into PostScript EPS files either the eps or ps file formats You can use EPS files in two ways e Encapsulated Postscript files appear on a line separate from any text The image is treated as a separate paragraph with text appearing only above and below the image No text will appear to the right or left of the image e Inlined EPS files act like just another word in the sentence You can insert an inlined EPS file anywhere in a paragraph and the text will flow over under and around each side of the image oe Turn to Chapter 22 Graphics Viewers and Utilities to find a few programs that can convert graphics files into PostScript files Hint Try XFig The Gimp or Electric Eyes Along with colorful graphics you can create tables to organize information and make it stand out from the rest of the text Another use for tables is during page layout When you want to arrange text and images or just columns of text tables make this task easy Looking Good with Graphics Graphics are a good way to enhance your document s message Graphics should enhance your text not be a
108. the folders at that site You can play with the bookmarks included with gFTP and have plenty to occupy yourself for a while To navigate through the remote site first look for a Readme file in the main directory Double click on this file to open a window from which you can read the file This file contains the most up to date advice on how to use the resources contained in the direc tory To open folders double click on them To download files select the folder in your user directory in which you want to save the file select the file you want to download and click the download button it s the left pointing arrow Now sit back relax and watch the download progress And if some thing happens to your connection gFTP will remember where it left off and resume the download No more lost download time Chatting with Your Friends in XChat Chat or Internet Relay Chat IRC is a popular Internet pastime Through the offices of various chat servers it is possible to have real time conversations with people by typing messages and having the recipient answer you by typing a response These chat rooms are organized so that groups of people may converse or private accommodations can be made for private conversations The Internet Relay Chat program we examine is the XChat program To launch the XChat program go to Table 11 5 Taste 11 5 Going for a Chat with the Gang Start Here And Follow This GNOME Main Menu Select Internet xc
109. the menus e When several documents are open at one time switch between documents using the Documents menu Each open document is listed in the menu simply click the document you want to view 190 Hour 12 e Save the file under a different name with File Save as Not only can you make a copy of the file under a different name but you can also place this new file in a different directory e Select File Close to close the document that appears in the KLyX window e Select File Exit to close KLyX and any open documents 7 UW l es ad When you close KLyX you are warned if there are any open documents that contain changes that have not been saved XS SAS When you want to open a file that you ve saved in your home directory click the Open button You ll see the same Open dialog box that you saw in Lesson 12 2 To open a file display the directory in which the file is located and double click the filename The file will open in a separate window Now you re ready to make some changes to the docu ment you started Editing a Document After you ve roughed out the first draft of your document it s time to go back and do some editing You ll find places where you need to add some text That s easy not the part about writing the text but how you add it Just click the place where you want to add the text and begin typing It s up to you to think of the words Other text editing commands require th
110. the print reso lution and density set tings Paper Printer operations Fonts Mode _ Resolution C Economy C 300 dpi Presentation 600 dpi Printer Density ip Resolution Enh medium d Apply Cancel After you make changes in the HP LaserJet Control Panel those changes will appear on all the pages that you print When you want to change the default print settings again open the utility and change the settings 238 Hour 15 Sending Faxes from Your Computer If you want to send a fax from the convenience of your computer screen you must first have a fax compatible modem attached to your computer Then you must decide which fax program you want to use During the last part of this hour we look at K Voice which sends simple one page faxes or can fax files stored on your computer Getting Started with KVoice Although K Voice is capable of much more than just sending faxes you must also have a modem that can answer incoming voice calls With the right kind of modem K Voice can be a full fledged answering machine and fax system Before you get started using K Voice the root account will need to set up Kvoice to send outgoing faxes To start K Voice select Applications Voice Mail amp Fax from the KDE main menu You can also type kvoice in an X terminal window The first time you open K Voice a notice appears that states that K Voice has never been run before
111. the warping effect is influ enced In order to obtain influence fields you must set the vectors in pairs One pair of vectors is set in the source image and the other pair is set in the destination image The mathematical formulas used by the morphing program control the pixel coordinate transformations from source image to destination image for each pixel This means that each pixel is influenced by all vector pairs and this is how you get an image to warp Early images in the sequence will look like the source image The image in the middle of the sequence is an average of the source image distorted halfway toward the destination image and the destination image distorted halfway back toward the source image As you get to the last images of the sequence they will look more like the destination image The middle image is the key to predicting how it is going to go if the middle image looks good then the whole animated sequence will probably look good The common morph process warps two images until they have the same shape and then cross dis solves them into one If you want to learn more about the technical aspects of morphing take a look at these Web sites e The Rice University Digital Image Processing course Web site contains project information on image morphing at www owlnet rice edu elec539 Projects97 morphjrks themainpage html e A few Stanford University professors wrote a paper for SIGGRAPH on Feature Based Volume Meta
112. theme Enjoy the new look Close the Control Center when you re done Customizing Desktop Icons Now that you ve made all these changes to your desktop there may be one item that seems left out the desktop icons You may notice that the icon text is encased in a box and it may not look very good with the desktop background You may also think that the icons are too close together KDE contains settings so that you can make your desktop more appealing To get started open the Application Starter and move the mouse pointer to Settings Desktop Desktop icons The desktop icons settings see Figure 5 9 allow you to customize how icons appear on the desktop If you find that the desktop icons are too close together you can change the horizontal and vertical grid spacing By increasing the horizontal spacing you increase the amount of space between columns of icons By increasing the vertical spacing the amount of space between rows of icons will be larger To alter the amount of space between icons click the plus button to increase spacing and the minus button to decrease spacing You can also change the appearance of icon text Work the next lesson try a few different icon looks and see what a difference an icon can make in the desktop Changing Your View of the Desktop 79 FIGURE 5 9 KFM Configuration aS Improve the look of Besktop icons your desktop by using z a a a transparen
113. to Find the Desktop Switching Tool To Open the Tool From Here Do This KDE Application Starter button Click on System Desktop Switching Tool Command line or X terminal Type switchdesk and press Enter GNOME Main Menu button Click on KDE menus System Desktop Switching Tool Now follow these steps 1 Click the GNOME option button to reconfigure X Window to use the GNOME user interface 2 Place a checkmark in the Change only applies to current display checkbox so that you only change the interface for your user account and then click OK A dialog box will let you know that you need to restart the X Window system so that you can take a look at GNOME 3 Click OK and the dialog box will disappear 4 Click the Logout button or click the Application Starter button and select Logout from the menu The Session prepared for logout dialog box will appear 5 Click Logout You ll be returned to the command line 6 Type startx and press Enter Again you ll see the black and white background with the X shaped cursor After a minute you ll see a status bar for Enlightenment and then GNOME will appear on your screen and will look something like Figure 4 2 Lesson 4 3 Logging Out of the System When you re finished working with the computer and don t want your user account to be available to anyone who may be passing by you ll need to log out of the system Logging out of the system means that any files that you stored in y
114. to pick and given the option to manually configure the server If your card is not listed but you have the necessary information and can configure the server correctly go ahead and do so now It is not essential that you get X Window con figured to install Linux If you can t manage it you can continue with the installation We come back later in Hour 3 Troubleshooting the Linux Mandrake Installation and fix it You ll now be presented with a list of monitors with the suggested monitor highlighted The probes don t always return the correct information and if the suggested monitor isn t yours try and select your monitor from the list If you don t see it select the Custom option and use resolution and refresh rates found in your monitor s user guide to config ure a monitor After you have selected the monitor Xconfigurator will again probe your video card and check the monitor settings to determine a default color depth and resolution You may want to just use the default settings for now We ll show you how to adjust the video dis play in Hour 3 Now that Linux thinks that it has your video display configured correctly it will start X to test the configuration You should see X Window and a message that says Can you see this If you can select Yes The program will wait some seconds for you to answer but if you don t it will assume that the test has failed So you ll want to get to the Yes answer pretty
115. way through some of the other cool applications found in the distribu tion Q amp A Q I noticed some strange paper and envelope sizes in KLyX Why A The strange sizes you see are European paper sizes There s also an executive size that has been traditionally used by corporate executives for personal stationery The paper is of high quality with an engraved letterhead Q What is the easiest way to change the type of quotation marks used by KLyX A Use the Quotes command in the Layout menu There are six quote mark styles from which you can choose Each is a variation of either a curly quote style or a bracket quote style Q Ihave files that were created in Microsoft Word and I d like to use my files in Linux Do I have any choices A KLyX can import ASCII files Look under Insert Insert ASCII File to find your options You can insert the ASCII file so that each line is a separate paragraph by selecting As Lines To preserve the original paragraphs use As Paragraphs You can also copy text in any X Window program and paste it into KLyX Workshop After you ve worked with KLyX for a bit you ll notice many of the same features used by other word processing programs Test your word processing skills and see how well you have applied them to KLyX Quiz 1 How do you move text from one location to another in a document 2 If you want to place a border around a single cell in a table how do you do this 3 Where can you find spe
116. where you want the cursor You can reverse any changes you make to a document by selecting Edit A Undo KLyX contains an unlimited number of undos Here are a few points you ll want to remember when typing in the KLyX window e Press Enter only once at the end of each paragraph KLyX adds space between paragraphs according to the style that is applied to the paragraph e Use only one space at the end of sentences Because KLyX uses proportional spac ing for fonts the space between words and sentences can vary depending on the number of characters that need to appear on a line The space between words is always smaller than the space at the end of a sentence A good rule of thumb is to save your document and save it often You don t want to lose any of your hard work so click the Save button often as you work You may find that all your projects don t use the same document class If you need to create a document that does not use your default document layout settings you can eas ily select a different document class by selecting Layout Document and then change the settings for the new document if needed 188 Hour 12 Lesson 12 2 Creating a New Document from a Template KLyX supplies a number of templates that help make the job of document layout a bit easier Each of these templates is used for a different type of document If you send a number of letters to clients or friends you may want to try the letter
117. will ask whether you really want to import the default categories Of course you do 3 Click Yes and you re ready to make changes to this list Editing the Category List Whether or not you elected to use the default category list if you want to keep track of where you spend your money you ll need to use categories The default category list contains many of the categories that you ll need to record transactions but you may need to make some changes If you want to create your own category list make a list of those spending items that recur frequently and open the Category List To open the category list select Functions Category List If you used the default cate gory list the Category List window will look like the one in Figure 13 4 As you scroll through the list you ll see categories that you ll use frequently categories that will be needed only occasionally and categories that you won t need at all 210 Hour 13 Description FIGURE 13 4 Category List Auto Auto Use categories to track Auto Fuel Auto Fuel Auto Insurance Auto Insurance your spending Auto Licensing Auto Licensing Auto Loan Payment Auto Loan Payment Auto Parts Auto Parts Category Auto Service Auto Service Bank Bank Charge Bonus Bonus Income Charity Charity Childcare Childcare Expenses Select a category to delete Christmas Christmas Expenses Clothing Clothing Computer Computer Expenses amp Upgrad Debts Debts J
118. you ll need to start the program open the User account con figurator by clicking the Users accounts button on the Linuxconf main window and then click the User accounts button to display the list of users shown in Figure 7 4 The next part is simple Click the user account that you want to update the User Information window for the user you selected will appear Make your changes here and click the Accept button to apply the changes System Administration Tasks 109 At some point perhaps during extended leaves you may want to place a user account on restriction When you want to temporarily deny access to the computer deselect the The account is enabled option for that account The user s account and files will stay in place but the user will be unable to log in Lesson 7 2 Changing a User s Password It is always a good idea to change user passwords on a regular basis This makes it harder for outsiders to get into your system You ll also need to change passwords if a user forgets a password or if they think someone else may have discovered their little secret Follow these steps to change a user password 1 Click on the appropriate user account in the Users accounts window The User information window for that user will appear as shown in Figure 7 5 2 If you need to make any changes to the user information select the text that you want to change and type the new text Figure 7 5 User informatio
119. you need a new canvas for your drawing If you do not have a blank page displayed in the KIllustrator window click the New Document button or select File New Here s how to organize your drawing so that different elements can be placed on separate layers 1 Click Layout Page to display the Page Layout dialog box Use this dialog box to set the page size for your drawing 2 To add layers to your drawing click View Layers The dialog box shown in Figure 20 5 appears Show hide Print don t layer print layer Figure 20 5 Layers give you more flexibility when designing your masterpiece Edit preserve layer Delete a layer Move layer up Move layer down Create a new layer Keep the Layers dialog box open while you work on your drawing By doing this you can easily change the order of the layers and whether or not changes can be made to the layer 304 Hour 20 3 To create a new layer click the New Layer button The new layer will appear at the top of the list 4 To change the order in which the new layer appears make sure the layer is selected and then click the Down button The new layer will now be located beneath the first layer 5 To change the name of a layer double click the layer name The cursor will appear at the end of the name Use the backspace key to delete text and then type your own text To accept the change press Enter 6 The three buttons to the left of the layer nam
120. your company name and change the numbers that follow to your fax telephone number Your completed file will look something like the following FAX FROM C Witherspoon 1 555 555 1212 TO T Page P OF e Me Workshop Questions questions questions Why do we always ask so many questions Well we want to make sure that you are comfortable with the information you learned over the past hour If you re not go back and read those parts you missed the first time around Quiz 1 What is the difference between a local printer and a network printer 2 What are some of the more popular printers supported by Linux 3 How much information should be included in a KVoice outgoing fax Exercises 1 Test some of the documents that you ve created so far as you ve followed along with the lessons in this book Did you create a word processing file with KLyX Maybe you ve started using the Check Book Balancer to manage your finances Try your printer setup by printing files of some of your favorite Linux programs 2 Give yourself a challenge If your modem can accept incoming voice calls set up Kvoice as a telephone answering system PART V The Beginner s Guide to Emacs Hour 16 Text Processing with Emacs 17 The Emacs Help System 18 Time Management with Emacs HOUR 1 6 Text Processing with Emacs Emacs is one of the most powerful applications found in any Linux distribu tion And the really amazing thing is that Emacs
121. your present position in your home directory to the usr directory type cd usr and press Enter The prompt will change to look something like the following Joe localhost usr 2 Type 1s 1 and press Enter The command line will list the contents of the usr directory There s no place like home If you are lost and want to go home all you have to do is type cd by itself on a command line and press Enter You will A be whisked back to your home directory Or use pwd to display your location in the filesystem p Type cd and press Enter You are returned to your home directory and the prompt will change to show the directory you are in and look like this Joe localhost Joe 4 Type cd and press Enter You will be moved to the root directory and the prompt will change to Joe localhost 5 To see a list of the contents of the root directory you can use the 1s 1 command again The 1s 1 command will return a list of what is contained in the root directory 6 Type cd and press Enter again You ll be returned to your home directory If you don t believe us just type pwd and press Enter Managing Directories from the Command Line If you remember your old DOS commands you ll find some similarities when creating deleting and moving directories within the Linux filesystem For now we suggest that you only work with directories within your home directory After you learn more about Linux you can c
122. 108 changing 109 payments assigning two cate gories to Check Book Balancer 212 213 PCI Probe screen installation program 29 pcmcia daemon 14 peripherals sharing over networks 152 153 photographs enhancing The Gimp 294 scanning 289 290 pics 318 ping command 178 planning networks 142 143 peripheral locations 145 power supplies 144 user needs 143 workstation locations 143 144 polygons drawing with Killustrator 310 posting deposits Check Box Balancer 214 POV Ray 317 power supplies planning 144 PPP Point to Point Protocol setting up PPP connections 161 169 Kppp dialer 166 169 Linuxconf 161 165 UserNet 165 166 PPP interface dialog box 164 preferences Netscape Messenger 170 172 Print dialog box 17 printer icons creating 240 printers configuring 234 237 local printers 236 237 Red Hat Linux Print System Manager printtool 235 testing parallel port con figurations 234 documenting 149 HP LaserJet printer print set tings changing 237 local printers 236 237 pass through parallel port cables 234 sharing 152 153 printing KLyX documents 185 187 printtool 235 Programming in Emacs Lisp Web page 269 programming languages Lisp 269 programs Emacs 246 buffer windows 247 248 cursor commands 255 256 cursor position display ing 263 file manipulation 249 253 Hyper Apropos function 249 minibuffer 247 modeline 247 384 programs modes 252 outlines 260
123. 15 1 Test the printer FIGURE 15 1 Red Hat Linux rint tem Manager PrintTool Ipd Tests Help Configure printers that are attached to the computer with the printtool Printer Queues in etc printcap Configured printers are listed here Make changes to Edit aa Delete Delete the selected printer the selected printer Configure a new printer 236 Hour 15 Lesson 15 2 Configuring a Local Printer Before you begin this lesson you may want to dig out the user manual for your printer If your printer is not on the printtool list you need to select a printer that closely matches your printer s settings Follow these steps to configure a local printer for use with your Linux system 1 Click the Add button to display the Add a Printer Entry dialog box 2 Select the Local Printer option button and then click OK The printtool looks for any parallel printer devices and lists the detected ports in the Info dialog box You may want to make a note of the detected parallel port Click OK to get to the Edit Local Printer Entry dialog box shown in Figure 15 2 where you will configure the printer Edit Local Printer Entry x Names name1 name2 ip Spool Directory Zvar spoo1 1pa 1p File Limit in Kb 0 no limit jo Printer Device dev 1p0 Input Filter FIGURE 15 2 Set the information the printtool needs to drive your printer Make a note of the printer name Limit pri
124. 256 257 262 transactions Check Book Balancer 215 editors Emacs 246 buffer windows 247 248 cursor commands 255 256 cursor position display ing 263 file manipulation 249 253 Hyper Apropos function 249 minibuffer 247 modeline 247 modes 252 outlines 260 261 split windows 249 starting 246 247 text editing 256 257 262 text entry 253 254 text formatting 257 262 toolbar 247 Screem 221 222 druids 223 installation 222 Web sites creating 224 230 Electric Eyes 326 328 Emacs 246 buffer windows 247 248 cursor commands 255 256 cursor position displaying 263 displaying last 100 commands entered 271 files creating 249 252 253 opening 250 252 saving 251 help system command documentation displaying 268 Lisp functions 269 270 man pages reading 266 Texinfo documentation system 266 268 Hyper Apropos function 249 minibuffer 247 modeline 247 modes 252 outlines 260 261 split windows 249 starting 246 247 enhancing photographs 375 text editing 256 257 search replace operations 262 text entry 253 254 text formatting 257 color 259 260 commands 258 margins 262 paragraph alignment 259 tab positions 258 259 toolbar 247 Emacs calendar 274 282 dates selecting 275 diary file 277 282 anniversaries keeping track of 279 appointment reminders setting 281 appointments entering 278 279 birthdays keeping track of 279 creating 277 cyclic diary entries 282
125. 275 diary file 277 282 anniversaries keeping track of 279 appointment reminders setting 281 appointments entering 278 279 birthdays keeping track of 279 creating 277 cyclic diary entries 282 editing entries 282 opening 277 recurring appointments entering 279 280 searching 281 vacation time scheduling 280 emacs file customizing 281 holidays displaying 276 Moon Phase Calendar 276 starting 274 canvases Gimp creating 291 292 categories Check Book Balancer 209 creating 210 211 category list Check Book Balancer 209 210 Category List window Check Book Balancer 209 cd command 92 93 CD players 64 338 340 CD Read Write drives backing up files 126 setting up for Linux 127 CD Writing HOWTO Web site 127 character formatting KLyX applying 193 194 Check Book Balancer CBB 205 218 accounts balancing 215 217 creating 207 208 naming 218 reconciling 216 217 saving 208 security 218 categories 209 211 category list 209 210 Category List window 209 checks recording 211 213 deposits posting 214 editing transactions 215 Missing Checks Report 217 opening 206 payments assigning two cate gories to 212 213 recurring transactions 215 Startdate setting 206 Transaction List Report 217 transfers 214 215 Uncleared Transactions Report 217 updating 218 checks recording in Check Book Balancer 211 213 Civilization installing 349 351 closing Linuxconf 105 c
126. 6 dust problems 144 equipment documentation 147 importance of 155 printer information 149 workstation configuration 148 Ethernet cards 147 NICs network interface cards 147 installing 150 151 overheating 144 peripherals sharing over network 152 153 power supplies 144 Hardware Central Web site 322 hardware compatibility deter mining 18 header lines faxes 241 headers 195 heat hardware problems 144 Help browsers GUIs 57 58 help systems Emacs help system command documentation displaying 268 Lisp functions 269 270 man pages reading 266 Texinfo documentation system 266 268 Internet resources 44 45 local documentation 38 39 man pages 39 44 Linux commands 42 44 sections 40 helplines KIllustrator 310 holidays Emacs calendar displaying 276 home directory 89 home office networks 141 142 administration 153 154 building 150 cables 150 NICs network interface cards 150 151 Web servers 152 cabling 145 146 documenting 147 equipment records 147 149 importance of 155 network diagrams 149 importance of 155 NICs network interface cards 147 planning 142 143 peripheral locations 145 power supplies 144 user needs 143 workstation locations 143 144 shared resources 152 153 topologies 146 HP LaserJet printer print settings changing 237 HTML tags inserting with Screem 228 229 online resources 230 Hyper Apropos function Emacs 249 hyperlinks creat
127. 6 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 26 27 28 29 30 31 31 ab es EY SS 7 894047 12 33 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 a Display month Mon Nov 8 1999 info o other today Middle click on date Keeping Track of Appointments In addition to just keeping a diary you can use the diary file to keep track of appoint ments or tasks that need to be done on specific dates The diary can track an appointment or task that occurs on a single date in the future or it can keep track of items that recur on a regular cycle After you enter your appointments you can have Emacs send you a reminder sometime before that important meeting or deadline Entering an Appointment When an appointment is expected to occur only once you can create a simple diary entry by selecting the appropriate date and using the I D command When you press the I key on the keyboard followed by the D key the selected date will appear at the end of the diary file You can then type a short description of the appointment see Figure 18 3 PE Don t worry about the order in which you see these entries in the file You ll learn about search commands later so that you can find the information you S need When you enter the time of the appointment make sure you indicate the time in terms of morning or afternoon And be sure there is no space in the time Fo
128. 6 3 Viewing the File List The file manager graphical interface makes it easier to move around the filesystem and view the directories Because there are really no files set up in your home directory user account we are going to move to the safest place for you to poke around the usr directory 1 In the Midnight Commander tree view click the usr directory In KFM click the arrow next to Root to display the list of directories and then click the usr direc tory The contents of the directory will appear in the directory view as folder and file icons 2 Click the plus sign in Midnight Commander or the arrow in KFM to the left of the usr directory icon in the tree view This expands the tree view and displays the subdirectories in the usr directory 3 The Linux How Tos are a good source of help Yov ll find them in usr doc HOWTO Select this directory in the tree view and display the contents of the HOWTO directory in the directory pane as shown in Figure 6 2 These How To s are plain text files that provide help for working with the operating system applications and utilities and hardware components You may find something of interest here so take a moment and scroll through the inventory These files can be opened in any text editor Changing the Look of the Directory View When you first open the file manager the directory view displays directories and files as icons There are other display options You
129. 68 PROUD 22er menn apon ra er ERa EA AE E R EE 369 QUZ a E E rE 369 Hour 23 nerina a AE AeA EA EER E RE ENRE 369 QUZ na E ios E a E E 369 HOUT 2ean a a Eea e e a E 370 OUZ a E r E a 370 Xvi Sams Teach Yourself Linux Mandrake in 24 Hours About the Authors Craig and Coletta Witherspoon are freelance authors who have been writing for the computer industry since the 1970s producing training and promotional materials for multinational corporations and small businesses They are the authors of 16 computer books and the technical editors of dozens of others Contents xvii Dedication To Marlene Hoffmann Acknowledgments We want to express our thanks to everyone at Macmillan Computer Publishing for the support and assistance we received throughout this entire book project In particular we would like to thank Karen Opal for recommending us to Neil Rowe We want to thank Neil Rowe for providing the opportunity and all the support we ever asked for Many thanks to Tony Amico for keeping the manuscript flowing and to Jim Westveer for mak ing sure we kept the facts straight Our special thanks to Kezia Endsley for doing such a great job of making our words sound right and to Dawn Pearson for keeping this project on the right track Coletta would also like to thank Sleepy for the years of loyal and dependable service as our test computer Sleepy has survived numerous beta testing programs hard drive crashes and other abuse caused by late worki
130. 85 Document Layout 184 Kppp Configuration 167 168 Launcher properties 60 Layers 303 Make Account 207 New Account 167 PPP interface 164 Print 17 Properties 305 Select Color 306 System Properties 17 diary file Emacs calendar 277 282 anniversaries keeping track of 279 appointments entering 278 279 recurring appointments entering 279 280 reminders setting 281 birthdays keeping track of 279 creating 277 cyclic diary entries 282 editing entries 282 opening 277 searching 281 vacation time scheduling 280 directories 86 89 changing current working directory 92 93 contents viewing 90 91 creating 93 94 deleting 94 100 filenames 88 89 92 graphical file managers see graphical file managers home directory 89 names 87 renaming 99 root directories 87 slash character 87 subdirectories 87 88 creating 98 working directory 90 directory access permissions setting group accounts 112 113 Disk Defragmenter 23 24 DiskFree 116 disks installation boot disks 22 23 Display Settings dialog box 73 displaying Emacs cursor position 263 document classes KLyX 184 185 Document Layout dialog box KLyX 184 documentation network documentation 147 equipment records 147 149 importance of 155 network diagrams 149 documents KLyX checking 200 201 closing 190 creating 183 188 189 tables creating 199 200 default layout setting 184 186 deleting text 186 desig
131. A Q I want to rearrange the icons on the panel How do I do this A Right click the icon that you want to move and select Move Applet in GNOME or Move in KDE from the menu Then move the mouse where you want to store the icon you ll notice that the icon follows the mouse pointer and click to place it there The icon will be safe in its new home If you want to get rid of an icon right click it and select Remove from panel Q I like to listen to my CDs while I work at the computer Is there an easy way to always keep a CD player at hand A In GNOME you can add an applet to the panel This is a simple CD player that plays pauses stops and skips between tracks Click the Main menu button Move the mouse pointer to Panel Add applet Multimedia and select CD Player A miniature CD player appears on the panel Just pop in your favorite tunes press the Play button and enjoy the music There s already a CD player icon on the KDE panel Q Can I change how windows appear on the screen when they are opened moved and resized A This function is set in the Control Panel Go to the Windows Properties options If you want the window to fill the height of the screen place a checkmark in the Vertical maximization only by default checkbox You can also control how multiple windows appear on the screen in relation to each other by selecting an option from the Placement policy drop down list Living in a Graphical Workspace 65 Workshop
132. Adding Tables to a Document A table is a collection of cells arranged by rows and columns Each cell in a table can contain text or graphics The table can be used to organize related information or used as a page layout tool To start a table click the place in the document where you want to insert the table and select Insert Table Yov ll see the Insert Table dialog box Select the number of rows and columns that you want the table to contain You don t need to worry about the width of individual cells at this point KLyX will automatically format the width of the table cells to fit the information you add to each cell Click OK when you re finished Your table is in place now it s time to set it zM ETH Note that the top row of cells is separate from the rest of the table This Ss row of cells is normally used to display a descriptive label for each column Ly It s easy to insert text into a table cell Just click in the cell and begin typing Adding graphic images is just as easy click in the cell and insert the image You can even resize a graphic once it is inside a cell In fact just about everything that you can do with text and graphics in your document can be done in a table Lesson 12 7 Creating a Table Try your hand at creating a table to use as a page design and layout tool Here are the steps you need to go through to create a table 1 Create the table Decide on the number of rows and c
133. And since you re probably familiar with many Internet applications such as browsers email and FTP we show you some of the best that Linux Mandrake has to offer but we won t get into too much detail on how to use them We supply just enough to get you on your way If you re a Web addict like us loosen your muscles grab your surfboard and take a ride during the next hour and learn how to 160 Hour 11 e Use Linuxconf to create a PPP connection e Set up Kppp to connect to the Internet e Configure Netscape Communicator for email and newsgroups e Download files with GNOME FTP e Have live conversations with your friends on XChat What You Need Before You Begin When you set up an account with an Internet service provider the ISP provided you with a list of information username password access phone numbers server names and IP addresses You ll need this information when you create the connection on your com puter that will be used to connect to the ISP s servers You have all of the software you need on the distribution CD in the back of the book You also need a serial modem and a serial communications port with which to dial out We ll deal with setting up a PPP Point to Point Protocol connection This is the most common type of Internet connection This protocol is supported by most New TERM ISPs and provides a measure of security for the person making the connection and the person receiving the connection
134. But they still are not all they might be they are short and they assume a lot of UNIX background that a new Linux user might not have Moreover they each focus on a partic ular command and there is hardly any help available to assist you with even determining whether the command described on the man page is the best one for your needs One important aspect of the man pages is indispensable The actions of some commands vary a little between Linux systems and the man pages are the most reliable resource for information about how your system reacts to commands Troubleshooting the Linux Mandrake Installation 41 When your system s man pages are invoked using the man utility man searches for a man page on a specified topic and then sends the output to a pager application The pager application then prints the man page to the standard output your display or to any other display device you may have such as a printer Navigation through the man page is dependent on the pager being used The two most popular pager programs are more and less and less is the default choice The brief syntax for man is man topic You call up a man page by passing along the topic you are looking for to the man com mand You may modify the response of the man command by specifying which directory or library it should search To do this at the command prompt type man man and press Enter to display the man page that describes how the man pages work It is a
135. CD log into the root account and follow these steps 1 Place the Linux Mandrake CD ROM in the CD ROM drive and mount the CD ROM 2 Open Gnome RPM and click the Install button on the toolbar The Install window opens and displays a category list that contains the RPMS packages on the Linux Mandrake CD that are not installed on your computer 3 Click the Expand Tree button The list of categories expands to show all of the packages in that category as shown in Figure 9 5 FIGURE 9 5 la mstar P O x Filter All but installed ki Find more applica er LAN but installed packager Package Info Add P X Ba View package tions to install on the Linux Mandrake 0 90 1mdk E 3 Select _______ _ information All A PDF file viewer for the X Window System CD ROM rg F tete M tetex latex 1 0 6 4mdk F texinfo 3 12q 2mdk M texinfo 3 12q 2mdk l texinfo 3 12q 2mdk E rp xpdf 0 90 1mdk xpaf 0 90 1madk L xpaf 0 90 1 mak B 3System SVGATextMode 1 8 Smdk SVGATextMode 1 8 Smdk SVGATextMode 1 8 Smdk Unselect Expand category list Check packages Expand to install Tree Collapse Tree 23 Query P Install Upgrade Y Check Sig X Close Start the installation Select a package Ooo oof a 4 Click the name of a package to read a description of the package 5 Place a checkmark in the box next to th
136. Check Book Balancer or CBB for short CBB is an easy to use checkbook management tool that records transactions for your bank accounts reconciles bank state ments with your register and keeps track of where you spend your money The CBB interface contains an area to enter transactions that is each check you write and each deposit you make and an area to view the account regis ter It looks something like the checkbook register that you carry around in your wallet At the end of each month CBB does most of the work of recon ciling the account for you You just let CBB know which transactions appear on the bank statement As an added bonus CBB can show you where you spend your hard earned cash 206 Hour 13 During the next hour you learn how to use CBB to manage your financial affairs Specifically you use CBB to e Create files for each of your checking savings and credit card accounts e Build a category list to keep track of your spending e Keep your account register up to date e Reconcile your accounts at the end of each month Getting Started with CBB Before you begin using CBB you should create a separate directory in your user account in which to save your CBB files In this directory you ll save account files and category lists It is best to keep this information separate from files stored in your user directory Your directory may take the following path home username Finances Once you ve created the new d
137. Craig Witherspoon Coletta Witherspoon gt CN A SAMS Teach Yourself Linux Mandrake in 24 Hours SAMS A Division of Macmillan USA 201 West 103rd St Indianapolis Indiana 46290 Sams Teach Yourself Linux Mandrake in 24 Hours Copyright 2000 by Sams Publishing All rights reserved No part of this book shall be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted by any means electronic mechanical photo copying recording or otherwise without written permission from the pub lisher No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Although every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this book the publisher and author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions Nor is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein International Standard Book Number 0 672 31877 6 Library of Congress Catalog Card Number 99 67583 Printed in the United States of America First Printing March 2000 01 00 99 4 3 2 1 Trademarks All terms mentioned in this book that are known to be trademarks or service marks have been appropriately capitalized Sams Publishing cannot attest to the accuracy of this information Use of a term in this book should not be regarded as affecting the validity of any trademark or service mark Warning and Disclaimer Every effort has been made to make this book as complete and as accurat
138. D ROM you must tell Linux where you want to look in the Linux filesystem to see the contents of the filesystem you are attaching This is called the mount point The mount point or attachment point for the floppy drive filesystem is mnt floppy for Linux Mandrake systems The mount point for the CD ROM filesystem is mnt cdrom Format Partitions The next screen is the Partitions to Format screen which asks which partitions you want to format The Linux native partitions will be highlighted swap boot and home Installing Linux Mandrake 27 The defaults will be the right choice unless you have another Linux partition already on the drive that you don t want to format like a partition with another version of Linux on it perhaps When you are sure you have what you want then click the OK button at the bottom of the screen It might take a while for Linux to format large partitions and if yours is a slow computer this might take some time So just relax and get a cup of coffee to fortify yourself for the rest of the installation Install System The next screen gives you a list of package groups to be installed All the package groups are selected If you know that you will not be using the service that a particular package group supports and you want to free up some space in your Linux partition you may deselect that package group from the list In other words if you know what you are doing and you are customizing your insta
139. Enter In order to use gFTP for anonymous logins you ll need to tell the program your email address Click FTP Options to open the Options dialog box In the General tab type your email address in the first field You can change any other options to your choosing Read through the list Click OK when you re done Now it s time to find an FTP site log in and look around The example in Figure 11 14 shows an anonymous login Type the FTP address in the Host text box and press Enter Access FTP site Figure 11 14 You can download files from any FTP site that Sy Bate Pe RN 2 allows anonymous monename o a S fip mcp com All Files access Local All Files Size Us I 4 Filename Select a file to download 19 456 jai 1 024 jai CO e conf L enlightenment Z gm ri i a a 024 OI Begin a TF download View down load progress 227 Entering Passive Mode 206 246 150 88 159 255 j LIST L 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for bin ls 226 Transfer complete Store downloaded file View login and read messages 176 Hour 11 For FTP sites that you visit on a regular basis you ll want to keep them in the Bookmark list If you click on the Bookmarks menu you ll notice a list of FTP sites has been sup plied for you Just click on one of these bookmarks and the FTP site will be accessed and the remote directory window will display all of
140. Linux machine and install the application Ext2 Filesystem Floppies Ext2 is the Linux native filesystem type If you format a floppy disk with Linux it will place an ext2 filesystem on the floppy that you can mount and use as an extension to the Linux system on the hard drive By using an ext2 filesystem on your floppy disks you can use the Linux filesystem management tools to keep track of your data and you may be able to restore or recover damaged data Cross Platform Filing When you installed Linux Mandrake you did so on a partition of a Windows machine hard drive and by installing Linux Windows connectivity This allows you to use the Linux file managers to access the Windows drive You may also store Linux files on this Windows drive Backing Up the Filesystem 125 Lesson 8 1 Moving Files to a DOS Partition To copy or move files from a Linux partition to a DOS Windows partition requires a sim ple drag and drop Follow these steps 1 Open a KDE file manager select Expand Tree from the View menu and then navi gate to the Linux directory where the file you want to move or copy is stored 2 Make sure that your Windows partition is mounted Open a second KDE file man ager and navigate to the Windows directory where you want the file to be moved or copied 3 Click the file you want to move in the first file manager drag it to the right pane of the second file manager and then release the button 4 Select Move or Copy
141. Now that the page is set up it s time to start entering text You ll notice that the cursor is at the upper left corner of the work area As you begin typing the cursor stays one step ahead of the text If you make a mistake press the backspace key The cursor will move backward and the last character you typed will disappear TOGS To delete an entire word press Ctrl Delete or Ctrl backspace The text that Ip R 4 is deleted is placed onto the clipboard These key combinations work the same as the Cut button Document Processing with KLyX 187 KLyX wraps text as you type so that when you reach the right margin the cursor auto matically moves to the next line Notice that there is no horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the KLyX window KLyX does not exactly display the document on your screen as it will appear when printed KLyX will take care of the proper text width later For now you can read each paragraph without scrolling the window contents back and forth To see what the document will look like when printed click the Preview but A ton or select File Preview View DVI When you get to the end of a paragraph press the Enter key You press Enter only once at the end of each paragraph Pressing Enter twice does not add any extra space between the paragraphs Spacing between paragraphs is accomplished with formatting styles If you want to move around in the document just click the place
142. OM drive and restart the computer The disk drive is wiped clean and replaced with Linux Mandrake and a cool assortment of applications Workshop This past hour was spent deciding how you want to install Linux Mandrake and making sure that your computer s hardware devices are compatible It s time to test your knowl edge and give you a few extra credit assignments to boost your confidence before you begin the installation process Quiz 1 What does it mean that Linux Mandrake is optimized for Pentiums 2 What is a daemon 3 What kind of modem is best for Linux Mandrake to connect to the Internet 4 Can you use a ZIP drive with Linux Mandrake Exercises 1 Keep a journal for each computer on which you ve installed Linux Mandrake A small ring binder might work best Use this journal to record the computer system devices you collected in this past hour Keep up the journal by noting the steps you followed during the installation configuration changes made after the installation problems encountered and solutions found and users and peripherals attached to the system 2 It s always a good idea to research a subject before you dive into a task You can read the user documentation on the Linux Mandrake CD ROM from your Windows computer Navigate to the DOC directory on the CD You ll find the Linux Mandrake installation guide and the user guide There are also several man uals for the K Desktop Environment You can read thes
143. Open dialog box Navigate to the directory in which you want to save the file and type a filename in the Location text box Then click OK to display a blank document window 2 Click Layout Document to display the Document Layout dialog box as shown in Figure 12 2 Set print options One or two column format FIGURE 12 2 miann x Sides Columns Class article Use document classes Gian mon to create professional Pagestyle C Two C Two looking documents Fonts default z Separation Font Size gefauit 7 Indent ___Bullet shapes ae Select a document class Language default S I Use AMS Math PS Driver default Encoding f jatint Float placement Extra options Default Skip Sfction number depth _ 5j P Medskip 3 Spacing Singe Tale of contents depth J Apply Cancel Add a space Heading levels that appear Display numbers between paragraphs in the table of contents for heading levels Document Processing with KLyX 185 3 Select a document class from the Class drop down list You may find these docu ment classes helpful e Article is used for short documents that require section headings It does not use a header and prints on one side of the page e Book creates large documents that are organized into parts which are further divided into chapters and so on This class automatically adds a header to the document pages and is set up to print on
144. TP program such as gFTP to download files you don t have to worry about a lost connection If the Internet connection is broken the FTP program will save the part of the file that has been downloaded and will pick up the download when the connection is reestablished Hour 12 Quiz 1 How do you move text from one location to another in a document First you must select the text that you want to move Then you can either select Edit Cut or click the Cut tool button Then move the cursor to the place where you want the text moved and click the Paste tool button or select Edit Paste If you want to place the text in another location in the document move the cursor to the location you want and click Paste again The selected text is copied again 2 If you want to place a border around a single cell in a table how do you do this Place the cursor in the cell and select one or more of the Border buttons on the Tables toolbar You can also right click the table and select either Line Top Line Bottom Line Left or Line Right from the menu Answers 363 3 Where can you find special symbols that you can insert in your documents and how do you use them KLyX contains a list of symbols from which you can select Place the cursor in the location where you want to insert the symbol and click Insert Special Character Then just click the symbol from the list 4 How do you resize graphical images that you ve inserted in your documen
145. The next time you hold the mouse pointer over the icon you ll see the changed screen note Working with Application Windows When you re working in a GUI all your applications utilities and files appear inside a window Figure 4 7 shows you a quick tour of the buttons found on a window s title bar While we re at it let s also take a refresher course of resizing windows and moving them around Title bar Maximize button FIGURE 4 7 a KDE Help Welcome to KDE To Close button The Title bar at the top of each window con tains a number of con trols for the size and state of the window Minimize button Window menu Living in a Graphical Workspace 61 A Technical Overview of the X Window System The X Window system is based on the classic client server model An X server a software program that runs on your computer provides all the access to the graphics hardware on the system An X client is an application that communicates with the server passing requests for services The requests are things like draw a circle watch for keyboard input pay attention to mouse input etc The X server draws a circle makes a mouse event change sends input to the screen from the keyboard and so on Because X Window is client server based it makes a perfect fit for network oriented graphics systems running on TCP IP networks The Internet is a TCP IP network as are the web based intranet
146. The program will try to determine your system configuration when you click OK Even though K Voice insists that it was configured correctly you should still check the setup options to make sure everything will work as planned Once everything is ready the K Voice window shown in Figure 15 5 appears on your screen FiGuRE 15 5 If your home or busi ness needs a fax and answering system try KVoice Eile Voice Fax Connect Options Help a RS received Voice Mails Length Comment received Fax Length Fron Printing and Faxing Documents 239 Lesson 15 3 Checking the KVoice Configuration Even though K Voice checks its own configuration you still need to do some configura tion tasks To make sure that K Voice is set up properly to send faxes follow along with this lesson 1 Click Options Setup to open the Setup dialog box 2 Click the Modem tab shown in Figure 15 6 You have several tasks to perform from this dialog box Add fax number Figure 15 6 KVoice needs to know the modem port its speed and the manu Select port modem device Baud Rate Set speed Select manufacturer modem Type US_Robotics facturer tings before answering 7777777 Answer to the following incoming calls T Fax T Voice F Data Cancel Here are the configuration tasks you need to perform from the Modem tab e Select the port to which the modem is attached from the Modem Device
147. This is the reason that when you use the Desktop switcher tool you have to logout of X completely and then restart the X server with a new window man ager to change desktops from KDE to GNOME and back again Adjusting the Window Size The Window menu is the easiest place to find all the commands that control window size and placement The icon for the Window menu is different depending on the application By default it is located at the upper left corner of the window Click the icon to display the list You can right click the title bar to display the Window menu The thumbtack icon is the Stick Unstick button You can use it to hold the window in place on your screen even if you move to a different virtual desktop area Click the Minimize button to reduce the window to an icon on the KDE taskbar or the GNOME panel 62 Hour 4 Use the Maximize button to fill the entire screen area with the window Click the Maximize button a second time to return the window to its original reduced size When the window is smaller than the screen you can drag any side or corner of the win dow border You can make the window any size you like Moving Windows Out of Your Way If you need to quickly move a window click and hold on the title bar while you drag the window to the desired position Here s a cool trick Double click the title bar The working area of the window will dis appear and all you ll see will be the title bar Double cl
148. URL for each part is listed here Part at linuxpower org display_item phtm1 id 120 Part 2 at linuxpower org display php id 125 Part 3 at linuxpower org display php id 128 Part 4 at linuxpower org display php id 134 Part 5 at linuxpower org display php id 139 e Desktop Video A Starter s Guide to Video Editing can be found at Hardware Central ww hardwarecentral com hardwarecentral tutorials 923 1 e If you need a dictionary of video terms visit the Videonics Video Glossary at www videonics com video glossary html Summary During the past hour you were introduced to several multimedia programs that can be used on your Linux system There wasn t much time to cover any of these programs in detail but you were provided with places where you can find more information And remember you can always use the help files from the program s Help menu Q amp A Q What is Qt A Qt is a software toolkit that makes it easy to write and maintain graphical user interface applications Qt is object oriented and written in C When developing software with Qt you can recompile the code so your program will run on the UNIX and Microsoft Windows operating systems You can learn more about Qt at www troll no Morphing Is for Comedians 323 Q Is there one place on the Internet that has a relatively complete list of multi media applications for Linux A Try the multimedia pages at the LinuxStart Web site www linuxstart com applicati
149. X at home in an environment with built in help for the commands and open access to all the functions of your computer then you need to look into GNU Linux If you have an ongoing business that requires a stable platform for running your business scientific applications managing your organization s intranet or maybe even running your TV station you need to look into GNU Linux 2 Sams Teach Yourself Linux Mandrake in 24 Hours What Makes Linux Mandrake Different The Linux Mandrake distribution found on the CD in the back of this book has been carefully organized to provide the easiest path to install and configure Linux on your computer It is particularly well organized for those who need networking and easy con figuration of the Linux machine The best utilities for configuring upgrading and modi fying your Linux Mandrake installation have been selected and are included in the installation package Documentation for Linux and additional documentation for special features are also included on the distribution CD The Linux community has named Linux Mandrake as the easiest Linux distribution to install and configure Support for installation related problems and other problems users may incur with the distribution is provided online Who Should Read This Book This book is aimed at the computer user who is familiar with other operating systems like DOS Windows or Apple Macintosh systems who needs a good introduction to Linux and Lin
150. a permanent Internet connection and mail for sev eral users with permanent IP addresses an Intranet then you will need to keep sendmail syslog System Message Logger Required ypbind NIS Binder Needed only if your computer is part of a NIS Network Information Service domain yp for its old name yellow pages May cause trouble on a dial up workstation Making Sure You Have the Right Equipment Successful installations happen when your computer s hardware is compatible with the GNU Linux operating system In order for you to determine whether your hardware is compatible you must know some things about your computer before proceeding If your computer hardware is compatible chances are good that Linux Mandrake will install easily on your computer and you can begin enjoying your new Linux operating system and the applications included with the distribution If your equipment is not compatible youre only setting yourself up for trouble What You Need to Know About the Computer As you begin your exploration into the world of operating system changes there are many pieces of information that you need to start keeping in a logbook You can begin with an inventory of devices and the system information about them Table 1 3 lists each device and the information about it that you need to know TaBLE 1 3 System Information You Need to Collect For This Device You Need to Know CPU Type Pentium Pentium II RAM Amount of sys
151. acking Up the Filesystem Killustrator 301 The first time you need to save your work click the Save Document button You are pre sented with the Save As dialog box Select the directory in which you want to store the file and type the filename at the end of the directory path in the Location text box This saves the file in the KIllustrator native file format kil You will want to keep one of these kil files around so that you can use KIllustrator to change the drawings The kil file format preserves any special KIllustrator functions such as layers Once your drawing is complete you can then save it in a variety of formats depending on your needs If you plan to use your drawing on the Web try GIF JPEG or PNG image formats KIllustrator can save image files in several more file formats see Table 20 1 When you are ready to convert your drawing to another format select File Export Taste 20 1 Export Killustrator Drawings to a Variety of File Formats Supported Image Formats File Type Graphics Interchange Format gif Joint Photographic Experts Group Jpg Portable Network Graphics _png Encapsulated Postscript eps X11 Pixmap xpm Portable Pixmap _ppm Setting Up Your Drawing Now that you ve had the quick tour it s time to plan your first drawing Where do you start With a pencil and a piece of paper Before you begin your computer generated drawing you may want to make a few sketches and jot down a few notes
152. across the page 6 Click OK when you have finished making your changes 7 Click Layout Paper to display the Configure Paper Format dialog box shown in Figure 12 3 1 8 6 FIGURE 12 3 Set up the page to fit the type of document MV Use Geometry Package This example uses a standard paper size Select a standard Determine paper 10 iil Hour 12 EN Configure PaperF ormat xt Special None Bd Orientation r Custom Papersize Portrait Width C Landscape Height Foot Head Margins Headheight Headsep Eootskip paper size orientation Cancel Set margins Create a custom paper size If you will be using a standard paper size select the size from the Papersize drop down list For the selected paper size decide on a paper orientation e Use the Portrait option if you want the text to run along the short side of the paper This is how you normally print letters and reports e Use the Landscape option if you want the text to run along the long side of the paper This works well for long tables and presentations When you are satisfied with the page setup click OK To create the new default page layout click Layout Save layout as default You are asked if you want to save the settings you just changed as the new default Click Yes Each time you create a new document KLyX now uses the document layout settings that you specified Entering Text
153. actly the way you had hoped it s great to have the help of a good photo editor There are a few easy ways to fix over and under exposed pictures change the color imbalance adjust brightness and contrast crop out unwanted areas of a photograph and hide blemishes Here are a few tricks to make your photographs look better e If your photographs are under or over exposed try adjusting the dynamic range right click the drawing area and select Image Colors Levels e When colors don t appear as they should try the Curves color correction tool Image Colors Curves You can select the color you want to correct red green or blue To add warmth to a picture change the color saturation Image Colors Hue Saturation Select the color that you want to change and adjust the hue lightness and saturation Mn v F T As you apply these enhancements you ll see the changes in the photograph Qz If you don t like the change right click on the image and select Edit Undo e If an image is too dark change the brightness Image Colors Brightness Contrast You can make an image lighter or darker and change the contrast e When you don t want to make changes to the entire picture use one of the selec tion tools to draw an outline around an area You can separate areas so that each area can be worked on independently e You can also apply filters to a photograph to give it a different effect If you want your ph
154. ake 7 0 Installation Boot Disk Preparing the Hard Drive If you want to boot into different operating systems residing on a single hard drive per haps letting Linux and Microsoft Windows share one drive you need to resize the parti tion that Windows is in and create a new partition for your Linux files to occupy There are several methods for partitioning your hard drive The DOS fdisk program can be used to make space on your hard drive but an unfortunate side effect of using fdisk is the destruction of all the data on the hard drive If you want to use fdisk or another drive partitioning program such as PartitionMagic you will need to partition the drive before you install Linux Mandrake Your other option is to let the DrakX installation program do the partitioning automati cally after you supply some basic information And it will safely create and format space on your Windows hard drive for Linux Mandrake without causing damage to your Windows installation Before you begin the Linux Mandrake installation and partition your hard drive you need make sure that the drive is free from errors and defragmented Both of these chores can be done in Windows with the Disk Defragmenter If you cannot find the Disk Defragmenter try Start Programs Accessories System Tools The Disk Defragmenter rearranges everything on your hard drive into a nice tidy orga nized file system again You may even gain some more space on you
155. also shows you how to use the command line to wade through the mounds of information available on your Linux system The hour ends with an introduction to some Linux commands and ways to use them Today you learn the following e How to configure the X Window system e Options for configuring sound e Where to find help e How to use the command line to find information e Some useful Linux commands Adjusting the Video Display Way back yonder in Hour 1 Preparing for the Installation the various installation components were explained One of the default components is the X Window System or as it is also called X Window X Window is the program that controls your video dis play Step back a little bit and refresh your memory about the Linux Mandrake installation The X Window configuration happened during the last part of the installation The PCI Probe looked for a video driver and determined the proper X Server Then you were asked to pick a monitor or select your own settings Finally you selected a video mode that is the screen resolution and refresh rate Then the configuration was tested If you were one of the lucky ones you are now running Linux compatible hardware and the PCI Probe was able to correctly determine your video card You should be able to continue on to Hour 4 Living in a Graphical Workspace and use one of the graphical user interfaces available to you If you aren t entirely happy with the setti
156. an create your own wallpaper and download wallpaper from the Internet If you want to create your own wallpaper you can use a graphics program such as The Gimp which we cover in Hour 19 The Gimp After you ve collected a few wallpaper images see if you can get them to display on the desktop You can also download themes from http www themes org 2 During the last part of the hour you changed the look of a number of items on your desktop If you re using GNOME you may want to consider customizing the panel so that it is color coordinated with the desktop background You can change the background color of the icons on the GNOME panel To get started right click on the panel and select Global properties to display the Global panel configuration dialog box From here you re on your own But remember you can always click the Help button at the bottom of the dialog box 1 q N a m p A PART Ill Understanding the Filesystem Hour The Marvelous Mystical Filesystem Tour System Administration Tasks Backing Up the Filesystem O CO N OO Managing Applications 10 Networking the Small Office Home Office A N A 1 N V aay 2 CNN N ay m i HOUR 6 The Marvelous Mystical Filesystem Tour The Linux filesystem is the place where you keep Linux It contains all of the utility files application files device files system files data files and every other kind of file you mi
157. anagement modes that control whether you can select a single package at a time or whether you can select multiple packages To switch from being able to select one package at a time to being able to select multiple packages click Packages Multiple Selection Mode Q Is there any easy way to find packages on the Internet that I can download and install on my Linux machine A Gnome RPM has a snazzy Web find utility If you are connected to the Internet click the Web Find button Gnome RPM will contact the rufus w3 org Web site and download the list of Linux packages available You ll need a while to browse through the list it s a long one When you find an interesting package click it to display the package information If you want the package you can either install it directly or download the RPM file first and install it later Managing Applications 139 Q Where can I learn more about how the Red Hat Package Management System works A Try the RPM HOWTO found at ww linuxdoc org HowTo There s also an RPM Slackware mini howto Workshop Here we are at the end of another hour and it s time to see how well you understand all this package verification installation and uninstallation stuff Since the reason most peo ple need an operating system is to run applications you should make sure you under stand what you ve learned over the past hour Quiz 1 What is a package manager and which package managers are available in the
158. and component to be able to span a gap of a couple of years and maintain compatibility between older and newer equipment 18 Hour 1 These three ring binders are also a good place to record configuration changes computer problems and associated solutions and mistakes you d like to avoid in the future We know this may seem like extra work but someday you ll be glad you have a paper trail FIGURE 1 1 System Properties The System Properties General Device Manager Hardware Piofies Perfomance dialog box contains C View devicesbylype View devices by connection E Direct memory access controler _ ECP Printer Port LPT1 51888 Plug and Play AudioDrive WDM Gamepott Joystick By Motherboard resources BBY Numeric data processor By PCI bus BB Programmable interrupt controller 9 PS 2 Compatible Mouse Port agp Standard 101 102 most of the system information you need View device information 6 Standard Floppy Disk Controller BB System board extension for PnP BIOS Print 21x System CMOS real time clock z 3 Default Printer L k 3200 Printer Printer Lexmarl Rei Series ColorFine on LPT1 Re 908 e MIMIM ok Cancel C System summay Sess C Selected class or device dacs ard goin sara Print to file Print a system Change printer and device report settings Determining Hardware Compatibility Determining the compatibility of your hardware is a matter of checking the hardware c
159. and you ll see the message Mark set in the minibuffer 2 Click the last day of the vacation and then use the 1 B command The beginning of the diary entry will be placed at the end of the diary file and will look like this diary block 12 19 1999 12 31 1999 This shows a vacation that is scheduled for December 19 1999 to December 31 1999 3 Type a description of the vacation 4 Save the diary file Time Management with Emacs 281 Setting Appointment Reminders In order for Emacs to automatically remind you of appointments a few minutes in advance you ll need to add a few lines to your emacs file If you think you want to tackle this task go to Lesson 18 4 and do a little customization work Lesson 18 4 Customizing Your emacs File Before Emacs can notify you of upcoming appointments you ll need to customize the file that controls how Emacs works Follow these steps to do so 1 Open the emacs file by using the Ctr1 X Ctr1 F command 2 Type emacs and press Enter The Emacs configuration file will appear in a window 3 Scroll to the bottom of the file and type the following display time add hook diary hook appt make list diary 0 4 Save the file and then close it 5 You can now go back to the calendar and diary and enter any appointments that you have scheduled When you are finished save the diary file 6 At some time after midnight each night Emacs updates the appointment l
160. ant to be in focus If your mouse is moved off the window and onto the desktop the window will stay active If the mouse moves to another window that window will become active Living in a Graphical Workspace 63 e The Classic focus follows mouse option works much like the Focus follows mouse option described above When the mouse is placed over a window that window is active The difference is if the mouse is placed over the desk top area there are no active windows 5 When you are finished with your changes click OK 6 Close the Control Center by clicking File Exit Play around with the new focus settings and see how you like them You can always go back and try a different focus policy To change the focus policy in GNOME try this 1 Click the GNOME Configuration Tool icon on the panel or open the Main Menu and select Settings GNOME Control Center to display the Control Center 2 Click the plus sign next to Desktop to expand the list and then click the Window option You ll see a list of window managers in the right side of the Control Center 3 Click the Run Configuration Tool for Enlightenment button to start the Enlightenment Configuration Editor 4 Click the Behavior option You can change the focus policy from the Advanced Focus tab Lesson 4 10 Customizing Window Title Bar Buttons In the last lesson for this hour you learn how to move the window icons around the title bar KDE provides a strai
161. applications on the Linux operating system Wine is not yet stable and should be used only if you want to experiment INDEX Symbols slash character directories 87 3D modeling programs 317 318 3DLinux org Web site 318 4Front Technologies Web site 38 A absolute filenames 88 access permissions group accounts directory access permissions setting 112 113 file access permissions setting 114 accounts Check Book Balancer accounts balancing 215 217 creating 207 208 naming 218 reconciling 216 217 saving 208 security 218 group accounts 110 111 directory access permis sions setting 112 113 file permissions setting 114 sharing files 112 114 user accounts 106 110 creating 106 108 deleting 110 passwords 106 109 updating 108 109 workgroups 106 addresses base memory addresses 151 basic input output addresses 150 administration networks 153 154 Advanced Linux Sound Architecture ALSA Web site 38 Aimee s Studio Web site 314 aKtion video player 342 aligning drawing objects KIllustrator 310 paragraphs Emacs 259 animation 314 animation programs 314 316 320 321 Blender 316 mvComicsMaker 315 316 morphing 318 319 XMorph 319 XMRM 320 321 Animation Learner s Site Web site 314 Animation Meat Web site 314 372 answers to quizzes answers to quizzes 355 371 apmd daemon 14 application launchers adding to GUI panels 59 application wi
162. ard drive hdb for the second and so on that shows the type of filesystem installed size of the drive and any partitions that may already be installed To begin click on the partition at the top of the hda tab to select it and the display will change to show the device statistics in the right pane and the left pane will display the four Linux partitions that need to be configured boot swap home Clicking on any of the items in the above list brings up a dialog that helps you provide the needed data to DrakX so that it can make a partition on the hard drive with adequate room for Linux Mandrake and then format the Linux native and swap partitions to get ready for the system installation If you are installing a new system on a Windows drive for the first time it would proba bly be best to allow DrakX to automatically allocate space for your Linux installation by selecting Auto allocate The DrakX setup program will then create the new partitions that you need and size and format them for you If you are not satisfied with the way that DrakX wants to partition things then you can go back and specify the sizes that you want by just clicking Undo Once you are satisfied with the partitioning click Done The Linux operating system is a filing system as are all computer operating systems Whenever you want to attach another filing system to Linux such as an ext2 or a vfat filesystem on a floppy disk or an iso9660 filesystem on a C
163. area New Edit Delete Splits Balance save Quit N Account list vi Welcome to the Check Book Balancer Creating Account Files Now it s time to get organized You ll need to gather information on all the accounts that you will be tracking with CBB You can keep track of all your checking and savings accounts at each of your banks You can also keep track of your credit card accounts For each account that you want to track you 1l need to create a file for the account and then supply the beginning balance Lesson 13 1 Setting Up an Account Here s how to create a file for an account and how to specify the starting balance You need to go through this process for each account you want to use in CBB 1 Click File Make New Account to open the Make Account dialog box as shown in Figure 13 2 Directory path Filename Figure 13 2 Make Account M a ki ea fi l e fo r eac h Enter New Account Bage Name includirg directory and Description New Acct home jaimie Finances EXcheck cbb account that will be i Acct Descriptioy Example checking account 1 used in CBB Create Account Cancel 2 Type the directory path and filename for the account in the New Acct text box The filename uses an extension of cbb 3 Give the account a title in the Acct Description text box and click Create Account You ll see an Info Warning dialog box letting you 2 0 8 Hour 13 kn
164. as shown in Figure 17 5 Ficure 17 5 Ol emacs localhost localdomain P ojx j Buffers Files Tools Edit Search Mule Help Learn about Lisp func paac i an interactive compiled Lisp function in textmodes text mode text mode tions with the Describe Major mode for editing text written for humans to read i a In this mode paragraphs are delimited only by blank or white lines Function command You can thus get the full benefit of adaptive filling see the variable adaptive fill mode key binding TAB indent relative ESC Prefix Command ESC S center paragraph ESC s centerline ESC TAB ispel l complete word Turning on Text mode runs the normal hook text mode hook 2 Help Help Vieu To read the documentation for the mode in which you are currently A working type Ctrl H M Summary After working with the man pages and the Info files you should have a better under standing of how Linux operates and how to use some of the commands and programs that are installed on your Linux system If you have an interest in programming you may want to use Emacs as a programming environment The Emacs Help System 271 Q amp A Q Where can I learn more about Emacs gt The best place to start is at the Emacs Web site www emacs org Q I typed a few commands and something strange happened to Emacs And I don t remember what I did Is there some way to see wh
165. at commands I used A Use the Ctr1 H L command to display the last 100 commands you entered Then use the Ctr1 H K and Ctr1 H F commands to learn more about the commands dis played by the Ctr1 H L command Workshop This past hour was spent learning how to use Emacs to learn more about Emacs and Linux It s up to you to continue your education Test your knowledge and then see if you can teach yourself a new Emacs trick or two Quiz 1 Where do you find the man command 2 How do you find documentation on a command 3 What is Lisp Exercises 1 Create your own Linux help manual As you browse through the man pages Info pages and other help files in Emacs copy information that you find useful and that will help you understand Linux and Emacs You can also add your own notes and directions 2 Teach your computer to speak Emacspeak available at cs cornell edu home raman emacspeak is a speech interface designed for the visually impaired You may want to check out the Emacspeak FAQ at www emacs org Emacspeak HOWTO html A N A 1 N V aay 2 CNN N ay m i HOUR 1 8 Time Management with Emacs Trying to keep your life and business organized can sometimes get confus ing if you don t keep track of important dates and meetings You ll find many calendars in the Linux Mandrake distribution such as Ical and the GNOME Calendar There s also a calendar application that works inside of Emacs This cale
166. at you first select the text with which you want to work Before you can copy a block of text or move it to a different place in the document it must be selected To select text click and hold at the beginning of the text and drag the mouse pointer until you reach the end of the text You ll notice that the text is high lighted You can bypass the mouse by using the arrow keys Position the cursor at the beginning of the text and then press and hold the Shift key while using the arrow keys to move the cursor to the end of the text Once the text is selected you can delete the entire block of text move it to another place in the document or make a copy of the text and paste the copy elsewhere Use the Cut Copy and Paste toolbar buttons to edit the text If you ve added something to the document that you don t like and don t know how to get rid of it go back to the last saved copy of the document Z and try again Select File Revert To Saved to undo your changes Document Processing with KLyX 191 Lesson 12 3 Rearranging the Document In this lesson you select existing text in your document and move it to another place in the document If you re like most people you do a lot of cutting and pasting when trying to organize your thoughts on paper Try these steps 1 Select the text that you want to move 2 Click the Cut button The selected text disappears from the screen but is retained on the clipboard
167. at you may want to take some time to explore e The GNOME User s Guide contains information about working with the interface and help files for the CD player and calendar e Man Pages takes you to the entire list of man pages organized by category These are the same man pages you encountered in Chapter 3 Troubleshooting the Linux Mandrake Installation but they are easier to find and read Again browse in Web style and use the Back and Forward buttons to maneuver e Info pages directs you to the GNU documentation GNOME Documents contains information about a few GNOME utilities such as the help browser a few games and the user s guide eae You ll find help files in many of the applications you may use Open the Help al menu and see what s available Exploring the Panel Even though the KDE and GNOME panels share some of the same capabilities they don t act the same KDE provides flexibility for placing the panel and the taskbar any where you want on the screen GNOME contains corner panels and edge panels By default each of the panels comes equipped with a number of icons that start some useful applications It is possible to customize the panel by removing icons adding new icons and moving icons around Lesson 4 6 Moving the Panel Around the Desktop in KDE This lesson covers moving the KDE panel and taskbar to a different side of the screen GNOME does not provide this same flexibility Follow the
168. ated tasks gpm General Purpose If you will be working within a GUI do not Mouse Daemon use this daemon inet Internet Super Server Handles dial in services like ftp smtp and asf If you only dial out for connecting to the Internet turn it off In its default setting it essentially invites anyone who knows your IP address to launch an attack at your box keytable Generic service Required Loads the selected keyboard map as set in etc sysconfig keyboard linuxconf Linux Configuration Required You will be using linuxconf to con figure your system in later hours 1pd Line Printer Spooler Daemon Required if you will be attaching a printer to the computer netfs Network Filesystem Mounter Needed for mounting NFS SMB and NCP shares network Generic service Required to activate network interfaces when the system is booted nfs Network filesystem Provides shared files across a network pemcia Generic service Use this service if you are using a laptop random Random Number Generating Required Daemon routed Network Routing Daemon If you use a dial up connection to the Internet do not use this service Preparing for the Installation 15 Daemon Description Service Performed sendmail Mail Transport Agent If your mail client is capable of sending and receiving mail on its own Netscape Mail kmail Pine you may disable this service In a work station configuration a mail transport agent is not generally needed but if you are managing
169. ation PPP Sllp Plip configurations 51x FIGURE 11 2 Type the access infor mation required by your ISP exi Type of interface PPP v SLIP v PLIP Accept Caj AGA Phone numberf5551111 Modem port dev ttySO A _j Use PAP authentication Login name jusername myisp net Password password1 Accept Cancel Customize Help 4 Type the telephone number you use to connect to your ISP in the Phone number text box When entering a phone number just type the numbers Don t use any spaces dashes or parentheses If you need to dial a number to get an out side line put that number in front of the ISP s telephone number 5 Select your modem port from the Modem port list box 6 Select the Use PAP authentication option unless your ISP requires something dif ferent 7 Fill in your login name usually your email address and the password you use to log in to your account 164 Hour 11 8 Click the Accept button The pppO connection you just configured will appear in the PPP SLIP PLIP Configurations dialog panel 9 Click the pppO listing in the PPP SLIP PLIP Configurations panel to display the PPP interface dialog box for ppp0 as shown in Figure 11 3 Figure 11 3 PPP interface ppp0 Configure modem Hardware Communication Networking PAP hardware for your F Use hardware flow con
170. ation and reducing wasted effort in group projects It can also help promote optimum allocation and use of resources by providing some structure to planning for the organization s growth The time to build a network is as soon as you have two or more computers to network together That may seem a little oversimplified But if you begin early and plan your net work to maximize what you have as your organization grows you can add more compo nents to your network and it can grow with you The Importance of Planning Good network planning is essential to ensuring that your needs and goals are met that your equipment acquisitions are guided and that network growth maintains purpose and direction Networking the Small Office Home Office 143 The successful implementation of a network is always the direct result of careful plan ning Planning processes address specific needs and necessary changes as well as define the resources needed to meet the hardware software requirements and the networking goals of the organization The relationship between network planning and network implementation New TERM i must be carefully considered To be effective network planning must relate to a desired and identifiable change that is to be implemented and its focus must remain on instituting that change in an orderly fashion Planning focuses on three factors people processes and organizations Any healthy robust enterprise seeks to develop and
171. b site 351 Linux Sound Subsystem Web site 38 Linux Mandrake installing 10 15 alongside Windows 11 BootMagic 30 custom installation 12 15 installation boot disk creating 22 23 installation screens navigat ing 24 30 installation tasks 18 Internet resources 44 45 local documentation 38 39 man pages 39 44 minimum system require ments 10 partitioning hard drives 23 on separate hard drive 11 as sole operating system 11 20 sound configuring 37 38 system information 15 18 X Windows configuration 34 37 Linux Mandrake Web site 19 31 LinuxApps Web site 352 Linuxcare Web site 10 18 19 Linuxconf 104 105 161 165 closing 105 group accounts 110 111 creating 110 111 directory access permis sions setting 112 113 file permissions setting 114 sharing files 112 114 Group specification window 111 Network Configurator 162 opening 162 starting 104 105 system logs 115 time and date changing 116 User account configurator 105 man command 381 User account configurator window 110 User account creation window 107 user accounts creating 106 108 deleting 110 passwords 106 109 updating 108 109 User groups window 110 111 User information window 109 Users accounts window 106 linuxconf daemon 14 LinuxPower org Web site 322 LinuxStart Web site 323 Lisp functions 269 270 Lisp programming language 269 lists creating in KLyX 194 195 local area networks LAN 145 local
172. background images in a frame Pal f1 ic 1 in frame Indexed Place background manane Enlarge background Animating with Blender If mvComicsMaker won t suit your needs give Blender a try Blender is more than an animation program It will also do 3D modeling rendering and perform post production tasks If you are interested in Blender which is a freeware program you can find the program tutorials and information on purchasing the commercial version at www blender nl Morphing Is for Comedians 317 hy You may find it easier to install an RPM version of Blender You ll find one at sunsite org uk Mirrors ftp calderasystems com pub openlinux contrib RPMS 1ibc6 Download the file named blender 1 70a 1 i386 rpm X i S g 3D Modeling If you enjoy creating 3D objects there are several Linux programs that have the look and feel of some of the 3D programs that run under the Windows operating system One of the more familiar 3D modeling programs is POV Ray Actually POV Ray is a ray tracing program Ray tracing creates computer images that look like photographs These images are drawn after you specify what objects are to be included in the image how they are shaped their color and texture and from which direction the light reflects off the objects The POV Ray Web site is located at ww povray org Download the POV Ray Linux version from ftp povray org pub povray Official Linux You ll n
173. been supplied add the transaction to the register by pressing Enter or clicking the Accept Transaction button The first time you record a check you ll need to manually type the check number The next time you enter a check just type a plus sign CBB will display the next check number in sequence If you use categories to track your spending there are a couple of tricks to entering the category type in the Category field First no matter which trick you choose make sure the cursor is in the Category field 212 Hour 13 e For the first trick open the Category List select the category you want to apply to the payment and click the Paste button When you go back to the register you ll see the category in the Category field e The other trick is to type the first letter of the category name and press Tab If CBB can guess the category it will fill in the rest If not type another letter and press Tab Keep going until the entire category name appears in the field While you are entering transactions keep the Category List window open You can use this list to complete the Category field in the entry area Zz Lesson 13 4 Assigning Two Categories to a Payment There may be times when you write one check that applies to two category items For example you may go to the supermarket to pick up a few groceries but while you re there you buy postage stamps To assign two categories to a payment follow these steps
174. bottom option e To use a vertical gradient select Blend colors from right to left e If you d rather use a pattern click the Use pattern option button and select a pattern style from the list You ll see a preview of your selection in the Preview window 5 To see how the changes look on the desktop click Apply When you ve achieved the perfect desktop close the Display settings dialog box Selecting a Desktop Wallpaper Selecting a desktop wallpaper is almost as easy as using the one color background In the Wallpaper section of the Desktop Display settings dialog box use the drop down list to select the image you d like to appear on the desktop When you make the selection the wallpaper will appear in the preview monitor If you don t like the selection pick another You can further change how the wallpaper appears on the screen by selecting an option from the Arrangement drop down list Try a few of these arrangements which work well with most background images To display several copies of the image in a checkerboard pattern use the Tiled option If you d like to see two copies of the images face to face that is one normal the other reversed try the Mirrored option The Centered option places the image in the center of the screen with background color around the edges If you use Centered choose either a single color or a gradient to display in the desktop area not covered by the picture And try color
175. cabling 385 desktop icon text transparent backgrounds 79 editing Emacs 256 257 262 entering in documents KLyX 187 formatting Emacs 257 262 Screem 228 229 KLyX documents 186 text editors see Emacs text entry Emacs 253 254 The Gimp see Gimp The The Rendering Times Web site 318 themes desktop themes 77 80 time and date changing 115 116 Title bar KLyX 183 title bar buttons application windows customizing 63 toolbars Emacs 247 toolboxes The Gimp 291 topologies networks 146 Transaction List Report Check Book Balancer 217 transferring files across the Internet with gFTP utility 175 176 transfers Check Book Balancer 214 215 transparent backgrounds desk top icon text 79 Troll Tech Web site 322 troubleshooting Internet connections 178 Linux Mandrake installation Internet resources 44 45 local documentation 38 39 man pages 39 44 sound configuring 37 38 X Windows configuration 34 37 Tucows Linux Web site 352 turning off computers 31 twisted pair cabling 146 386 Uncleared Transactions Report Yo Uncleared Transactions Report Check Book Balancer 217 undo feature KLyX 187 uninstalling KPackage 133 134 unshielded twisted pair UTP cabling 146 updating Check Book Balancer 218 user accounts 108 109 pgrading Your Linux Distribution mini HOWTO Web site 120 UPS uninterruptible power supply 127 144 User account configurator Linuxconf 105 User
176. cations components shown in Table 1 1 represent a reasonable setup for an all purpose workstation Preparing for the Installation 13 TABLE 1 1 Customize a Multi Purpose Workstation Component Description Graphics Manipulation KDE GNOME Other Window managers Mail WWW News tools Communication facilities Office Multimedia Support Games System Configuration Web Server Network Management Workstation Documentation Databases Miscellaneous Adds graphics applications to the installation such as The GIMP and XMorph Installs the KDE graphical user interface and an assortment of applications designed for the K Desktop Environmnet Installs the GNOME graphical user interface and a number of GLP software applications Installs kdm enlightenment fvwm fvwm2 and so on Required if you want to send and receive email surf the Web and participate in Usenet newsgroups Provides a number of programs that are needed to use the system to send and receive faxes provide voicemail services and use tel net facilities Applications that are part of Koffice such as the KLyX word processor and the KIllustrator drawing program Provides multimedia support for the X Window system and on text consoles Installs games that run on a text console and games that run under the X Window system Sets the daemons that are controlled depending on how the sys tem is configured Allows the machine to be
177. ch is 256 colors You may find a resolution of 1024x768 and a 16bpp color depth a bit easier to work with 3 Make your selection of a resolution and color depth tab to OK and press Enter The Test Configuration screen appears This screen informs you that Xconfigurator will need to start X to test the configu ration 4 Select Yes and press Enter X will start and when the X server has loaded it will put a small window up asking Can you see this You will need to click Yes in just a few seconds or the server will think that the test has failed and you will have to begin all over again Troubleshooting the Linux Mandrake Installation 37 It is possible to damage your monitor by selecting parameters outside the capabilities of the monitor If the settings are obviously not right or nothing appears on your screen after 10 seconds during testing press Ctrl Alt Backspace to kill the X server You can then run Xconfigurator again and select different settings A 2 G 10 5 The next panel asks if you want to start X automatically the next time you log in Choose No You are returned to the command line prompt To see the results of the configuration type startx at the command line a If you don t succeed at the first attempt don t feel too dejected Just go f T back and try again Nearly every X configuration is a little different and SIDA most everyone has to run through the configuration a t
178. cial symbols that you can insert in your documents and how do you use them 4 How do you resize graphical images that you ve inserted in your document Document Processing with KLyX 203 Exercises 1 If you use KLyX for correspondence you might try creating your own letter tem plate This template can contain letterhead with your address phone number and a logo or small graphic You can also customize other parts of the letter template such as the signature space and the inclusion of carbon copies and enclosures 2 Try your hand at being a responsible Linux user The software programs found in the Linux Mandrake distribution are covered under the GNU General Public License and are supported by individuals If you find bugs with the program send a report to the owner You can usually find out who the owner is by looking at Help About Many programs also need programming support and documentation Find out more at http www gnu org A N A 1 N V aay 2 CNN N ay m i HOUR 1 3 Checkbooks Gone Digital What s the first word that comes to mind when you think of balancing your checkbook Drudgery Wouldn t you be happier if someone else kept your bank balance and reconciled the account at the end of each month Well you can t always get everything you want But one way to simplify this chore is to use a financial management software program Bundled in the Linux Mandrake distribution you ll find the
179. cintosh days During the last part of Hour 11 Getting on the Internet you learned that you could create Web pages with Netscape Composer Now there s nothing wrong with Composer but maybe you re looking for something more something with more bells and whistles Screem differs from Composer in that Screem is designed to create and manage an entire Web site Screem treats your Web site as a single unit not as a collection of separate Web pages Because your Web pages are kept together as a site if a change is made on one page that affects other pages such as renaming a page that is linked to other pages in the site Screem will automatically update hyperlinks and navigation bars 222 Hour 14 If you design Web sites large or small fire up your Web browser because Screem can t be found on the Linux Mandrake CD During the next hour you will get acquainted with Screem by doing the following e Downloading Screem from the Internet and installing it on your computer e Creating the foundation for a Web site e Adding text HTML tags hyperlinks and images to Web pages Getting Ready to Screem One of the most exciting things about Linux is the availability of software packages While many of these software programs can be found on the Linux Mandrake CD you ll find even more Linux software on the Internet One of the Linux applications that you need to download from the Internet is Screem Now you may think that downloa
180. come up with Q Aligning drawing objects to a gridline is a snap But what if I don t want the objects on the gridline but need some other position on which I can make alignments A Try using the helplines function Click Layout Helplines to access the Setup Helplines dialog box You can set up one or more helplines that run horizontally vertically or both Type the position on the page at which you want the helpline to appear and click the Add button You ll find that helplines can be used instead of gridlines or in addition to gridlines Q How do I draw a polygon A There are two tools that you can use to draw a multisided shape The first is the Create Polyline tool To use this tool click the place where you want to start the shape move the mouse pointer click the place where you want the first line to end and then click the place where you want each additional line to end When you want to join the first line to the last line right click the place where you want to end the shape You can also use the Create Polygon tool Double click the Create Polygon tool button to open the Setup Polygon Tool dialog box From this dialog box you can select the number of points that you want to appear in the shape make it a concave polygon and smooth out the rough edges Q I created several objects on one layer and I want them all to line up along the left edge of the canvas How do I do this A Objects can be aligned several ways Y
181. contains Living in a Graphical Workspace 57 Lesson 4 5 Using the KDE Help Browser The KDE Help browser not only contains information about the user interface but it can access help files for many applications and it contains a search function Here s how to get started with the KDE Help browser 1 Click the KDE Help browser icon on the panel or select KDE Help from the Application Starter The KDE Help browser opens The Help browser looks and works much like a Web browser see Figure 4 5 Find application help FIGURE 4 5 4 KDE Help Welcome to KDE The KDE Help Elle Edit Goto Bookmarks Options Help browser link ee ROSE EUS you to a noraa a a html vast assortment of help resources UF K PR ge NY COU O I YU Read man pages in HTML format Wa The KDE team welcomes you Welcome to the K Desktop Environment to user friendly Unix a What is the K Desktop Environment Contacting the KDE Project Supporting the KDE Project KDE isa powerful gnphial KDE Help Contents desktop environment for Unix workstations AKDE KDE application help index desktop combines ase ofuse DE application help index contemporary functiomaliny System man page contents Browse GNU andoutstanding graphical System GNU info contents design with the technological Search for Keyword documentation superiority of the Unix operating system Getting the most out of KDE A Quick Start Guide to the Desktop Learn mo
182. core of paired cables Then a braided insulating conductor is wrapped around it like the coaxial cable It too is noise resistant but can carry a signal farther than UTP e Optical fiber is the most efficient transmission carrier it is also the most expen sive The fiber cables can carry both broadband transmissions radio wave trans mission of multiple distinct signals like cable TV and radio channels as well as baseband single signal transmission They can carry transmissions farther 100km and up at very high speeds and with near immunity to environmental hazards and electromagnetic interference The test equipment for fiber optic networks is very expensive and you need technically trained people to install it It is unlikely that a small network would need this type of cabling Selecting the hardware you will use for networking requires you to decide on a network topology layout that best suits your needs The price of network hardware has dropped dramatically recently and you can purchase high speed auto switching hubs and network interface cards at a fraction of the cost of just a few years ago The prices for network hardware components fluctuate over time and locale so you need to look around Networking the Small Office Home Office 147 If you don t have a large network or a large budget you can still connect two computers with two Ethernet cards and a cable Two 10Mbit 10base2 Z NICs Ethernet card
183. create simple shapes and add one or more colors to its design You also learned how to separate your drawing into layers for more flexibility The one thing you didn t learn was how to be an artist You need to explore that aspect of your abilities on your own Q amp A Q Ihave graphics files that I ve created in other drawing programs Can I use any of these files in KIllustrator A A variety of image file formats can be used in your KIllustrator drawings Most images are inserted into your drawing rather than exported If you have Web graphics saved as GIF JPEG or PNG images these can be added to the drawing by selecting Edit Insert Bitmap You can also add X11 Bitmaps xbm format and X11 Pixmaps xpm from this menu selection Use the dialog box to navigate to the directory where the image file is stored These images can then be moved around the drawing resized and rotated whatever you need 310 Hour 20 Many clipart collections are saved in the Windows Metafile format You can insert these images by selecting Edit Insert Clipart Q What if I don t have any image files of my own A There are many places to find graphical images Try the Web you ll be amazed at what you can find if you ask a search engine for free graphics Before you down load any images read the rules regarding use of a site s images You ll also find images in the Linux Mandrake distribution Search the filesystem or the CD and see what you
184. cters Zp u_u ILL of the modeline If there are no changes appears in the modeline If ARA f the text in the buffer has been edited and not saved you ll see in the modeline Read only files use in the modeline and when you make changes to a read only buffer you see in the modeline When you switch between buffers any work that is unsaved in the first buffer will remain unsaved when you are in the second buffer If you don t want to switch back and forth to save the files click File Save Some Buffers or use the command Ctri1 X S For each buffer that contains unsaved changes you are asked if you really want to save the file Opening Files Earlier you learned how to close a file contained in a buffer What do you do when you ve closed a file and later want to work with it again Use Table 16 2 to decide how to open the file 252 Hour 16 TABLE 16 2 Opening Files in Either Frames or Split Windows To Open a File Use this Menu or Command In a new frame File Open in New Frame Ctr1 X 5 F In a new window File Open in New Window Ctr1l X Ctrl F As read only Ctr1 X Ctr1 R The menu commands open a Find file dialog box similar to the one shown in Figure 16 2 Click the middle mouse button to select a directory and also to select the file The com mands will display a prompt in the minibuffer where you supply the directory path and filename Working in Enriched
185. d I think not to rest till I come thither where I have appointed a friend or two to meet me but for this gentleman that you see with m e I know not how far he intends his journey he came so lately into my2 a company that I have scarce had time to ask him the question Press Enter twice to leave space between paragraphs Buceps Sir I shall by your favour bear you company as far as Theobald s and there leave you for then I turn up to a friend s house who mew s a Hawk for me which I now long to see Save your work Text mode Enriched mode Notice that words do not always appear correctly at the end of lines And if you change the width of the Emacs window the width of the text lines will change If you want to use the default line width use the Auto Fill mode By using this minor mode words will break when there is a space or return character To use the Auto Fill command use Alt X auto fill mode and press Enter Any text you type after applying the Auto Fill mode will fit within the default line width If you typed text before applying the Auto Fill mode this text will not change To change the rest of the paragraphs to fit in the default line length use the Fill paragraph 254 Hour 16 command Place the cursor in the paragraph you want to refill and press Alt Q You ll find that the text is much easier to read The text in the lesson example has been refilled and now looks much neater as shown in F
186. d lines that appear from top to bottom Since this grid will help you position objects on the page select the Show Grid option to display the gridlines on your canvas If at any time you want to hide the gridlines select View Show Grid Another method used to organize a drawing is the use of layers Layers are a way of combining several drawings into one drawing When you use layers dif ferent parts of the image are placed on separate layers When the different layers are arranged images on one layer may cover an image on a lower layer There are many advantages to using layers The most obvious is that you can rearrange the order of the layers to make the drawing look different That is you can move objects out from behind other objects by changing the order of the layers Another advantage is that you may hide some parts of a drawing when certain elements of the drawing are not needed For example you may have a slogan that you don t always want to appear with a logo Put the slogan on one layer and the logo on another layer Killustrator 303 Lesson 20 2 Working with Layers You may have parts of your planned drawing that you may not want to use each time you print a drawing or export it into another file format Or a part of your drawing may need to be a different color for different purposes When a drawing needs separate elements that you can easily display and hide based on your needs use layers Before you begin this lesson
187. d of watching the screen jump spin and cavort just move the mouse or press any key on the keyboard and reality strikes again There are a variety of places where you can hunt for screensavers Use Table 5 2 to get to find the selection of screensavers Taste 5 2 Searching for Screensavers Start Your Search Here And Follow This Path KDE or GNOME panel Click the Control Center icon and select Desktop Screensaver KDE or GNOME Main Menu Move the mouse pointer to Settings Desktop Screensaver KDE desktop Right click and select Display properties and then click the Screensaver tab Lesson 5 5 Password Protecting the Screensaver One advantage of using a screensaver is that you can leave your user account open yet still keep unauthorized persons from seeing what s on your desktop You ll do this with a password 1 Scroll through the Screen Saver list and click the one you d like to use You ll see the screensaver in the preview monitor see Figure 5 7 76 Hour 5 Select a screensaver Preview FiGure 5 7 trol Center File Help GNOME contains Default Editor many more screen Desktop savers than KDE Background Caral Cynosure 5 Th Sale Decayscreen Wait eme Selector Deco PoS i Window Manager Demon te ot before i Mime Types starting Multimedia screen Discrete Settings Change screensaver Usoni saver r Screen Saver Settings settings F Peripherals Start An
188. d pressing Enter This displays the Tab Stops buffer shown in Figure 16 6 3 To delete a tab marker you must first select it by either using the Right Arrow key to highlight the marker or by clicking on the tab marker Then press the Spacebar and the marker will disappear 4 To create a tab marker move the cursor to the position where you want to place the marker and type a colon character Text Processing with Emacs 259 Create new tab by typing a colon FIGURE 16 6 Use tabs to align text in rows and columns 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0123456789012345678901 2345678901 2345678901 2345678901 234567890123456789 gt Select tab marker to To install changes type C c C c delete and press the Spacebar Ei NEmacs Tab Stops iG ITA A Fundamental Ovwrt A11 Apply tab spacing to document 5 When you have arranged the tab markers save the changes Type Ctr1 C Ctrl C The Tab Stops buffer closes and you ll be returned to your document 6 You can now use the Tab key to create columns in your text Formatting Paragraphs You ll want to align paragraphs in different order to make them appear differently on the page To change a paragraph s alignment select the paragraph and then choose an align ment from Edit Text Properties Justification You have these choices e Center places every line in the middle between the left and right current margins e Full justifies the text so that the left
189. d tackle daylight savings time that major obstacle to maintaining a good attendance record and remembering when your TV shows are on but Linux han dles this automatically While this is handy it does not take care of problems like moving from one time zone to another or resetting the clock to the right time if it has lost a few minutes To change the time or date from the KDE interface open the main menu and select Settings Date amp Time Click those items you want to change such as the hour minute or date then click the up or down arrow to change the display to what you want Summary During the past hour you learned something of what it would be like to be the system administrator for a computer network This is just a small part of the responsibilities of a system administrator When several users share a computer directories and files the administrator needs to make sure that everyone has a proper account that groups are set up and that everyone has access to the files that they have permission to use Q amp A Q I keep hearing about log files in Linux I know that they show changes that were made to the computer s configuration How can I view changes that were made to the system by Linuxconf A Open Linuxconf and click the Control tab in the main window Then click on Logs to open the system logs window This window has two options Boot messages and Linuxconf logs Click Linuxconf logs A list of configuration change
190. d then type a name for the file An empty file appears in the frame or the window whichever you chose This file does not really exist until you save the file it is stored in a temporary buffer until then 2 4 9 250 Hour 16 FIGURE 16 2 ES emacs mouse read file x Possible comp2 Possible completions are AI Create a blank file that IcEauthority l autosave Xauthority it 7 enlightennen gt Xclients you can edit in the gimp Xeliente localhost localdamain 0 gnome Xdefaults buffer gnome deskto bash_history gnome help b bash_logout gnome_privat bash_profile kde bashre me directory Desktop Use the middle mouse button to select directory Ei i y a J OK Cancel 7 Type a name for the file Find file in other window testing Lesson 16 2 Opening a File in a Split Window Opening a file in a split window allows you to work with two files at one time You should still have the Emacs tutorial open from the first lesson You ll now open an empty file and learn how to navigate between the two windows 1 Use the Ctr1 X 5 F command to create a new file As you type the command you ll see the command displayed in the minibuffer When you finish typing the command the minibuffer will display this message Find file in other frame You are being asked for the directory in which you want to store the file and a name for the file The default location is
191. depositing it into a checking account Enter the date on which the transfer was made Type a description of the transfer for example Vacation 2000 Type the amount of the transfer in the Debit field Rags Ro In the category field select the checking account to which the cash will be Checkbooks Gone Digital 215 deposited from the Category List bank accounts are listed at the bottom and accept the transaction when you are satisfied that the information is correct Your example should look something like the one in Figure 13 10 Figure 13 10 J 10726799 Vacation 2000 500 00 a 2 Siberian train CEXcheck z It only takes one entry l to transfer funds Deposit to this account Amount of transfer withdrawal between two accounts 6 Now open the account register for your checking account Yov ll see that the account has been increased by the amount of the transfer and the transaction is listed in date order Editing Transactions When you need to make changes to a transaction that you ve already entered select the transaction in the account register and click the Edit button The transaction will appear in the Entry Area Make any changes and click the Accept Transaction button to update the transaction in the register Working with Recurring Transactions There may be a number of bills you pay on a regular basis or types of deposits you make such as a paycheck routinely To avoid the necessity of
192. der to search the sections for entries and which prepro cessors to run on the source files via command line options or environment variables If name contains a then it is first tried as a filename so that you can do man foo 5 or even man i 1 gz Man man ant1 page 1 of 1 Man L2 Top _ ___ Using the Texinfo Documentation System One way to learn more about Emacs and other GNU programs is to browse through the Texinfo documentation system This documentation is read using a program called Info To display a list of the major topics shown in Figure 17 2 that can be accessed by Info use the Ctr1 H I command FIGURE 17 2 The Texinfo documents appear in the Directory node Select a topic You can move through these Info pages using the cursor commands discussed in Hour 16 The Emacs Help System 4 o _____________ emass locaihostiocaldomain P O X Buffers Files Tools Edit Search Mule Info Help File dir Node Top This is the top of the INFO tree This the Directory node gives a menu of major topics Typing q exits lists all Info commands d returns here h gives a primer for first timers mEmacs lt Return gt visits the Emacs topic etc In Emacs you can click mouse button 2 on a menu item or cross reference to select it Menu Texinfo documentation system Miscellaneous As as Bfd bfd Binutils binutils The GNU ass
193. diagram of where the cables will run You must note the location of all the network components hubs routers repeaters modems printers servers workstations UPSs and even any segments you may patch into the cable This information can be invaluable when a component fails and no one can remember which closet the last network administrator put it in The information included or referenced in the network diagram must be thorough The model numbers and installation dates of components and cables help you keep track of how old the network segment is and what kind of maintenance needs to be programmed for it 150 Hour 10 Building an Intranet The goal of computer networking is to connect computers and all their supporting hard ware components together in such a way as to maximize the utility and availability of resources to the users You want to be able to make the best use of the expensive compo nents in your network and facilitate sharing devices and information between your users Linux Mandrake can set up a TCP IP network like the Internet to run as your private net work or intranet You will have to configure the networking topology and install the Web server software that came with the distribution and then configure the workstations and peripherals to set up the network TCP IP gives you a private intranet that can still connect to the Internet and provides your network users with access to their personal accounts Hooking Computer
194. different ZA R i mre objects N pg Hda daddi J m ER E Text can be wrapped around objects Selected text y i ENEE E E m S 2 J Align text along A object q 3 z s 300 E 300 ak P Text 18 000 pt 54 000 pt 423 000 pt 30 000 pt 64 00 9 00 pt 4 Click Arrange Text along Path The mouse pointer changes to a heavy right pointing arrow 5 Click the shape to which you want to align the text The text is aligned starting at the left side of the object and follows the contour moving right An example is shown in Figure 20 10 Killustrator 309 Figure 20 10 Killustrator lt unnamed gt ox Text aligns starting at Z File Edit View Layout Arrange Extras Help Z F x 3 M the left edge of an ERE 2 a ine LL object i ee m cs ie im m x 2 m 8 e n be wrapped around op m Text is now curved 41 _ pF big E C CEE AS as 4 700 2 z E O A 3 E Q x a of Selection Mode 39 00 55 00 pt 6 Once the text is arranged you can delete the object to which you aligned the text if it is not needed You can also move the text to a different position on the canvas Click and drag the text to move it Summary In this hour you learned a few of the basic methods for creating drawings in KIllustrator Although you can create simple one layer drawings you can also get as complex as your creativity will allow You learned how to
195. ding a Web page editor like Screem would take all day Well the beauty of Linux is that most Linux applications don t require a lot of space on your hard drive or a long download time Screem weighs in at a mere 1 3MB download Lesson 14 1 Installing Screem Since Screem is not on the Linux Mandrake CD ROM you need to download the RPM file from Screem s Web site Here s where to get Screem 1 It s time to get Screem Navigate to ww screem org to find the Screem RPM Scroll down the page until you get to the Download section You need to download the file named screem 0 1 98 1 i386 rpm 2 Install the Screem RPM on your system Open a file manager and display the RPM file you just downloaded To upgrade the package from KDE click the file to display the installation window In GNOME right click the file and select Upgrade M y If you need a refresher course on how to install packages turn to Hour 9 uy Managing Applications i 3 When the installation is complete you can open an X terminal window type screem and press Enter The Screem Web site creation program will open as shown in Figure 14 1 Building a Web Site with Screem 223 Create pages here Preview pages here FIGURE 14 1 4 Screem o x Use Screem to create IO RE MM GO Sirp kE a map of your Web le BSF v TSRM site design pages gaon ejjse z and update links automatical
196. documentation help sys tem 38 39 local printers configuring 236 237 logging in KDE graphical user interface 50 51 logging out graphical user interfaces 52 54 logs Linuxconf system logs 115 Ipd daemon 14 ls command 41 90 91 Mo Macmillan Software Web site 349 MainActor Web site 322 maintenance routines network administration 153 154 Make Account dialog box 207 man command 41 382 man pages man pages 39 44 Linux commands 42 44 reading in Emacs 266 sections 40 Manager for Desktop Themes 77 mandelbrots 333 MandrakeUser Org Web site 19 margin notes KLyX para graphs 192 margins Emacs 262 Math toolbar KLyX 183 Maximize button application windows 62 Menu bar KLyX 183 Messenger Netscape 170 172 Meta keys 255 MIDI files listening to 341 343 Midnight Commander 95 directories 99 100 directory views 96 97 files deleting 100 moving between directories 99 renaming 99 selecting 97 98 subdirectories creating 98 minibuffer Emacs 247 KLyX 183 Minimize button application windows 61 minimum system requirements installing Linux Mandrake 10 Missing Checks Report Check Book Balancer 217 mkdir command 93 94 modeline Emacs 247 modems accessing from networks 152 modes Emacs 252 Monitor Setup screen installa tion program 29 Moon Phase Calendar Emacs calendar 276 morphing 318 321 XMorph 319 XMRM 320 321 mount points 26 moving
197. ds in Table 5 1 Taste 5 1 Changing Background Settings in KDE To Change Settings From Here Do This KDE and GNOME panel Click the Control Center icon and select Desktop Background KDE and GNOME Main Menu Move the mouse pointer to Settings Desktop Background KDE desktop Right click and select Display properties The background display settings shown in Figure 5 6 list three options for designing a cool desktop background The easiest is a solid color background For a bit more color try a two color background that you can blend in an assortment of gradients There s also an assortment of scanned photographic images stashed around the filing system that you can try The Plain Vanilla Desktop The steps for creating a solid color background are straightforward Select the One Color option and then click the color bar below the option From the Select Color dialog box that appears choose a color Click OK to get yourself out of the dialog boxes If you want a desktop with some splash try the next two lessons Changing Your View of the Desktop apply the same background to all desktop areas place a checkmark in the Common Background checkbox If you want to apply the background only to a single desktop area click the desktop name So you want to customize individual desktop areas in KDE If you want to Z Choose a single desktop area Preview screen FIGURE 5 6 The Display Settings dialog box
198. e Qrt 1 Y ss a D PART Il An Interface for All Occasions Hour 4 Living in a Graphical Workspace 5 Changing Your View of the Desktop A N A 1 aay 2 CNN N ay m p HOUR 4 Living in a Graphical Workspace The easiest way to work with any operating system and the associated applications and utilities is to use a graphical user interface If you have worked with the Microsoft Windows or Apple Macintosh operating systems yov re probably already a pro with the GUI This chapter shows you how to work within the KDE and GNOME interfaces just as easily as you work with other GUIs By following along with the lessons presented during this hour you learn the following How to access your user account and switch between graphical interfaces Functions of each desktop element how to open applications and where to find extra help on KDE and GNOME Tricks for customizing the panel and the icons that reside on the panel Ways to resize windows and move them out of your way when they aren t needed 50 Hour 4 Finding a GUI An Open and Shut Case During the Linux Mandrake installation we suggested that you choose the option not to start the X Window system when the computer reboots into the Linux operating system If you followed along with us what you see after the system is rebooted is a bitmap pic ture of the Linux penguin cute little critter information about the Linux kernel so
199. e work If Microsoft Windows is installed on the same computer that you are going to install Linux Mandrake on you can use the tools in Windows to find out about your hardware If you have any manuals or books that came with your computer you can also find information there Even if you don t have the manuals you can probably download the information from the equipment maker s site During the installation you will find that Linux Mandrake is very good at probing and determining things about your hardware In many cases the proper choice will already be highlighted in the Installation program However there are times when the probes don t return accurate information and you have to enter the correct information manually For this reason it is very important to take the time to find out all you can about your equipment Preparing for the Installation 17 Checking System Properties in Microsoft Windows The easiest way to collect most of the information you need about the computer system is with the aid of Microsoft Windows You can view the list of system devices and make a note of them one by one but there is a more efficient method for collecting this infor mation Try these steps 1 Open the System Properties dialog box You can use one of two methods Right click on the My Computer icon and select the Properties command Or click on Start Settings Control Panel In the Control Panel double click on the System icon 2 Click on
200. e Fill tab to display the fill properties 5 Click the Gradient option button The gradient fill options appear on the right side of the dialog box 6 Click the Color button for the first color to display the Select Color dialog box shown in Figure 20 8 Killustrator 307 Set first color Set second color FIGURE 20 8 Choose two colors to Properties create a gradient fill info Outine Fill C solid r Gradient Fill fs Color Pattern Set a shape Create a gradient Gradient 500 P omu Ee Select colors Select Color System Colors nm nn m Custom Colors ok _ Cancel E i Jo fess Add to Custom Colors V fess B Jess Preview Help OK Cancel 7 Click a color in the System Colors section and click OK The color you chose will appear in the color bar for the first gradient color 8 Click the color button for the second color and select a color from the Select Color dialog box 9 Click the Style drop down list and set the shape for the gradient You ll see what the gradient will look like in the Preview window 10 When the gradient looks the way you want click OK The gradient color and style are applied to the selected object Adding Text to a Drawing It has been said that a picture is worth a thousand words but then again one cannot live by pictures alone It is a simple process to add text to your drawing First select
201. e as possible but no warranty or fitness is implied The information provided is on an as is basis The authors and the publisher shall have neither liability nor responsibility to any person or entity with respect to any loss or damages aris ing from the information contained in this book or from the use of the CD or programs accompanying it ASSOCIATE PUBLISHER Mark Taber Acquisitions EDITOR Neil Rowe DEVELOPMENT EDITOR Tony Amico MANAGING EDITOR Lisa Wilson PROJECT EDITOR Dawn Pearson Copy EDITOR Kezia Endsley INDEXER Greg Pearson PROOFREADER Katherin Bidwell TECHNICAL EDITOR Jim Westveer TEAM COORDINATOR Karen Opal MEDIA DEVELOPER Dan Scherf INTERIOR DESIGNER Gary Adair Cover DESIGNER Aren Howell COPYWRITER Eric Borgert PRODUCTION Lisa England Steve Geiselman Brad Lenser Louis Porter Jr Contents at a Glance Introduction Part Installing Linux Mandrake Hour 1 Preparing for the Installation 2 Installing Linux Mandrake 3 Troubleshooting the Linux Mandrake Installation Part Il An Interface for All Occasions Hour 4 Living in a Graphical Workspace 5 Changing Your View of the Desktop Part Ill Understanding the Filesystem Hour 6 The Marvelous Mystical Filesystem Tour 7 System Administration Tasks 8 Backing Up the Filesystem 9 Managing Applications 10 Networking the Small Office Home Office Part IV Putting Linux Mandrake to Work Hour 11 Getting on the Internet 12 Document Processing w
202. e control how the layer can be used These buttons work as toggle switches If you can see the button icon the function is on If you can t see the button icon the function is off e The Visible button determines whether you can see the layer in the KIllustrator window Click the Visible button to hide the layer in the drawing The button icon will also disappear Click the Visible button a second time and the artwork on the layer will become part of the drawing again e The Editable button allows you to make changes to a layer When this button is off you cannot make any changes to any element on that layer e The Printable button decides whether a layer will be printed along with the rest of the drawing 7 When you are ready to draw on a layer select the layer from the Layers dialog box on which you want to create the shape and then move back to the KIllustrator window and begin drawing 8 Switch to another layer by clicking the layer and draw another picture 9 Hide the first layer on which you created an object You should only see the objects you drew on the second layer tool By using the Zoom tool you can magnify the part of the drawing with which you want to work The Zoom tool works very well when you need to see the fine print Another way to limit the amount of canvas that you see is to use the Zoom Z Killustrator 305 Colorizing Drawing Objects Earlier in this hour you learned how to selec
203. e d expression argument excludes files of type d You need the character to tell the shell that the is not a shell command but a negation for the find command e The print gt tmp backuplist weekly expression argument prints the list of A filenames in the tmp directory as backuplist weekly There is not time or room in this hour to go through all the uses of find You can get information about how to use GNU find from its man page It takes some practice to use it to its best advantage but it s well worth the time and effort Using the Backup Tools There are several good tools included in your Linux Mandrake distribution for backing up or archiving your files and directories This section covers the Linux command utilities 122 Hour 8 Working with tar gzip and cpio Once you have selected the files and directories you want to back up you can use the tar command to back them up directly to your backup media tar works with whatever media you have but it does not compress files The tar command also makes a multivol ume archive for use with small capacity media such as floppy disks or tapes The tar command has 49 options at last count that enable you to copy and restore from archives in various ways Tar is an acronym for tape archive and it was developed to make backups to tape media Its strengths include its capability to back up whole direc tory structures and restore them intact Its drawbacks include a lack of fault to
204. e directory If you don t see the new directory in the tree view or directory view click SS as the Rescan or Reload button Lesson 6 5 Moving a File to a Different Directory If you were using any of the Linux applications and created any files these files were automatically stored in your home directory Now that you have created one or more new directories for your files you can move some of them out of your home directory and into those subdirectories of your home directory which you created 1 Make sure that the subdirectory into which you want to move the file is displayed in the tree view easier to drag files from one window to another To open another Midnight Commander file manager window select File Open New Window In KFM it s File New Window More than one file manager window can be displayed at a time to make it Z 2 In the directory view click and hold the file you want to move Then drag the cursor to the directory where you want to move the file In Midnight Commander when you release the file it is moved to the selected directory KFM will display a menu and you will need to tell KFM whether you want to move or copy the file to the new directory Renaming Files and Directories From time to time you will want to rename files or directories to facilitate working with them This can be easily done Right click the file that you want to rename and select Properties from th
205. e file s access permissions The first group of three is the owner s permis sions the second group is the group permissions and the last group of three characters is the permissions for all other users In the way they are shown here the permissions are Read r or Write w or and eXecute x or The dash indicates that the permission is denied You ll learn more about file permissions more in Hour 7 System Administration Tasks The second column indicates the number of links there are to the file For a directory this number is the total of all the files in the directory plus two The third column is the name of the group that owns the file The fourth column is the name of the user who owns the file The fifth column is the size of the file in bytes The sixth column is the file s mdate or date of last modification The seventh column is the time when the last modification occurred in hours and minutes The eighth column is the name of the file 9 2 Hour 6 pe You learn about the directory information displayed here in more depth it O E during Hour 7 Changing Courses with the cd Command The cd command is used to change the directory in which you are working Think of this as being physically moved from one place in the filesystem to another When you want to change your current working directory to one of its subdirectories you use the relative filename For example if J
206. e files with your favorite Web browser or with a text editor such as WordPad You may find it useful to browse through these files before you get involved in the installation A N A 1 V aay 2 CNN N ay m p HOUR 2 Installing Linux Mandrake In this hour you finish the last pre installation tasks and install Linux Mandrake on your computer To get started you may need to make an installation boot disk if you don t already have one This installation boot disk starts the Linux Mandrake installation if your computer boots from the floppy drive There are several tools on the CD ROM that will create an installation boot disk We ll show you the old fashioned DOS method From there you ll need to do a little housekeeping so that the computer is cleaned up and ready for Linux Mandrake s visit Then you ll use DrakX to help load Linux Mandrake on your computer DrakX walks you through the Linux Mandrake installation It provides instructions for each screen in the installation process You may have heard some Linux installation horror stories DrakX makes it easy to follow this complicated installation process and helps you make installation choices by automatically detecting information about your computer system Even though DrakX simplifies the installation task you may still want to read this chapter and the Linux Mandrake Install Guide before you begin While you 22 Hour 2 are installing Linux on your co
207. e for creating greeting cards brochures and GIF and JPEG images The Gimp 289 The professional artist or photographer will require more from The Gimp in terms of the capability to handle large file sizes perform more complex image editing and prepare photos and graphics for the printing press If this is where you want to go with The Gimp you need at least a Pentium 200 with a minimum of 64MB RAM You may also want to have 500MB or more of free hard drive space If you have a Wacom graphics tablet that supports the Wacom IV or Wacom EA V protocols look for the Wacom XInput driver at ww lepied com xfree86 Scanning Photographs SANE an acronym for Scanner Access Now Easy is an application programming inter face which provides access to raster image scanner hardware With SANE you can cap ture images from flatbed and hand held scanners video and still cameras and frame grabbers Before you decide to hook up your scanner to your Linux system you should make sure that the SANE Scanner Access Now Easy interface is installed on your system To determine whether your scanner is compatible with Linux and The Gimp go to the SANE Backend Drivers Web page at www mostang com sane sane backends html This page lists the drivers that are supported by SANE and the hardware with which the drivers work You ll find that most of the scanners on this list use a SCSI interface There are SANE drivers that can operate digital came
208. e for tar Backing Up the Filesystem 123 Once you have your archive tar d you can compress it with the gzip utility The resul tant tgz file will be much smaller However there are the same fault tolerance problems with gzip as there are with tar Most compression programs including gzip gunzip depend on having the data stored across an uninterrupted smooth array with no missing or bad blocks in order to be able to restore that data properly A Test your backup media to ensure that it doesn t contain any bad blocks or 10 sectors By taking the time to do this you won t find yourself unable to get EN gunzip to work and then be unable to use tar to open the archive There is another archiving utility included in your Linux distribution that helps you avoid some of the problems associated with tar cpio The cpio utility provides a solu tion to one of the problems with tar The problem stems from the way that tar stores backups The tar archive is stored as a single file which means that if the archive file is corrupted in any way tar has no way to access any of the files contained inside The cpio utility archives files together like tar does but it uses a simpler method to store them and can recover from data corruption It can copy the files in and out of both cpio archives and tar archives But cpio still doesn t really recover well from damaged gzipped files though Working with the Dump Utility
209. e last chance and loaded Linux Mandrake to see whether we could use it as a GNU Linux machine It has run for months now without a glitch we ve returned it to service again as a Web graphics workstation Installing Linux Mandrake on a Separate Hard Drive Installing Linux Mandrake on its own hard drive offers several advantages You can operate your computer as a dual boot machine without having to do anything to any other hard drive on the system or having to make room on the Linux drive for any other operating system files Since Linux Mandrake is small it fits comfortably along with its application software on a 1 6GB hard drive with room to spare Yes one of those old hard drives from yesteryear will work just fine for GNU Linux Running Windows and Linux Mandrake Together This is the most complex of the methods for installing Linux Mandrake It is more complex because it involves altering a single hard drive to allow it to contain different 12 Hour 1 operating systems Since the advent of large format hard drives above 2GB most com puter manufacturers install a single large format hard drive in the machines that they build In order to install Linux Mandrake on one of these machines this large drive must be partitioned to make room for Linux files During the Linux Mandrake installation the Mandrake automated setup tool DrakX guides you through the job of partitioning re sizing and formatting the hard drive with graphical a
210. e menu In the Properties dialog box type a new name for the file or 100 Hour 6 directory in the File Name text box see Figure 6 4 When you ve done this click OK and you ll see the file with the new name in the file manager FIGURE 6 4 practice Properties Both files and directo Statistics Options Permissions ries can be renamed A from the Properties dial b Full Name home Joe practice poe File Nane practed Edit File Name text TYPEERT TE box File Size 0 bytes File Created on Tue Nov 09 1999 02 40 50 PM Last Modified on Tue Nov 09 1999 02 40 50 PM Last Accessed on Tue Nov 09 1999 10 02 14 PM oK X Cancel Deleting Files and Directories You will need to delete files and directories from time to time The process is a simple operation but you must make sure that the directories that you want to delete are empty Linux won t delete directories that have anything in them To delete a file or directory right click the file or directory and select Delete from the menu that appears The file or directory will magically disappear from the file manager Remember that anything you delete in Linux is gone immediately You can aD a not get it back so be careful about what you delete If you are using KFM D you may want to move the file to the trash instead Summary It s been another long hour but you know more about how the Linux filesystem is orga nized and how y
211. e number of lines specified Let s pretend you want to move the cursor down five lines You use the command Ctrl U 5 Ctr1 N As you type this key combination you ll see the command in the minibuffer To move forward in the text by eight sentences for example you use Ctrl U 8 Alt E If there is no response to a command or the command is taking too long to E A execute type the command Ctr1 G You can also use Ctr1 G to discard a D command that you do not want to finish Editing Text When you are trying to organize text in a document you ll probably move things around a lot before you re satisfied with the final result Emacs uses the good old cut and paste method better known in the UNIX world as kill and yank New TERM When you want to move a block of text first select the text with the mouse Then click Edit Cut or for you keyboard fans use the command Ctr1 w Then position the cursor where you want to insert the text and select Edit Paste Table 16 4 lists other editing commands that you can use to rearrange your words cations select the text and click Edit Cut The text can be pasted to another If you want to place text on the X clipboard perhaps to use it in other appli A place in Emacs or into another application Text Processing with Emacs 257 TABLE 16 4 Edit Commands To Perform this Edit Use this Key Combination Delete one character to the left Delete Delet
212. e one character to the right Ctrl D Cut kill word to the left of cursor Alt Delete Cut one word to the right of cursor Alt D Cut from cursor to end of line Ctrl K Cut from cursor to end of sentence Alt K Cut a specified number of lines Ctrl U number Ctrl K Paste yank deleted text Ctrl Y Undo edit Ctr1 X U To display a help file for a command use Ctr1 H K command If you want to know more about the Yank command use Ctr1 H F Ctri y For general A help use the Ctr1 H Ctr1 H command Enhancing a Document After you have entered and organized the text in the file it s time to format the text You can apply bold and italic text formatting change paragraph alignment and make other formatting changes from the menus or you can use a number of formatting commands Before you can perform any formatting commands text or paragraphs must be selected You can select a paragraph by placing the cursor inside the paragraph To select text click and hold at the beginning of the text and drag to the end of the text Another way to select a block of text is to place the cursor at the beginning of the text and press Ctr1 Spacebar This sets a Mark in the document Then hold down the Shift key while you use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the end of the block of text Once the block of text is selected you can perform the command such as making the block of text bold To change formatted text back to the default text style
213. e packages you want to install 136 Hour 9 6 Click the Install button A status dialog box appears while the package is being installed When the installation is complete you are returned to the Install window If any other packages are required in order to make the selected packages work correctly a Dependency Problems dialog box will appear To install Let these dependencies click the No button select the required packages and try the installation again 7 When you are finished installing applications click the Close button to return to Gnome RPM Downloading Packages from the Internet Of course there are many applications that are not included in the Linux Mandrake distri bution Many are available from the Linux sites on the Internet It is Linux after all so any distribution site is fair game It pays also to make regular visits to the sites of the dif ferent distributions to see what s available and changed there Linux is growing so rapidly that new things are appearing almost daily It is a good idea to regularly look around the Internet at the various Linux sites and mirrors The mirrors often have tools in their pub directories that are not available on all sites In this way you can keep your applications upgraded as well as acquire new ones Lesson 9 4 Using KPackage to Install Applications Downloading and installing Linux software from the Internet is easier than you may think If you c
214. e the second username Continue until you have all the members you want in the group 5 Click the directories tab and in the Home base directory text box type the path name for the directory in which the group will store their files Don t worry if the directory does not exist Linuxconf will create the directory for you with the appropriate permissions 6 Click the Accept button The Group specification window disappears and the mem bers that you added appear next to the group name in the User groups window as seen in Figure 7 8 FIGURE 7 8 You can edit add or delete groups Once a group is cre Select Add to add a new definition ated users can begin Group io alternate members sharing files and direc Garden 508 henry bantam itchy New group Joe 506 tories adm 4 root adm Paemon audio 65 author 501 i fea ene Users assigned to the group betty 503 bin 1 root bin daemon cdrom 62 cdwriters 64 console 101 daemon 2 root bin daemon dip 40 6 t ee i Quit Add Help If you need to change users assigned to the group click the group name in z the User groups window Sharing Files with a Group of Users A very effective way to organize people working on a project and enable them to share their work is to form a workgroup with all the members of the project This permits the workgroup to share access to files created by the group members The group member who c
215. eate animation AA Be sure to use the Window menu at the top left corner to close any XMRM GR windows that are open while the program is running If you click the close g g IT y D button in the upper right corner of any of the XMRM windows the whole program will close Going Hollywood If you have a video camera you may have an interest in digitizing your home videos sprucing them up a bit and preparing them for your Web site Digitizing video is a great way to keep in contact with friends and family and to showcase your products to poten tial customers 322 Hour 21 One of the areas where Linux is just now making headway is in the field of video pro duction One of the best sources for Linux video techniques is the Video for Linux resource at www exploits org v41 Here you ll find information on TV cards radio cards and QuickCam drivers that are compatible with Linux Linux Media Labs LLC linuxmedialabs com sells a video capture card for the Linux operating system This video capture card is bundled with MainActor www mainactor com a multimedia creation package that contains a timeline based video sequencer and an animation program You may also want to check out their GNU Linux Video Capture Editing Playback MPEG project at linuxmedialabs com linuxvideo html Here are a few good places to start if you want to learn more about video editing e LinuxPower org has a series of articles on making movies with Linux The
216. eb page There are four HTML tags that are required for all Web pages the lt HTML gt tag the lt HEAD gt tag the lt TITLE gt tag and the lt BODY gt tag The lt HTML gt tag indi cates that the file uses the HTML language The lt HEAD gt tag encloses the header information for the file The lt TITLE gt tag is the most common tag you will find within the lt HEAD gt tag The lt TITLE gt tag displays the title of the Web page in the title bar of the Web browser used to view the page The lt BODY gt tag encloses the content of the Web page Each HTML tag is enclosed by brackets and needs a beginning and ending tag The beginning tag turns a feature on and the ending tag turns a feature off For example to tell a browser that the text that follows is a title use the tag lt TITLE gt Then at the end of the title text you need to tell the Web browser that it has read the end of the title so you use the lt TITLE gt tag Answers 365 Hour 15 Quiz 1 What is the difference between a local printer and a network printer A local printer is attached to a single workstation and only the workstation can print to the printer Network printers are not usually attached to any workstation They are attached to the network with a network interface card and a cable Any user logged into the network with the proper permissions can access a network printer 2 What are some of the more popular printers supported by Linux Hewlet
217. ectories from your user home directory N v rmdir directory where directory is the name of the directory you want to delete If the directory is not empty you ll see a message that says rmdir lt directory gt Directory not empty This is an interesting message because it is about as close as Linux gets to a safety fea ture or warning message No files will be removed and the directory will be left in place A you need to manually delete the files first The Marvelous Mystical Filesystem Tour 95 Getting Started with Graphical File Managers There are two graphical file managers that you can find easily If you are using the KDE graphical interface the default file manager is KFM For GNOME you ll work with the GNU Midnight Commander The file manager is one of the windows that opens automat ically when you log into the graphical interface If the file manager does not appear on your desktop you ll find an icon on the KDE and GNOME panels or in the main menu it s either the Home Directory or File Manager selection There may also be an icon on the desktop that will open the file manager The KFM and Midnight Commander file managers are graphical user interfaces for the Linux filesystem Unlike the command line which you used earlier file managers allow you to see what you are doing in the filesystem You ll find similarities between these file managers and file managers for other operating systems KFM and Midnight Commande
218. ecutable files 86 graphic files importing into KIllustrator 309 importing Screem 230 karaoke files playing 341 KlIllustrator files saving 300 301 MIDI files listening to 341 343 moving between directories 99 moving to DOS partitions 125 MPEG files playing 343 opening Emacs 250 252 renaming 99 restoring from KDE trash 101 saving Emacs 251 selecting graphical file man agers 97 98 sharing with groups of users 112 114 system data files 86 transferring across the Internet with gFTP utility 175 176 types 86 user data files 86 video files playing 342 WAV files listening to 340 343 XF86Config file 35 filesystem 86 89 directories 86 89 changing current working directory 92 93 contents viewing 90 91 creating 93 94 98 deleting 94 100 filenames 88 89 92 home directory 89 names 87 renaming 99 root directories 87 slash character 87 subdirectories 87 88 working directory 90 file commands 90 93 file types 86 graphical file managers 95 98 directories deleting 100 directories renaming 99 directory views 96 97 files deleting 100 files moving between directories 99 files renaming 99 selecting files 97 98 subdirectories creating 98 filing systems 26 fill colors KIllustrator 305 307 filters selecting files graphical file managers 98 find command backing up files 120 121 Find File utility 101 finding games on the Internet 351 352 insta
219. ed you can edit the transaction Accept the transaction when you are ready to move on to the next one 4 How do you make sure that your records and the bank statement agree When the bank statement arrives reconcile the account You do this by opening the appropriate account and clicking the Balance button Then check off each transac 364 Appendix A tion that is listed on the bank statement Hopefully the ending balance that CBB comes up with will be the same as the ending balance on the bank statement If not you ll need to run a few reports to find the discrepancy Hour 14 Quiz 1 What is a druid A druid provides an automated way to help you perform a task A druid walks you step by step through the building of your Web site and Web pages The druid asks questions to which you provide answers and at the end of the process the requested task has been completed For those people who are coming to Linux from the Windows operating system a druid is the same critter as a wizard 2 Name two ways in which a druid can make your life easier The two tasks that druids perform that make Web site creation a bit easier are cre ating the foundation for your Web site and adding pages to your site There are also a few wizards located on the toolbar that make it easy to add images to a Web page create hyperlinks design tables and upload your Web site to your ISP s Web server 3 Which HTML tags provide the basic structure of a W
220. ediumvioletred maroon palevioletred lightpink ink Choose color liahtcoral ja XEmacs Colors s e Edit properties command Type color name Display color list Your next step is to select the text to which you want to apply a color and decide whether you want to use a foreground color or a background color Now go back to the Edit Text Properties menu and select either Foreground Color or Background Color The final menu that appears does not list any colors it only lists an Other option When you select Other you are prompted to type a color name in the buffer Here s where the Color buffer comes in handy Scroll through the list until you see a color and then type the name in the buffer When you press Enter the color will be applied to the text The next time you go back to the Foreground Color and Background Color menus col ors that you ve selected previously appear in the list To reuse a color select the color from the menu instead of typing the color name in the buffer Creating an Outline The most important tool used by writers is the outline An outline helps you arrange your thoughts about a subject in a logical order It also shows the relevance of one topic in relation to the other topics Outlines aren t just necessary for lengthy manuscripts such as this book You ll find it much easier to write a short term paper a research report or a memo to the boss if you start with an outline Text Proces
221. eed the file named povlinux tgz user manual M Go to ww povray org ftp pub povray Official Docs to find the POV Ray Si Another familiar 3D program that runs under the Windows operating system is RenderMan The equivalent to RenderMan in the Linux world is the collection of Blue Moon Rendering Tools you ll find them at ww bmrt org The Blue Moon Rendering Tools are programs that support ray tracing radiosity light sources texture mapping shading motion blur shadows and depth of field Another program that meets the RenderMan specification is GNU GMAN GNU GMAN supports zbuffer radiosity ray tracking and motion blur You find GNU GMAN at www 2ad com gman A Hardware requirements for GNU GMAN are a Pentium 200MHz computer T with 64MB of RAM It will still run on a lesser computer but the perfor La mance may be slow 318 Hour 21 If you d like to learn more about creating 3D images on your Linux computer test out these Web sites e 3D Linux dot Org at ww 3dlinux org is a great place to keep up to date on 3D news for Linux e Linux 3D at linux3d netpedia net contains a long list of 3D environments ren derers modelers and other tools that work with the Linux operating system e The Linux 3D site at glide xxedgexx com lists the hardware and software needed to create 3D images on Linux systems It also contains a comprehensive list of 3D references e An interesting e zine is
222. eeeeaes 237 Sending Faxes from Your Computer 7 Getting Started swith K VOICE sssri dninni i a EA a R Creating a Kvoice Fax JOD cuscescia NEEN Part V The Beginner s Guide to Emacs 243 Hour 16 Text Processing with Emacs Getiing Started with HM acs rperonner KE rE EEN Starting XEmacs Switching Between Multiple Buffers Working With Fil Sisoridae ei T a e E a Working in Enriched Text Mode ececeseeseeseeseesecseeseceeeeececeeeeseeeeeaeeaseaeeaeeaeeas Mite Pi VERE sses koristena E erte EENE E A cvs caneesessag tes tosteceteaastens Moving Around a Document cceceeceeeeseeseeseeseeseeseeaeeaeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeaeenes Edite Text ieia E E TE A E yd Enhancing a Document OLAS VEN zasitio cu scece deeves Se vevensscecapecetededevaea 2evuradscosens E tees Formatting Para gtaphisyiccs scssacsc ecessusitecsssonsaesdessssecencoatveavasensaatbasdsigecdansasgacgece Addins Color toa DOCUMENE rsrs Creating am QUN Esaoe a a E ENE Hour 17 The Emacs Help System 265 Reading the Linux man Pages s siissvescsiiwes sescedsonseveassesanstvassunssaveeeseaienssstanse st vonevnce 266 Using the Texinfo Documentation System erssnincannis neioii 266 Displaying Command Documentation 000 cece eseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeeees 268 Introducing Lisp Functions UMUMALY ses sississssscesssassonsesssnscvtch eens dubanssessentesesscests oxess cenesnsoneseasnscocevesossscooavsntes OBA E A A nines acini E E E xii Hour 18
223. een asks whether you want to Install a new Linux Mandrake system or upgrade an existing one There are a few considerations here You can update another Linux Mandrake version that you have installed on your computer But it s a tedious task that may require some previous knowledge of Linux operating system files and dependencies You cannot use Linux Mandrake at all to upgrade any other Linux distributions you may have installed Your best bet is to install from scratch Luckily installing Linux Mandrake from the CD is pretty straightforward so we are going to do it that way Click the Install button Choose Your Keyboard The next screen asks about your keyboard This choice is made automatically from the language selection Typically if you choose English the US keyboard will be selected Highlight the type you have To make this easier the choice for the US QWERTY key board is already highlighted But if you re French perhaps you might prefer the FR AZERTY keyboard If this is the case scroll down the list to the FR AZERTY keyboard and click to highlight it as the choice Then click the OK button 26 Hour 2 Setup Filesystems The DrakX setup tool wants you to provide some information about how you want the drive to be partitioned and where the filesystems will be mounted on the hard drive If you are installing onto a Windows drive the DrakX screen will display a graphical repre sentation of the device hda for the first IDE h
224. elcome to Civilization Call To Power install dialog box appears on the screen see Figure 24 5 zM f If you later decide you do not want this game on your computer mount the as CD ROM drive display the setup window and click the Uninstall button Figure 24 5 Welcome to Civilization Call To Power Select a mount point Install size 355 MB _1 Install videos 217 MB that contains plenty of free space Mount Point Available MB z 427 home 386 ont edrdm 0 Z The gafe will be unpacked into a subdirectory CivCTP usr local games Install Install To Hard disk space needed for program Ces Select install location Start the installation 5 Click the mount point where you want to install the program 6 If you have enough space on your computer you can install the display videos on your hard drive by selecting the Install videos option If you don t have enough space don t select this option Instead you ll need to mount the Civilization CD ROM when you play the game The program will play the videos from the CD ROM 7 Click the Install button The installation process will begin as seen in Figure 24 6 As the installation progresses you ll see the status at the upper left corner and a status bar along the bottom of the window You can also read the call outs on the graphics for some technical details about the game pieces Games 351 FIGURE 24 6
225. elimiting characters in a table of infor mation such as the table of contents of a book The following code shows the syntax for repeating a single character multiples times in sequence in text Ctrl U number character Ctrl U is the command that tells XEmacs that you will be using a numeric argument number is the number of times you want to insert the character and character is the key on the keyboard that you want to appear in the text For example the command Ctrl U 12 would produce Text Processing with Emacs 255 Moving Around a Document Emacs uses two methods to move around text in a buffer window First there is the mouse keyboard method You can use the familiar mouse to work the scrollbar and to move the cursor to a different position There are also a few keys on the keyboard that move the cursor around the arrow keys Page Up Page Down Home and End The other method involves typing commands This isn t as hard as you think Cursor commands involve holding either the Ctrl key or the Alt key while pressing another key on the keyboard Table 16 3 lists some common commands that you can use to move the cursor around in a buffer window It s also a good idea to learn these cursor commands if you want to become a more advanced user of Emacs In the Linux world the Alt key on a PC keyboard is referred to as the Meta key The Meta key terminology is a holdover from the UNIX world Not all types of computer sys
226. embler The Binary File Descriptor library The GNU binary utilities ar objcopy objdump nm nlmconv size strings strip and ranlib GNU file utilities Listing and operating on files that match certain criteria Info Narrow L23 Top File utilities fileutils i Finding Files find Info dir Top The topics are listed in bold along the left When you hold the mouse over a topic it is highlighted To view the documentation for a topic middle click or click the right and left mouse buttons simultaneously the topic Figure 17 3 shows the Info page for the tar command Zz If you d like to learn more about Info use the Ctr1 H I H command to dis play the Info Getting Started manual Figure 17 3 You can navigate through Info pages much like you navigate Web pages Select a menu topic Ese emacs localhost Jocaldomain Ejoj x Buffers Files Tools Edit Search Mule Info Help ile tar info Node Top Next Introduction Prev dir Up dir Menu The Detailed Node Listing Introduction What this Book Contains Some Definitions What tar Does How tar Archives are Named Info Narrow Li Top Naning tar Archives 22 Info tar Top Return to the Directory node 2 6 7 268 Hour 17 Each Info file contains a menu that you can use to move around i
227. er Servers components of each workstation attached to the network Basic Information Type of Processor Operating System Type of Monitor Mouse MB of RAM Installed BIOS Manufacturer Disk Drives lard Disk Drive Type of drive Type of controller Drive capacity loppy Disk Drives Drive A Drive B Other Additional Drives Type Manufacturer BAUD rate COM port Network Card Configuration Node Address Sound Card Manufacturer Configuration Other Information Networking the Small Office Home Office 149 Collecting Printer Information You need to collect information about all the printers and their optional equipment like envelope adapters or other attachments that are attached to the network or to individual workstations You need this information to configure software applications for users and to set up the network print system Figure 10 2 shows an example worksheet that can help you collect this information Figure 10 2 Collect printer infor mation so that printers can be configured on the network correctly Printer Information Worksheet Name of Printer Location of the Printer Basic Information Type of Printer Manufacturer Model Number Serial Number Emulation Mode Printer RAM Connection Port Parallel Serial Port Connected to System Connected to LAN Connection ID Protocol Queue Name Other Information Putting Together a Network Diagram You need more than a simple
228. eruser account Manage archives Display all the running processes Create a file or change its timestamp Unmount un access a filesystem Display information about the system Extract compressed files Build the locate database Display how long the computer has run Add user accounts Delete user accounts Modify user accounts Use commands by reading a brief overview of commands Locate a command binary source and man page Display the executable path for a program Display a list of users who are logged into the network Display the name of the current user Finding Help on the Internet There are many sources of information about Linux on the Internet and more are appear ing every day The list that follows describes some of the more useful ones Troubleshooting the Linux Mandrake Installation 45 The Linux Frequently Asked Questions list FAQ This FAQ is maintained by Robert Kiesling he can be contacted at Kiesling ix netcom com The Linux HOWTO Index Contains a collection of HOWTO documents each describing in detail different aspects of Linux The person currently maintaining the HOWTO files can be reached at linux howto metalab unc edu The Linux META FAQ This is a good starting point for new users looking on the Internet for Linux information It is maintained by Michael K Johnson He can be reached at johnsonm redhat com The Linux Info Sheet This is a technical introduction to the Linux system It also lists
229. eryone from the budding artist to the graphics professional will find the tools they need to create spectacular artwork in The Gimp There is so much that you can do with The Gimp that we can barely touch the surface of this cool graphics tool in just an hour But what we can do is help you set up your computer system so that you can use The Gimp accord ing to your needs as well as show you a few photo editing tricks To help you get started with The Gimp you learn the following during this hour e Hardware requirements for running The Gimp and where to get help using scanners and graphics tablets e How to work with the brushes and paints in The Gimp s toolbox e A few tips and pointers for enhancing photographs and performing quick touch ups 288 Hour 19 Getting Ready for an Art Adventure Before you begin exploring The Gimp you may want to sit down and decide how you plan to use it Do you want to create simple illustrations for use in a report or term paper Do you want to create images for your Web site Do you just want to make your photographs look better Are you a starving artist in need of a high end graphics applica tion that will run on your low end workstation Depending on your needs take a look at how much computer power you will need in order to run The Gimp efficiently You can also use scanners digital cameras and graph ics tablets in your quest for better art But before you hook up your scanner to your Li
230. ey amp amp index html Double click to display page Type text HTML tags added Building a Web Site with Screem You can also select an HTML tag before you type the text When you do this the begin ning and ending tags appear and the cursor will be located between the tags You can then type the text Z Si click the Preview tag or cl If you want to see how the page will look in a Web browser you can either ick the View button Hyperlinking to the Wired World Hyperlinks are the transportation carrier of the Internet Hyperlinks take your visitors from page to page within your Web site direct visitors to Web sites outside your own and make it easy for visitors to communicate with you There are several ways to create a hyperlink You can just type the code in the Editor You can use the Tag tree to help you out Or make life easy and start the Link Wizard You can get to the Link Wizard shown in Figure 14 7 by either clicking the Link Wizard button on the toolbar or by selecting Insert Link Start the Link Wizard FIGURE 14 7 Select the type of hyperlink you want to Eile Edit Ins O Bile r CVS Settings Help The finished hyperlink GR create and provide the Lists Tables Et Links Wizard with the link information PBASE LINK Objects Site a t H index html Close the Wizard Editor Preview Link
231. f margin notes Margin notes are similar to footnotes These additional tidbits A of information appear next to the paragraph instead at the bottom of the page or at the end of the book To create a margin note place the cursor at the end of the paragraph to which the note is associated and click the Insert Margin Note button or Insert Margin Note from the menu Lesson 12 4 Customizing a Single Paragraph There may be times when you need one paragraph in the document to look different from other paragraphs You may want to change a left justified paragraph to a paragraph that is centered on the page Some paragraphs may require more space above and below the paragraph Other paragraphs can require a special font to emphasize the paragraph To make paragraphs stand out even more draw a border around the entire paragraph or maybe just a line over the top will do In this lesson you change the look of a single paragraph 1 Select the paragraph that you want to format You do not need to highlight the entire paragraph you can just place the cursor in the paragraph 2 Click Layout Paragraph to open the Paragraph Environment dialog box shown in Figure 12 6 Document Processing with KLyX 193 Change paragraph Add a border Indent paragraph alignment from left margin FIGURE 12 6 Als aragraph Environment r Alignment Lines Pagebreaks _ Change the look of a C Bight C Left I Above I Abo
232. f the cursor was located in the new file it will move to the tutorial file Use the Ctr1 X 0 com mand to move back to the new file As the cursor moves between windows it remembers its last location in the window and will return to that location when you switch back to the window 4 If you want to work in one window to add or edit text and scroll through the other window to read the information in the file use the Esc Ctrl V command to scroll the inactive window You can only go forward not backward through the other window Or you can just use the mouse and drag the scrollbar 5 To close a split window place the cursor in the window you want to close and then use the command Ctr1 X This command leaves all other windows open Saving Files After you ve created a new file or made changes to a file in a buffer you need to save the changes When you want to save the contents of the buffer to the actual file select File Save FILENAME from the menu or use the Ctr1 X Ctr1 S command The minibuffer will display a message that looks something like Wrote home user filename When you want to save the contents of the buffer to a different file you need to save the file under a new name From the menu select File Save As or use the Ctr1 X Ctr1 W command You need to specify the directory in which you want to save the file and a file name 4G To verify that your changes have been saved look at the first four chara
233. face and a few added applications Even though it is easier to work with the XEmacs menus and toolbars this hour shows you how to move around XEmacs using standard Emacs commands You ll want to memorize these commands for a few reasons You can easily use Emacs on different operating systems if you know the commands By using the commands introduced during this hour you ll have a basis for understanding other Emacs com mands that you may come across in the future And if you like to spend more time on the keyboard and less time with the mouse the commands consist of just a few key strokes Starting XEmacs There are several flavors of Emacs found on the Linux Mandrake CD We ll start with XEmacs because it is installed by default But you can still follow along during this hour if you wish to use the GNU Emacs version or the Emacs for X Windows version If you can t find Emacs in the GNOME or KDE menus type emacs from an X terminal If XEmacs was automatically installed on your system use Table 16 1 to get started TABLE 16 1 Locating XEmacs When Starting From Here Use This Method GNOME Main Menu Move the mouse pointer to Editors XEmacs KDE Application Starter Click on Applications X Emacs X terminal window Type xemacs and press Enter Text Processing with Emacs 247 When XEmacs first opens on your screen as shown in Figure 16 1 you see the splash screen that shows the version of XEmacs you are using and some com
234. face button for the PPP connection The Status button will turn red A Don t click the Status button when you want to disconnect Your connection g won t disconnect properly j D Now that you have a connection to the Internet you can skip the next section on using Kppp and get right to the fun stuff like surfing the Web and downloading cool stuff Or if you don t like this method you can delete the PPP connection in Linuxconf and give the Kppp dialer a try Using Kppp After working with Linuxconf and UserNet you may find that you want a different approach to configuring an Internet connection Or you may not want all user accounts to have access to the same Internet account Maybe some users don t need Internet access Then again maybe you just want a dialer that looks like the dialer found in dear old Windows Getting on the Internet 167 Your alternative is the Kppp dialer The Kppp dialer is set up individually for each user account There s no Internet account sharing going on here and you needn t be a root user to make the connection As an added attraction the Kppp dialer contains tools that measure the time spent online and amount of data transferred for each session To begin you ll need to open the Kppp dialer and you ll find directions in Table 11 3 TABLE 11 3 Locating the Kppp Dialer From Here Take This Route KDE menu Go to Internet Kppp X terminal window Type kppp and press Enter When the Kp
235. fbar at the bottom ore 7 Check out the help forfthis screen It is an administration and introduction to Linuxconf configuration tasks cong Conia Networking Users accounts Setting up a PPP connection using the Network Configurator is a two step process You ll first need to tell Linuxconf how you connect to the Internet that is phone num ber username and password and modem This is found by clicking the PPP SLIP PLIP button Then you ll need to supply the name server information supplied by your Internet service provider by clicking the Name server specification DNS button Just follow the instructions in each of the windows or skate along with the steps in the next lesson Getting on the Internet 163 Lesson 11 1 Setting Up an Internet Connection with Linuxconf Before you begin this lesson make sure you have all the information supplied by your ISP your modem is connected to the computer and the power is turned on Then follow these steps 1 Click the PPP SLIP PLIP button at the bottom of the Client tasks tab on the Network configurator window This opens the PPP SLIP PLIP Configurations dialog box 2 Click the Add button to open the Type of Interface dialog box 3 Select the PPP option and click Accept The PPP interface panel for the connection you are creating will appear see Figure 11 2 Add a new connection Choose PPP Type access inform
236. fileyhome gander The GIMP Q Cd i 4 file mome gander File Edit View Go Bookmarks Options Help tT fy o Location file home gantor 1 KDE World Wide Watch SYA Gimp A T T T 00 00 06 00 12 00 18 00 Local time 02 14 00 08 07 23 GMT Time 02 14 00 18 07 23 Panel icons Virtual desktop KDE Help browser icons FIGURE 4 4 mE Emei The GNOME desktop File Window Settings Help looks pretty good but n E E is ot 2 will look better with De some customization fomefgancer Desktop icons Edit Settings Layout Commands Help fat so amp gi B Rescan Home Icons Brief Detailed Custom Pager Gboot dev E Virtual desktop icons 04FIG01 R pcx 14FIG02R pcx 14FIG03R pex Panel icons GNOME Help browser eee 14FIGO4A pex Main menu PFS all files all files Panel le Saal ENIG Mon Feb 4 Gnome Help Browser 8 27 AM 56 Hour 4 There is also a hidden menu in GNOME Click the GNOME desktop to display the Enlightenment menu system You will find that all of the same user menus from GNOME and KDE are displayed and you can start applications from the Enlightenment menu if you want Right click the GNOME desktop to display the Enlightenment Settings menu This menu gives you access to the Enlightenment window manager s configuration dialogs and editor which we talk about later in this chapter e Panel icons offer a shortcut method for openi
237. for installing Linux Mandrake You found out where to obtain needed information to ensure that Linux supports your hardware components You learned where sources of information about your computer and components could be found and what specific installation tasks need to be done to load Linux Mandrake on your computer in three different ways Q amp A Q Id like to learn more about Linux Mandrake before I begin the installation Where can I go A You should start with the Linux Mandrake home page at www linux mandrake com and Macmillan Software support at mcpsupport linuxcare com Other good sources of information are InformIT at ww informit com and MandrakeUser Org at www mandrakeuser org If you lurk the Usenet newsgroups try alt os linux mandrake Q Are there any sources of information about GNU Linux for newbies on the Web A Try the beginners page at the Linux portal site Linux Links www linuxlinks com Beginners There are several links to information that is of interest to those just beginning with GNU Linux There are also some good tutorials at Linux Planet ww linuxplanet com linuxplanet tutorials 20 Hour 1 Q What is the easiest way to install Linux Mandrake on a computer A The easiest way is to use Linux Mandrake as the sole operating system The instal lation is easy because there is no second hard drive to set up and no resizing and non Linux partitions to create You just put the Linux Mandrake CD into the CD R
238. from level to level in the outline If you d rather use the commands you ll find the commands listed at the right of the menu The Hide menu will collapse the outline so that body text disappears or so that body text and lower outlines levels will disappear To bring these hidden items back into view use the Show menu Be sure to show the entire document before editing the outline If you delete a visible line all the following invisible or hidden lines will also be A 2 deleted G 10 2 6 1 262 Hour 16 Summary There you have it your first hour on the Emacs tour We hope you had a good time look ing around this most powerful program You ve just barely scratched the surface with Emacs You may want to go back and commit some of the Emacs commands that you ve learned to memory These commands make it easier to create files move around within a buffer and edit and format text You may also want to play around with split windows and frames Split windows and frames come in handy when you need to work with mul tiple files or as you ll find out over the next two hours windows and frames are great for working with multiple Emacs applications Q amp A Q How do I create split windows that are side by side not one on top of the other A Use the Ctr1 X 3 command Q I want to change the margins for my Emacs file How do I do this A You can t exactly change the margins but you ll cha
239. ght need We ll begin this magical tour with a close up look at the Linux file Linux sees everything as a file so it s important to know just what a Linux file is and how Linux sees it in the filesystem Next we ll look at the directory structure where the files are kept The Linux filesystem is organized like a tree much like the filesystems of DOS and UNIX where the first directory is the trunk and all of the other directories are branches of the tree We ll start by using the Linux command line to work with the filesystem and then we ll introduce you to some excellent graphical file managers During the next hour you learn how to get around the Linux filesystem by e Using the command line to view directories and move between direc tories e Creating subdirectories from the command line e Working with the Midnight Commander and KFM file managers 86 Hour 6 Exploring the Directory Structure A Linux file is a unique collection of information with a unique identification New TERM ba sige Zoi gt This identification filename is made up of the file s name and a location directory Linux can store many files in a single directory It can store directories inside other direc tories It can even store files with the same name but not in the same directory Linux files may contain many kinds of information As you begin to explore Linux you will learn a lot more about the different types of files and their vario
240. ghtforward method for customizing the placement of these buttons You won t find this feature in GNOME Experiment with moving a few window icons 1 Open the Control Center 2 Click the plus sign next to Windows to expand the list and then click Buttons to display the options for changing the placement of buttons 3 Select the position for each type of button As you click an option button you ll notice the change made in the sample title bar at the top of the dialog box e If you want a button to be located on the left side of the title bar click the Left option button e Click the Right option button to move the button to the right side of the title bar e When you don t need a button click the Off option button 4 When you are done making your changes click OK and then close the Control Center 64 Hour 4 Summary During the past hour you have worked through a number of exercises that built upon your present knowledge of graphical user interfaces and applied it to the KDE and GNOME interfaces When you started this lesson you may have already made the deci sion about which GUI you wanted to use If you haven t made a GUI choice work with both interfaces until you find your preference In this lesson you learned a few GUI basics and worked with the panel and a few windows In the next lesson you build upon these skills by customizing the desktop and learning how to work with multiple desktops Q amp
241. ging in 50 51 logging out 52 54 menus 56 network utilities 178 panel 58 60 64 printer icons creating 240 KDE Icon Editor 330 333 KDE Media Player 340 KDE MIDI and karaoke multi media player 341 KDE MIDI player 341 KDE MPEG audio player 343 KDE Web site 31 79 KDiskFree 116 Keyboard Type screen installa tion program 25 keytable daemon 14 KFM graphical file manager 95 directories 99 100 directory views 96 97 files 99 100 font size changing 101 selecting files 97 98 subdirectories creating 98 Killustrator 298 309 aligning objects 310 color picker 298 colorizing drawing objects 305 307 Create Polygon tool 310 Create Polyline tool 310 designing drawings 301 304 grids 301 302 layers 302 304 drawing tools 298 grids 301 302 helplines 310 importing graphic files 309 layers 302 304 polygons drawing 310 saving work 300 301 Select Mode tool 305 shapes arranging text around 308 309 color changing 305 306 drawing 299 300 text adding to drawings 307 309 arranging around shapes 308 309 toolbars moving 298 window 298 299 Zoom tool 304 KLyX 182 bulleted lists creating 194 195 character formatting 193 194 definition lists creating 195 description lists creating 195 document classes 184 185 documents checking spelling 200 201 closing 190 creating 183 188 189 design elements adding 197 editing 190 Encapsulated Postscript Image adding 198 199 f
242. grow If workgroups are organized carefully and can share resources communication and the enhanced working environment provided by networking your users will be more productive work processes will flow easier and the whole process will reflect positively on your organization s bottom line Network planning will stand or fall based on the network s ability to meet user needs and the future requirements for growth and expansion of the organization Future user demand may well be a difficult thing to assess but the organization s overall plans for growth are frequently documented in projections for production goals manpower needs and budgets Consider How the Network Will Be Used Determining how the network will be used and by whom is an integral part of deciding where to place peripherals such as printers and scanners network components and workstations Of course if your organization is small and you only have two computers this can be an easy job However if you have only one scanner one modem one CD writer but six printers two parallel port Zip drives and the second computer isn t in the same room well you can see the potential problems If you have a large group of people to consider and more machines and peripherals you will certainly see the potential for mayhem increase geometrically Maintaining control of the placement of users and equipment is central to the optimum utilization of the net work Your prime con
243. h and the following month From the menu select Apps Calendar 3 Month Calendar You can also use the Alt X calendar command The calendar will show in a buffer at the bottom of the frame like the one shown in Figure 18 1 You ll notice that the current date is highlighted FIGURE 18 1 emacs Calendar EIEE The Emacs calendar displays the current Sere Bovarszeene three months Scroll through the calendar to display other months XEmacs review doc Text Enriched All October 1999 November 1999 December 1999 U k Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa sk 23 1 2 3 4 5 BI i 7B 8 SE ANFO KEYS 345678 39 7 89101112 S 6 7 EPA bE 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 to select dates 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 28 29 3 29 30 28 29 30 G x lt Calendar info o other today Go to message Sat Nov 6 1999 C x gt Current date Change dates with commands If you want to display a different three month period you ll need to use the Ctr1 U Alt X calendar command The minibuffer will prompt you for a year the current year displays by default and you can edit this date and then a month Type the month that Time Management with Emacs 275 you want to view and press Enter You ll see the month you requested and the previous and following m
244. h to upgrades and new applications Obviously the first place you should look for more software is on the Linux Mandrake CD ROM Unless you elected to install every component during the initial installation there s still plenty of software on the CD for you to try In addition to the software on the Linux Mandrake CD you can also install packages from other Linux distributions For example if you have a Red Hat or Slackware distrib ution pop that CD into your CD drive and see what s available And since Linux was conceived and developed over the Internet every application that works with the Linux operating system is available on the Web All you need to do is find the package you want download it and install it Managing Applications 135 Finding Applications on the Linux Mandrake CD ROM The first place you should look for more software is on the Linux Mandrake CD Not only is it easy to find and load these applications but you also can be relatively sure that these packages will install correctly with Linux Mandrake No matter which Linux distribution CD you may use you ll find all the avail A able packages in the RPMS subdirectory of the CD ROM Lesson 9 3 Using Gnome RPM to Install Packages It s time to get out the Linux Mandrake CD once again and take a look at which pack ages you did not install when you loaded the Linux operating system on your computer To install application packages from the
245. hat IRC client X terminal window Type xchat and press Enter Two windows will open on your desktop the XChat Server List and the terminal win dow In the Server List window you ll need to fill in the information requested in the User info section You can use an anonymous name if you want The terminal window is where you will you type your messages and read the responses When you re ready to check out a chat room browse through the list of servers and their available chat rooms in the Server List see Figure 11 15 To see the chat rooms click the plus sign next to the server name Getting on the Internet 177 Provide an identity View list of servers Chat Server List Figure 11 15 Select from a number Nicknames jaimie jaimie_ of pre selected chat Realname jaimie Userhame fjaimie servers ChatJunkiesNet E X Chat US linux El X Chat IRC linux IRCNet DALNet EFNet GalaxyNet UnderNet OpenP tsNet Display chat rooms Ht ae i Select a room User info iaimie_ El irc acc umu se OtherNet AustNet Ozet e FoxChat Join the chat in re pa rogress l prog E Connect Connect New E New Server New Group Delete g Edit Skip MOTD _j Show channels After you ve looked through the list click on the chat room you want to enter and then click the Connect button The Server list wi
246. he connection That is it is not available to other users on the system 3 What are the different Internet activities that you can perform with Netscape Communicator 4 What is the fastest way to download files off the Internet Exercises 1 Plan a Net get together with friends and family who may live in other parts of the country or on the other side of the globe You can reserve a private room at an IRC server and give everyone a secret pass to get in the door Party hearty 2 There s more help than just the man pages and the help files found in the many applications packaged with Linux Mandrake You can download help documenta tion from a number of FTP sites You may want to learn more about some of the applications covered in this book by visiting any of a number of FTP sites Only watch out you may find volumes of information For example navigate to ftp gimp org and download the Gimp Manual It s 14MB but loaded with good advice and colorful pictures Look around and see how much help you can find A N A 1 N V aay 2 CNN N ay m i HOUR 1 2 Document Processing with KLyX There are a variety of text editors and word processors installed with Linux Mandrake One of the word processors that you may stumble across while browsing through the KDE and GNOME menus or while looking at the list of packages on the CD ROM with KPackage or Gnome RPM is KLyX KLyX works very well for short documents such as
247. he same hazards if only to a different degree Keep Dust Away from the Equipment Dust is one of the most serious enemies of electronic equipment Clogged cooling fan motors cause equipment to overheat Built up dust deposits on component surfaces can cause shortouts A thin layer of dust on disk surfaces will transfer to the read write heads in the drive and destroy them over time Don t Overheat the Network Components Excessive heat can freeze up disk drives and damage the media Overheated cooling fan motors fail and the result will be other components overheating and failing Excessive heat can cause other problems too processor errors memory chip errors and a shortened life span for network equipment Avoid Power Supply Problems Most electronic equipment is sensitive to fluctuations in the power supply The network server in particular must have a good source of clean power no drops or spikes You need to ensure that the network server is not connected to a power supply that is subject to fluctuations or additional loads or connected to the same circuit as other office equipment Even if your power supply seems to be perfect consider installing an Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS device These devices provide a bat tery back up power supply that usually lasts about 15 minutes and provides time to shut down the computer and other applications in an orderly manner Networking the Small Office Home Office 145 Unlike
248. his automatically It does give you more flexibility in how you listen to your CDs The song list is located on the CD player itself which makes selecting a song an easy task You can also shuffle the order in which songs play or you can play the CD over and over again until you turn it off Multimedia 339 FIGURE 23 2 F CD Prayer compact FAI Cbg Playing 01 08 13 Shuffle the song list for dce Uc ee l piara auoio No matching CDDB entry found Continuous play a little variety Download CD Shuffle Change display Select a song information songlist color and font to play Another easy to use CD player is the X Window CD player shown in Figure 23 3 No fancy bells and whistles here It s easy to play a selected song just click the track num ber along the bottom of the player You can also click the random shuffle button until you find a track order you like This player does not work with Internet CD databases but you can enter song information if you want Play Stop Shuffle song list FIGURE 23 3 B Played ox Use the CD album eit 4 o gt Continuous play cover to create your o P0020 KK f o _ gt 1 Playing ares own song list S Sae Select a song to play Af af 28 Sf 44 Sf 81 21 Bf 3f sof sf 1213 sa 51 61 fi gt Right click to create a song list Lesson 23 1 Looking Up CD Information on the Internet In this lesson you use the GNOME CD Player to d
249. hone and car pay ments how can you enter these recurring transactions quickly 4 How do you make sure that your records and the bank statement agree Checkbooks Gone Digital 219 Exercises 1 You may have noticed that your CBB window doesn t look the same as the example shown during this hour Try changing the look of the window by setting different dimensions To get started here s the path File Preferences Appearance Set Dimensions You ll need to save these preferences changes and restart the pro gram to see the effects 2 Quicken users can export their Quicken data and import it into CBB In Quicken select File Export and the account you want to use in CBB If you want to use more than one account you ll need to export each account separately Then trans fer the Quicken QIF file to your home directory in Linux and select File Import QIF File in CBB You might also want to try exporting your CBB files into Quicken 3 Use CBB to do some budgeting Start by running the Average Monthly Expenses by Category report This report shows you how you spend your income Take a look at the report to determine where you can reduce spending This is a good opportunity to start saving for that rainy day A N A 1 N V aay 2 CNN N ay m i HOUR 1 4 Building a Web Site with Screem Are you looking for a sophisticated Web page editing program that reminds you of the Web editors from your Windows and Ma
250. hree choices that you have are e Archive the account s data This method compresses the files left behind in the user s home directory into a single file This file is placed in the home directory with all the other user s home directories in a directory called oldaccounts e Delete the account s data Selecting this will remove all the contents of the user s home directory e Leave the account s data in place This option will remove the user from the user list but retain the user s home directory and its contents in place Working with Group Accounts When several users have a need to share the same files you ll want to place these users into a single group You can create many groups on the system and assign any combina tion of users to each group The important thing to remember is that all members of the group need to share the same group of files When users are assigned to a group and a group is given permission to access specific files and directories users can begin sharing files by visiting the directory in which the files are stored Creating New Groups The first step before you can enable file access between users is to form a group It isn t necessary for every user on the system to belong to a group only those people who need to have access to a group s files need to belong to that specific group Lesson 7 3 Assigning Users to a Group Before you create a group make sure that each person in the
251. html e The XMRM Manual page can be found at www cg tuwien ac at xmrm e To download the program with your favorite FTP utility go to ftp cg tuwien ac at pub linux xmrm and download the file named xmrm20_statuc tgz It is less than IMB If you use the KDE File manager you can right click the tgz file in the KDE File manager and select Archiver from the drop down menu Then use the Archiver utility to extract the files either to your home directory or in the usr directory Once the files are extracted click the XMRM icon in the file manager to start the XMRM program The XMRM main window shown in Figure 21 6 opens when you click the XMRM icon This main window displays five control panels When you installed XMRM a cou ple of samples files were also installed They are found in the Samples subdirectory where you installed XMRM The two files that you can play with are called morph prj and warp prj To open these files select File Load Project Morphing Is for Comedians 321 G Q This program will not run at 8 bit color You may also want to run a screen 103 resolution larger than 800x600 Number of frames for Calculate warp animation sequence and morph values FIGURE 21 6 MAIN CONTROLS Calculation Co trol Load a source and il i destination image to Ke j j nig Mode o begin morphing al 4 5 i Animation Control Load images L Use Wavelets e OE Save Control Cr
252. iar with the filesystem so that you can efficiently store your files Before you graduate to more file management tasks test your basic filing skills Quiz 1 What command tells you where you are currently working in the filesystem 2 Which command gives you a list of the contents of your working directory as well as detailed information about each item in the directory 3 What does a Linux filename consist of and how long can it be Exercises 1 Create a directory structure under your home directory in which to save your files You may want subdirectories for correspondence financial records and scanned photographs You may want to further divide subdirectories for example the corre spondence directory may have subdirectories for each of your pen pals or clients 2 In your quest to find out which user interface you prefer GNOME or KDE play around with the default file manager for each Midnight Commander for GNOME and KFM for KDE If you haven t decided on a GUI the difference in file managers will help you decide A N A 1 V aay 2 CNN N a A HOUR 7 System Administration Tasks Even if you are running Linux on a single computer you can still think of this single computer as a one machine network When several people have access to the same computer you can create user accounts so that each per son can set up the desktop to fit individual preferences and have a private place to store pers
253. icking the title bar again will restore the window top its former size When you re finished working with a window click the Close button But remember to save your work before you close an application window One way to keep your desktop uncluttered is to shade all the windows so that only the title bar shows Then when you want to work with a window Z unshade the window by double clicking the title bar Lesson 4 9 Changing the Window Focus Policy NEW TERM When you want to work with a window you normally click inside the window to make it active or in focus There are other methods of making a window active which are determined by the focus policy The focus policy settings determine which keyboard or mouse actions make a window active KDE and GNOME handle the focus policy differently Let s take a look at KDE first 1 Open the Control Center by clicking the Control Center icon on the panel or by selecting Application Starter KDE Control Center 2 Click the plus sign next to the Windows category to display a list of options 3 Click Properties to display a selection of window options 4 In the Focus policy section choose an option from the drop down list e If you want to make a window active by clicking inside the window choose the Click to focus option e If you want to use the mouse to determine which window is active select Focus follows mouse All you have to do is place the mouse over the window that you w
254. ids to help you make the right choices to fit your particular Linux installation If you want it to it can even automatically partition the drive for you Once this was a complex job and made the installation of Linux quite daunting to the newcomer The new DrakX installation program makes it a snap to install Linux Mandrake on just about any modern PC Selecting Applications to Install with Linux Mandrake When you begin your installation of Linux Mandrake you are given an option to choose one of three classes of installation e The Recommended option is for those who are brand new to Linux e The Customized option is for those familiar with Linux and who want to specify the types of application programs to be installed on the system e The Expert option is for the truly experienced and fluent GNU Linux guru and you know who you are It is strongly recommended that you accept the defaults when installing Linux Mandrake for the first time so if you decide to install something else later you can use Mandrake s tools to install other packages Choosing Installation Packages You are shown a list of package groups to be installed You can deselect package groups to configure your machine with the software you want but it is strongly suggested that you accept the defaults the first time through The package groups to be installed are listed in the installation program display and the recommended ones are already selected The appli
255. ies You ll then need to set the group who will have access to the files by displaying the Group drop down list and selecting the group who needs to have access to the files Gathering System Information Finding out something about your system is an integral part of getting anything new to fit in smoothly Information is available about the Linux Mandrake distribution you are running plus information about the system release version and the Linux kernel You can do this from your user account If you are using the GNOME user interface you can find this information in the main menu under Utilities System Info The System Information window displays information about the Linux distribution you are running its kernel number and some information System Administration Tasks 115 about the current usage of your computer To find out how much of your hard disk is being used how much memory is being used and information about the CPU click the Detailed Information button KDE users can find out much of the same information by starting at the main menu and selecting Settings Information This displays a menu of the different items that you can track You can also open the KDE Control Center and select the Information category Updating the Time Daylight savings time changes occur twice annually in temperate time zones everywhere excluding Hawaii Puerto Rico the Virgin Islands most of Arizona and parts of Indiana Now we woul
256. igure 16 5 FicureE 16 5 s mscript doc ax Dre Auo Filwr mat paragraphs that SEHI Fis OMA RROZNe The C lete Angle are longer than the E E default line width The first day A Conference betwixt an Angler a Falconer and a Hunter each commending his Recreation Chapter I Piscator Venator Auceps Piscator You are well overtaken Gentlemen athe morning to you both I have stretched my legs up Tottenham Hill to overtake you Refilled hoping your business may occasion you towards Ware whither I am going this fine fresh May morning paragraphs Venator Sir ne for my part shall almost answer your hopes for my purpose is to aak ayi morning s draught at the Thatched House in Hoddesden ee I th not to rest till I come thither where I have appointed a friend or two to meet me but for this gentleman that you see with me I know not how far he intends his journey he came so lately into my company that I have scarce had time to ask him the question Auceps Sir I shall by your favour bear you company as far as Theobalds and there leave you for then I turn up to a friend s house who mews a Hawk for me which I now lonq to s KEmacs mscript doc 2 SGA A Text Eien Eph Saal 0p see Auto Fill mode Inserting Repeating Characters lt SYNTAX There may be times when you want to repeat a single character several times within the text You sometimes see repeating characters as d
257. ile All images are composed of three colors red green and blue and a tone gray You can use Electric Eyes to change different aspects of each of these colors There are four color controls along the top of the Edit Controls window 328 Hour 22 To change a color click the corresponding color control button You can then use the slider bars to change the density brightness and contrast of each color If you want to keep the color changes click the Apply button If you want to go back to the original image click the Reset button If you want to change the size of the image or its orientation you ll find these controls along the bottom of the Edit Controls window You can use preset increments to increase or decrease the size of the file or you can set a custom size If you d like to use the image file as your desktop background right click H the image and select File Set as Desktop Background LA Managing Image Files with GQView GQView is another handy graphics management tool like Electric Eyes GQView can display one image or run a slideshow of all the images in the directory There are tools to let you zoom in and out and resize the image to the screen GQView can filter your images to display only images of a particular format It also pro vides a method for you to use your favorite graphics program as an external editor Just select the graphics program you want to use from a list and GQView will load the pr
258. iles in the group s directory 114 Hour 7 Setting File Permissions After the group s directory has been set up and permissions for the group owner and members have been applied it s time for the owner to move files that the group will need into the group s directory Once the files have been moved the owner will need to decide how the other group members can work with the files As mentioned earlier in the hour setting file permissions is the way that you maintain security for your files and still allow other users access to them when it is needed Recall that you used the 1s 1 command on the command line to get a long listing of the con tents of a directory Part of that information is a string of characters and dashes which indicates the file access permissions of the files To set file permissions right click the file and select Properties from the menu that appears This opens the Properties dialog box for the file Click the Permissions tab to display the Access permission options for the file as shown in Figure 7 10 You can allow the following types of file access e The Read option gives read only access to the user aka the owner and the group e The Write option gives those selected users and groups the ability to make changes to the file You can set permissions on more than one file at once To do so highlight all the files that need the same permissions before you right click and select A Propert
259. ill be copied into your working directory Of course it then follows that using the two dots preface puts a copy of the file in the parent direc tory of your working directory If you are working on a file that you would like to save to your home directory using the copy command just type cp lt filename gt and press Return The file copies to your home directory where you may get to it easily whenever you wish Getting Into the Home Directory Linux has a subdirectory called home In this directory users are assigned a directory and they may create their own subdirectories in which to store files as well as delete and modify these files There are no system files or files belonging to other users stored in an individual user s home directory When you installed Linux Mandrake on your computer you created a user account for a non privileged user The user in this example is named Joe yours is probably different Linux created a home directory for user Joe at home Joe When you log in to Linux you will be in your home directory 90 Hour 6 Understanding Linux File Commands In the introduction you learned that you would be using the command line to move around in the filesystem Now before all of you Windows and Macintosh people start to skip ahead to firmer ground you should know that this is easy It only requires you to know a few commands one of which doesn t even have any options Determining Your Loca
260. ime or two to get it perfect You should congratulate yourself if you got it right the first time Wiring the Computer for Sound Not all computer sound systems are automatically recognized during the installation Some systems can be reconfigured to work with existing multimedia equipment The new free sound drivers available and included in the Linux Mandrake installation are the OSS Free drivers supplied by the Open Sound System people Information on these dri vers and others can be found at ww linux org uk OSS Since the release of the 2 2 x kernel Linux supports modular sound This makes the job of configuring sound for your system much easier Support is provided for ISA PnP cards and sound is distributed through the system in a way that means you don t have to compile the kernel every time you want to reconfigure options Over the past few years Linux has changed and grown The job of configuring sound in the past was an often frustrating course of configure and recompile the kernel and test and then configure and recompile the kernel and test and repeat for a long time With the addition of loadable code modules that the kernel uses to provide sound the job of con figuring Linux for sound has become much simpler In most cases the PCI plug n play soundcard on your machine can be automatically and easily configured Log into a terminal window as root type sndconfig and press Enter 38 Hour 3 When the sou
261. incing a package man ager to install the program for you Package managers simplify the installation and upgrading of the Linux software packages Not only do package managers load new applications on your Linux system they help you keep those applications current and running as they are intended Through the magical powers of the package management system you can even repair installed applications by searching for damaged files and replacing them The package manager ensures that file dependencies are maintained whenever packages are installed and uninstalled Package managers even inform you of additional packages that need to be installed in order to make the selected package work properly Before you decide to start adding and subtracting applications from your Linux system you should first take a look through the package managers and see what is already installed on the system KDE and GNOME each have their own package management utility Let s see how they can be put to work for you _ UY Clicking the RomDrake icon on your desktop will open the Mandrake front 3 f T end for the Kpackage utility described below with an added feature that A x will let you display the packages on your Linux CD that are not loaded on the system Managing Applications 131 Getting Started with Gnome RPM Linux Mandrake is built on the Red Hat Linux distribution and uses the Red Hat Package Management System RPMS to manage applications
262. ind help on this If you want to use Xscanimage as a Gimp plug in point your browser to www mostang com sane man xscanimage 1 html You ll find directions on how to use xscanimage in conjunction with your scanner and how to use xscanimage as a Gimp plug in If you want to use Xsane as a Gimp plug in navigate to www wolfsburg de rauch sane sane xsane gimp doc html for directions Q I don t want to spend a lot of time on a drawing Can you recommend any quick starts A Take a look in the Xtns menu under Script Fu You ll find quite a selection of logos Web page elements and pattern generators You may also want to look around in the Linux filesystem for images that you can change You also can download free graphics from the Internet You may also find clip art in some of the other graphics applications you have stashed around the workplace 296 Hour 19 Workshop There s so much that you can do with The Gimp that no one book or tutorial can cover it all This hour gave you a very brief introduction to The Gimp s tools If you find The Gimp to be a useful tool take a little time out of each day to learn one new task or trick This workshop provides a few suggestions to get you started Quiz 1 What file format should you use when working on images and photographs in The Gimp 2 How do you change the color that s applied to a drawing object 3 What are some of the basic photo enhancements you can use to correct the qua
263. ined as follows Base Input Output Address Personal computers use a hexadecimal number system to identify cards in the system and unique addresses are required for each card Networking the Small Office Home Office 151 Common assignments for these Base I O addresses fall in the range from 200hex to 300hex e Base Memory Address Some network interface cards use some of the computer s main memory to speed communications with the CPU Cards other than NICs use the same system usually referred to as shared memory VGA cards often use A000h or C000h and some types of SCSI controllers use the addresses around B200h Depending on how your workstations are configured to boot up and gain access to the network you may need a memory area in this region Commonly shared memory addresses are in the range between A000h and E000h e Interrupt Request IRQ Many network cards use an interrupt to notify the CPU of data ready and waiting for processing The IBM Token Ring system allows shared interrupts but IBM isn t usually the most economical route to take For all other topologies the interrupt address for each card must be unique COM ports printer ports disk controllers and other devices use most of the IRQs but IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQS IRQY IRQ10 and IRQ11 are often available on many PCs The PC Device Settings Worksheet shown in Figure 10 3 lists the information you should document about IRQs Base I O addresses and Base Memory Addresse
264. ing Screem 229 Po icon screen notes GUI panels creating 59 60 icons desktop icons 78 79 KDE Icon Editor 330 333 printer icons creating 240 image viewers Electric Eyes 326 328 GQView 328 329 KView 329 330 images 3D modeling programs 317 318 animation programs 314 316 inserting into Web pages Screem 230 morphing programs 318 321 XMorph 319 XMRM 320 321 photographs enhancing 294 scanning 289 290 see also graphics importing files Screem 230 Klllustrator 309 inet daemon 14 Info program 266 268 InformIT Web site 19 31 inlined EPS files KLyx 197 installation boot disks 22 23 installation packages custom installation selecting 12 13 installation screens installation program 24 Add Unprivileged User screen 28 Bootdisk screen 28 Choose a Language screen 24 Components to Install screen 27 Configure Printer screen 28 Configure Timezones screen 27 Disk Setup screen 26 Install Status screen 27 Installation Path screen 25 Keyboard Type screen 25 Lilo Installation screen 28 29 Monitor Setup screen 29 Network Configuration screen 27 Partitions to Format screen 26 27 PCI Probe screen 29 Root Password screen 28 SCSI Configuration screen 25 installed applications finding 131 132 installed package list 353 installing applications 134 135 Civilization 349 351 Gnome RPM 135 136 KPackage 136 138 Linux Mandrake 10 15 alongside Windows 11 BootMagic 30 c
265. ing the Killustrator Window When you first open KIllustrator you may notice some familiar screen elements and drawing tools The menu bar and the standard toolbar can be found along the top of the window as seen in Figure 20 1 Along the left side of the window are the drawing tools and along the right side is the color picker Any objects you create start from a drawing tool Drawing tools help you create lines circles squares and multisided shapes Hold the mouse pointer over a drawing tool to read a description of the tool The color picker lets you change the color of the outline and interior of each shape you create Toolbars can be moved to any location on the Killustrator window or they can be removed from the window Click and hold the right or top of a Z toolbar and move it to any location on the window or off the window Or you can click a toolbar to hide it leaving behind only a small icon Click on this icon to make the toolbar reappear Killustrator Create a new file Save your work Zoom in on your work Ruler Rearrange toolbars Figure 20 1 Killustfator lt unnamed gt fay Se The KIllustrator win 4 ile Edit View Layout Arrange Extras elp Z 100 7 Ze dow contains many of ZZ the tools found in other A ninisael ce rawing Pate drawing programs prog 7E d Color Select a drawing object E picker Q m a Freehand lines m 2 x E Draw
266. into the other color No Fill leaves you with a shape that is transparent in the middle 306 Hour 20 Click the option button for the fill choice you want to apply to the object When you select an option button a list of colors or patterns will appear and you can make your selection from there When you re done making changes to the object s outline and fill click OK Lesson 20 3 Filling a Shape with a Gradient Color An easy way to add special effects to a drawing object is by filling the shape with a gra dient To begin this lesson you need to draw a shape either a circle square or polygon It does not matter what color the shape is filled with Once you have a shape created here s how to fill it with a gradient color 1 Select the drawing object that you want to fill with a gradient color 2 Right click the object and select Properties from the menu that appears This dis plays the Properties dialog box 3 To remove the outline from the shape click the Outline tab to display the Outline properties shown in Figure 20 7 Then click the Style drop down list arrow and select the transparent option It is the first one on the list that is just a blank listing FIGURE 20 7 Properties 7 nfo Outine Fin When using a gradient fill remove the outline wan foo Y from the shape first Style Oojo Color Select the no line style OK Cancel Help 4 Click th
267. irectory it s time to open the CBB and get organized Use Table 13 1 to find CBB TABLE 13 1 Opening CBB From Here Try This AnotherLevel menus Click Applications Finance Check Book Balancer X terminal window Type cbb and press Enter The first time you open CBB a temporary file is created for you This file is named noname cbb and it does not contain any information You ll see a window that looks something like Figure 13 1 The first decision you need to make is the date on which you will begin making entries for your accounts You may want to pick either the first day of the year or the first day of a month unless your bank uses a different beginning date on your statements If that s the case use the bank s beginning date To tell CBB on which date you will begin entering transactions click File Preferences Set Startdate In the Set Startdate type the date on which you want to begin entering transactions and click OK ees Save changes to preferences Whenever you change the preference settings T A you ll need to save these changes by selecting File Preferences Save A sd Preferences tf Checkbooks Gone Digital 207 FiGURE 13 1 2 cbb noname cbb Hex Eile Edit Functions External Help The CBB window looks Chk Date Description Debit Credit Total like a paper checkbook Comment Category Se N register 8 Account register v J J J J E 2i j J Entry
268. is available for nearly every operating system in existence Emacs can be anything you want it to be It is a text editor a programming tool an appointment book and a collection of Internet utilities You ll also find a few time wasting games hidden away And this is just the start All this makes Emacs complex and intimidating But don t let that stop you During the next three hours you learn how to unravel the Emacs maze by doing a few familiar tasks This hour shows you how to move around Emacs and work with text files The next hour shows you how to customize Emacs The last hour of this beginner s guide to Emacs shows you how to keep appointments and a diary with the calendar tools 246 Hour 16 After you ve finished this three hour tour begin using Emacs for some every day tasks read the help files and search the Web for Emacs help and gradually you ll learn a little more about the program as you go along To get you going during the next hour you work with Emacs and learn how to do the following e Navigate between several open files e Create new files and open existing files e Work with files containing formatted text e Build outlines Getting Started with Emacs One way to learn a new software application easily is to apply what you ve learned by working with similar applications Well this hour puts a twist on this theory and intro duces you to Emacs by using XEmacs XEmacs is GNU Emacs with a graphical inter
269. is the use of hardware that is not on the Linux hardware compatibility list If the hardware is listed chances are that it will be auto detected during the Linux installation process 2 Which sound standard does Linux support Computer sound cards that are compatible with the Open Sound System OSS will be detected during the Linux installation and you will be able to play sounds and music on your computer Advanced Linux Sound Architecture ALSA is a newer sound system that will be replacing chunks of the present Linux sound architecture as components become as good or better than the existing ones Answers 357 3 If you want to read the Linux documentation on your computer but do not have access to a user interface how do you do this You can read the Linux man pages from the command line using the man command Hour 4 Quiz 1 What tool enables you to easily move back and forth between using a KDE desk top and using a GNOME desktop The Desktop Switching Tool is the easiest way to go back and forth between the two desktop environments The Desktop Switching Tool also provides easy access to the AnotherLevel desktop environment If you re using GNOME you ll find the AnotherLevel menus in the Main Menu You ll find some applications in these menus that you won t find in the KDE or GNOME menus 2 You find that you are frequently searching through the application menus looking for the same program What can you do to make
270. ist Then the group must have write permission for the directory and write permission for any files in the assigned directory 3 Where can you find out how much space is being used on your computer s hard drive There are several utilities that you can use but the one that gives you the informa tion you need and that also provides other system information can be found in the KDE Control Center under the Information category 4 When do you need to change the time on your computer s clock If you set the time zone correctly when you installed Linux Mandrake your com puter s clock should chug away just fine even when the times change for daylight savings If you move and change to a different time zone you have to reset the clock Sometimes clocks can become off by a few minutes this is when you ll want to use one of the utilities to adjust the time Hour 8 Quiz 1 What are the most important files in the filesystem that should be backed up Configuration and kernel source files should always be backed up before and after any configuration changes are made to the system You also should back up data files in your user s accounts 2 Which backup tools can be used to back up and archive important files There are three commands that you can use tar gzip and cpio You can also use the dump utility 360 Appendix A 3 What type of media can be used to store backups Any type of media that can be separated fro
271. ist so that it is ready for you the following morning 7 First thing each morning display the diary file in an Emacs window You can use the D command if the calendar is selected or use the Alt X diary command During the day Emacs will give you a reminder 10 minutes before the scheduled appointment Searching the Diary File Now that you have added tomes of text appointments and birthdays you may be won dering how you are going to search through a large diary file Emacs can do this for you You just need to give Emacs a date Table 18 4 lists several commands you can use to display diary entries for a date you select If you want to know whether a date has entries use the highlight dates command to highlight the dates on the calendar that have entries 282 Hour 18 TaBLE 18 4 Display Diary Entries According to Your Needs To Display This Use This Command Diary entries for selected date D Diary entries for current date Alt X diary Entire diary file S Highlight dates with diary entries M Remove highlight on calendar U Print the diary buffer Alt X print diary entries Email reminders to yourself Alt X diary mail entries Summary After spending some time with the Emacs calendar and diary you ve hopefully found at least one way in which you can use these tools to organize your time and keep you on schedule One of the benefits of using calendar tools to make better use of your time is having more time for fu
272. istration Tasks to perform sys tem administration tasks such as managing user accounts and granting file access permis sions If you found Linuxconf easy to work with earlier you ll find it just as friendly when creating an Internet connection Linuxconf also allows all of the user accounts that may be set up in the system to use the same Internet connection If you use this method you may want to find out if your ISP will set up multiple mailboxes for a single account That way each user has an individual email address at the ISP but all users connect using the same PPP connection The other method is to use the Kppp dialer that is part of KDE The Kppp dialer can be set up from a user account you don t need to be in the root account Each user on the system will set up a separate Internet connection Unlike Linuxconf users do not share a PPP connection Also if you prefer the DUN look of Microsoft Windows you ll find the Kppp interface very familiar The plus side to using Kppp is the additional tools that help you keep track of your surf time Using Linuxconf Linuxconf is an easy to follow graphical tool for configuring almost anything you want in your Linux system Its goal is to assemble all Linux configuration tasks under one interface That s a big job and it performs the task admirably One of the configuration tasks that Linuxconf can help you with is building a connection to your ISP so that you can idle away your hours
273. it ends It doesn t have to store each point in between like a bitmap program does This means that no matter how much you reduce or enlarge an image you retain image resolution and quality If you think this is good stuff take 10 steps turn and draw During the next hour you learn how to perform the following tasks with KIllustrator 298 Hour 20 e Create basic shapes circles squares and lines e Organize your drawing and save your work e Change the appearance of drawing shapes e Add text to a drawing Getting Started with Killustrator KIllustrator is one of the many graphics programs found in the Linux Mandrake distribu tion If you need a graphics program with the power of Adobe Illustrator or CorelDraw you ll want to give KIllustrator a try Chances are that you ll find KIllustrator in the KDE Application Starter under Graphics If you can t find KIllustrator in the GNOME or KDE menus type killustrator from an X terminal window If you still can t find it you may need to go back to Hour 9 Managing Applications and install the program from the CD hh Another vector drawing program that you may want to try is Sketch You T won t find any help files for Sketch but you ll find that the skills you ll Z acquire during this hour can be helpful when working with Sketch The advantage to Sketch is that it can import more file types than KIllustrator Its disadvantage it doesn t do layers Explor
274. ite 314 Animation Meat 314 Blender 316 Blue Moon Rendering Tools 317 CD Writing HOWTO 127 creating with Screem 221 222 druids 223 hyperlinks 229 images 230 imported files 230 pages displaying 228 pages inserting 226 227 Screem installation 222 site organization 224 225 text formatting 228 229 Creative Open Source 38 Ecasound 38 Emacs 271 exploits org 322 GameSpot 352 GNOME 31 79 Hardware Central 322 InformIT 19 31 KDE 31 79 Linux 3D 318 Linux Archives 352 Linux Documentation Project 46 Linux Game Tome 352 Linux Games 352 Linux Links 19 Linux Media Labs 322 Linux Online 37 Linux Planet 19 Linux Portal 351 Linux Sound Subsystem 38 Linux Mandrake 19 31 LinuxApps 352 Linuxcare 10 18 19 LinuxPower org 322 LinuxStart 323 Macmillan Software 349 MainActor 322 MandrakeUser Org 19 mvComicsMaker 315 POV Ray 317 Rice University Digital Image Processing course 319 Royal Frazier s GIF Animation 314 SANE Backend Drivers 289 SANE drivers 153 Stanford Computer Graphics Laboratory 319 SunSITE 317 The Rendering Times 318 Troll Tech 322 Tucows Linux 352 Upgrading Your Linux Distribution mini HOWTO 120 Videonics Video Glossary 322 Wine Development Headquarters 352 Zip Drive mini HOWTO 126 windows application windows GUIs 60 63 Emacs buffer windows 247 split windows 249 relocating on multiple desk tops 69 sticky windows 71 72 X terminal window
275. ith KLyX 13 Checkbooks Gone Digital 14 Building a Web Site with Screem 15 Printing and Faxing Documents Part V The Beginner s Guide to Emacs Hour 16 Text Processing with Emacs 17 The Emacs Help System 18 Time Management with Emacs 21 33 47 49 67 83 85 103 119 129 141 157 159 181 205 221 233 243 245 265 213 Part VI Going for the Graphics 285 Hour 19 The Gimp 287 20 KIllustrator 297 21 Morphing is for Comedians 313 22 Graphics Viewers and Utilities 325 Part VII Sit Back and Have Some Fun 335 Hour 23 Multimedia 337 24 Games 345 Appendix A Answers 355 Index 371 Contents Introduction 1 Part Installing Linux Mandrake 7 Hour 1 Preparing for the Installation 9 Before YOu Beg araire A ENE E O 10 Deciding How to Install Linux Mandrake cceccesseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeaees 11 Using Linux Mandrake as the Sole Operating System sesesereerrereeeeeee 11 Installing Linux Mandrake on a Separate Hard Drive n se 11 Running Windows and Linux Mandrake Together cceeceeceeseeseereeteeseees 11 Selecting Applications to Install with Linux Mandrake 0 cceeeseeeeeeeeee 12 Choosing Installation Packages siioni e 12 Sorting Out the Daemons ss vssce edeessessevseastsienssssccssveestesscessccbdeiessnisercrecseceeys 13 Making Sure You Have the Right Equipment oo eee sees eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeee 15 What You Need to Know About the Computer eee eee 15 Finding S
276. ity size 4267037 E Replace Files description GNOME GNU Network Object Model Environment is a user friendly set of GUI applications and desktop tools to be used in conjunction with a window manager for the X Window System Gnumeric is a spreadsheet program for GNOME This program is W Replace Packages M Check Dependencies intended to be a replacement for a commercial spreadsheet so quite a bit of work has gone into the I Test do not install program Install gnumeric if you want to use a spreadsheet program with GNOME build time Thu Oct 7 07 50 00 1999 Install package install _Cancei Install rootirpms gnumeric 0 38 8 i386 rpm a The Install Package dialog box presents you with several options When you want to install a new or upgraded package or reinstall an installed package use the Upgrade option The Upgrade process ensures that all ves tiges of the old package if there was one are removed and that the original settings are applied The Uninstall function doesn t always do a good job of cleaning up dependencies between applications and modules To replace files in an installed application select the Replace Files option The KPackage utility repairs damaged applications by replacing damaged or missing files Use the Replace Packages option to replace a package Use this option along with the Upgrade option When you want to check all the dependencies that occur from installing a package select
277. l ways to get to KPackage You may find an RPM icon on the KDE desktop if not try the KDE Application Starter menu under Utilities You can also type kpackage in an X terminal window The KPackage package manager interface is shown in Figure 9 3 Managing Applications 133 FIGURE 9 3 KPackage displays package information in the right pane Select a package Expand package tree Package information a Amusements a Q Games Bortun B trojka B xbill Management Mode Single Selection e e A File Packages Options Gea22Qaaese e mod gnome games gnuchess B kdegames B xboing B xgammon B xjewel Cache 3800K 3430K 1441K 5642K 15K 183K 1050K 3356K Help ol x installtime build time xboard An X Window System graphical chessboard 4 0 0 4mdk Amusements Games 502905 Xboard is an X Window System based graphical chessboard which can be used with the GNUchess and Crafty chess programs with Internet Chess Servers ICSs with chess via email or with your own saved games Install the xboard package if you need a graphical chessboard Sun Dec 5 01 22 26 1999 Wed May 5 12 48 27 1999 Uninstall Location of installed files 5 Properties Fite List Program execution command Uninstall package To see the entire list of installed packages click the Expand Package Tree button on the KPackage toolbar When you select a package fro
278. lerance This makes it susceptible to problems with bad blocks on storage media something that occurs frequently on floppy disks and tapes Even though tar was originally developed for tape backups it works admirably on other media as well Using tar to Create an Archive Once you have compiled a list of files using the find command you can then tell tar a to archive those files The syntax for the tar command is Z gt tar functionoptions files Wn Ww Where functionoptions is a single letter indicating the operation to perform function plus one or more single letters options to the function There is no space between the function and options letters in the command And files is the list of files which tar will place in an archive In the following example tar cv T tmp backuplist weekly f dev cdrw tar performs the following tasks e The cv argument creates an archive function c and prints lots of information while packing or unpacking the archive option v e The T tmp backuplist weekly argument backs up the files listed in the backuplist weekly file e The f argument tells find to use the backuplist weekly file as the archive name A e The dev cdrw argument stores the archive in the dev cdrw directory Q There are many different ways that organizations and individuals back up E their data Therefore rather than waste time going through the list of Seq ae options it is better if you look at the man pag
279. lications If computer graphics are your gig you ll find a powerhouse of graphics applications to fit any art project Programmers will find every programming environment imaginable And of course the strong suit of GNU Linux is its networking capabilities At a minimum you should run Linux Mandrake on a computer with the following con figuration e Pentium class or compatible CPU e 32MB RAM e 500MB hard disk drive space minimum 1 6GB is recommended e Keyboard mouse sound card and video card with 2MB VRAM Floppy disk drive and an IDE or SCSI CD ROM e Modem for Internet access or Ethernet card if connected to a network Linux Mandrake is optimized for Pentium class computers This means that while other GNU Linux distributions run on i386 and i486 computers Linux DZ Mandrake does not Visit http mcpsupport linuxcare com to obtain a special version that works with i386 and i486 computers If you ll be running any commercial applications such as Corel WordPerfect or StarOffice you need to reserve hard disk space for these applications You also want to check what processor speed the application needs and the minimum amount of RAM required Graphics work such as Web graphics and similar small image files can be done comfort ably on a Pentium 133MHz computer with 32MB RAM But if you need to do Preparing for the Installation 11 higher end graphics pre press and large format photographs or other high
280. lity of your photographs Exercises 1 Get artistic with your photographs and experiment with filters Open your photo graph in The Gimp and save it under a new filename using the xcf extension This way you retain your original photograph Then right click the photo and select one of the filters from the Filters menu If you don t like the effect press Ctrl Z to undo the change 2 Experiment with the color palette File Dialogs Palette instead of the color selec tor to change the foreground and background colors in the color picker A N A 1 V aay 2 CNN N ay m p HOUR 20 Killustrator Do you ever wonder whether your doodling could be turned into fine art Do you need to create charts for a staff meeting Is your small business in need of a logo Do you want to create your own Web page graphics Well if your answer to any of these questions is yes welcome to KIllustrator Unlike many drawing programs KIllustrator is a vector drawing program Now what makes a vector drawing program so special These types of drawing programs allow you to create objects such as lines rectangles cir cles and multisided shapes without using tons of memory or slowing down refresh rates How s this done Each shape is described in mathematical terms using angles coordinates and distances The program knows at what point on the screen the object starts where it turns how long it goes in one direction and where
281. ll notice an x to the right of the Credit column in the register next to those transactions that appeared on the bank statement Checkbooks Gone Digital 217 PE If you notice that you ve made a mistake entering a transaction and you A want to edit the transaction in the register you can do this while you are w reconciling the account Simply display the CBB window edit the transac tion switch back to the Balance window and click the Refresh button Creating Reports to Find Reconciliation Problems There are several reports that you can create to determine why you cannot reconcile your CBB records to the bank s statement To find the reports click Functions Reports The Transaction List Report The Transaction List looks just like the account register for the account You can see which transactions have cleared your bank by the x to the right of the amount column and those that have not You can also use this report to verify that you have entered the correct amounts and that the transactions have been recorded in the appropriate bank account There are other variations on this theme You can also select a Transaction List by Category report This report sorts transactions according to category and displays a subtotal for each category If you don t want to see all the transactions and instead want to view just the category and amounts select the Short List by Category report The Uncleared T
282. llation for a specific purpose you can pick and choose These applications and services will fill most of your needs in the beginning All you need to do here is to select the defaults Later on you may want to add or remove packages to allow more flexibility than the defaults provide you can do this easily with Mandrake s tools after it is installed Once your decisions are made click the OK button Install Status Now after a quick trip to do something about all the coffee you can relax and enjoy watching as Linux unpacks all your new toys and installs them There is a nice progress screen with a graphic slider to represent the progress of the installation as you go along And if you can read very fast a list of what is being installed is displayed as each pack age installation proceeds Network Configuration Here you are asked if you want to configure dial up networking we cover this exten sively in Hour 11 Getting on the Internet or your other network adapters If you have network adapters select Yes Your network card should have been detected automatically If it wasn t you have to select your adapter from the list and then manually input the information you collected about it before the installation Configure Timezone The system clock needs to be set to your geographical location Scroll down the list to the name of the city closest to you click to highlight it and click the OK button 28 Hour 2 Configu
283. lled applications 131 132 system information 16 17 114 115 floppy disk drives backing up files 123 124 focus policies application win dows changing 62 63 font size changing KFM graphical file manager 101 footers 195 formatting characters KLyX 193 194 Emacs text 257 color 259 260 commands 258 margins 262 outlines 260 261 paragraph alignment 259 tab positions 258 259 text Screem 228 229 fractal art 333 Fractals Generator kfract 333 frames Emacs 249 Free Film Project 323 FreeCiv 353 FTP File Transfer Protocol gFTP utility 175 176 functions Lisp functions 269 270 Go games 346 353 Civilization installing 349 351 FreeCiv 353 GNOME Game menus 347 348 GNOME Tali 347 GnuChess 348 GnuLactic Conquest 346 KDE Game menu 346 Linux games 349 system requirements 349 Wine Windows emulator 352 X games 348 xpat2 353 Xtrojka 348 GameSpot Web site 352 General toolbar KLyX 183 gFTP utility 175 176 Gimp The 290 blank canvases creating 291 292 lines drawing 293 photograph enhancement 294 scanner plug in 295 starting 290 system requirements 288 289 toolbox 291 tutorials 294 User Manual 290 gimp command 290 gimp data extras 1 0 0 5mdk noarch rpm package 295 GNOME CD player 338 340 GNOME DiskFree 116 GNOME Game menus 347 X games 348 Gnome graphical user interface 52 application windows 60 64 focus policies changing 62 63 moving 62
284. log box 2 Click the Desktops tab From this tab you can change the number of desktop areas the size of the icon on the panel and the title of the desktop area see Figure 5 5 3 To change the title given to an icon select the text in the text box and type new text 4 To change the number of desktop areas click and drag the Visible slider to the right to create more desktop areas or drag to the left to reduce the number of desk top areas Changing Your View of the Desktop reflect the type of applications you use or type of work you perform in each Use descriptive text for the desktop area titles Desktop area names should EA desktop area FIGURE 5 5 KPanel Configuration o Not only can you Panel Options Desktops Disk Navigator change the number of desktop areas in KDE you can also 1i se give desktop areas 2 eames 6 fsx descriptive names 3 Bookkeeping Z 4 Four 8 Use descriptive Visible Add reduce desktop areas desktop area titles Width Help Default Apply Cancel 5 To change the size of the desktop area icon on the panel drag the Width slider 6 When you ve made all the changes click OK Using Sticky Windows Windows don t necessarily need to appear on a single desktop area If there is one window that you want to be able to work on no matter which desktop area you might be in make the window sticky You may want to
285. lorizins Drawing ObjeCts siisii eierens se a 305 Adding Text to a Drawing SUMIMALY AOPE STT Contents xiii Hour 21 Morphing Is for Comedians 313 Creating Saturday Morning Cartoons ssussiisiessisiea ieira RA 314 Working with mvComicsMaker ssisisrsiiseneneiinisireniee ranie ii 315 Animating with Blender a 3D Modeling resser e a E E RIE Creating Animations with Morphing Software sessesseeeeeeeeeerrrseerserrrrersrerer 318 Understanding the Difference Between Warping and Morphing 318 Introducing XMorphi sesiccissecsssvestecses suns ascistevenatsadeiastecestseesinecsactcaviesn deenvetecsetse 319 Hour 22 Graphics Viewers and Utilities 325 Coloring and Resizing Images with Electric Eyes eseeeeeeeeneeeees 326 Managing Image Files with GQView iss Watching Slideshows with KVieW 0 ccecceceseeseeecseeseeeeseeseecseeeeseseseeseeesseeaes Creating Icons with the KDE Icon Editor s scsisneresni ienris 330 Taking Snapshots of Your Desktop icici cis isscseescdavsasessatesoaisestehvscuseanetssiaesseetaaevence 331 SUMM TY sedis sscssssssssssssssasensssecsssvioves csvstestsoossasesesssssssscozsaveenesaasacssscabenstsvesedssaoeneo ves 332 OV OET A E EE 333 Workshop onee e tee aE EEEE AEEA EEE RE 333 QUILT es arena gen r E ENEE AA E EE AES 333 E A E 334 Part VII Sit Back and Have Some fun 355 Hour 23 Multimedia Playing Music CDs eee Listening to WAV and MIDI Files Karaoke in Your Own Backyard si
286. lose the buffer Follow along with Lesson 16 1 to open a couple of buffers look around them and close a buffer that you don t need Lesson 16 1 Displaying the Emacs Tutorial in a Buffer Window Emacs contains an extensive help system Much of this help can be accessed from the Help menu or by entering a simple command A good place to start is with the Emacs Tutorial The tutorial not only contains good information but you can use this file to practice moving around a text file and to edit text Try these steps 1 Open the Emacs tutorial in a buffer Select Help Basics Tutorials English from the menu bar You can also press Ctr1 H T The tutorial will appear in a buffer and yov ll no longer see the splash screen Notice the name of the tutorial file in the modeline 2 Click on the Buffers menu The menu list shows all the open buffers You should see buffers for the tutorial the splash screen and a scratch These are all the active buffers 3 Click the Splash buffer to make the splash screen the active buffer 4 To close the Splash buffer and to close the splash screen file click File Delete Buffer Splash There should no longer be an open file or buffer for the splash screen and the tutorial buffer should now be the active buffer 5 Click the Buffers menu again The menu should only list the tutorial and scratch buffers Text Processing with Emacs To find more Emacs help use the Ctr1 H A command It acce
287. luded in the menus And there may be applications that were not installed All of this depends on which components you selected during the Linux Mandrake installation During this hour you learn how to search your system and the CD ROM to find more applications After you are more confident with Linux you may want to do some explor ing on your own and find application packages for Linux on the Internet Yov ll be amazed at how much is out there And all of it is free except for your download time 130 Hour 9 There are two tools that will help you find installed applications and install more applications K Package and Gnome RPM At the end of this hour you will know how to use these tools to do the following e Find applications that are not found in the GNOME and KDE menus e Make sure that applications are loaded correctly and remove unwanted applications e Install application packages from a CD ROM e Download and install packages off the Internet Finding a Few Good Programs Applications are where it s at when it comes to computers The appeal of computers is the ease with which software programs can perform everything from composing short letters to creating complex Web graphics The joy of Linux is the availability of an enor mous collection of software applications Some of these applications are on the Linux Mandrake CD others can be found on the Internet Once you find these programs it s a simple matter of conv
288. lways be a space between the date and the beginning of each entry 4 Begin typing the diary entry An entry can consist of one or more lines If you use multiple lines you ll need to leave at least one blank character space at the begin ning of each line after the date By leaving a blank space you are telling Emacs that this is just one entry Emacs ignores lines that do not begin with a date or a blank space Figure 18 2 shows how a diary entry might appear 5 Save the diary file using the Ctr1 X Ctr1 S command You now have a diary file that can be closed when it s not needed any date on the calendar and use the S command Yes just press the S key When you want to read your diary you ll need to open the diary file Select A on your keyboard 2 7 8 FIGURE 18 2 A diary entry must begin with a date the following lines in the entry must begin with a blank space Hour 18 emacs diary File Edit Apps Options Buffers Tools SRE AROMA MR eee Nov 6 1999 To start your diary entry just begin typing Use Shift Enter to start a new line and remember to leave a blank space or two on each line after the date Type diary entry Emacs adds date a XEmacs diary Fundamental All 7 October 1999 November 1999 December 1999 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa 12 nk ea Ep oe SOAS oy Ge 5 6 7 8 91011 10 11 12 13 14 15 1
289. ly SCREEM Site CReating and Editing EnvironMent Tag tree Site File tree L ht click on the to dialog for Starting Your First Web Site From your experience with other operating systems you may be familiar with the con cept of wizards Wizards make your life easier by walking you through a task and asking appropriate questions Screem also contains a number of wizards except you will find that they are called druids No matter what you call them these wizards druids are smarter than us mere mortals and already know everything you need to do in order to get a job done The easiest way to get started on your Web site is with the assistance of the Site druid The Site druid walks you through the process of setting up a structure for your Web site and then collects all the information needed to upload your Web site to your ISP s Web server when you are ready to reveal your site to the wired world 224 Hour 14 Lesson 14 2 Organizing Your Web Site Before you can start designing Web pages you need to tell Screem where you want to save the Web site on your computer and to what Web server the site will be uploaded when you are ready to publish your site on the Internet To use the Site druid to help you start your site follow these steps Before you begin this lesson you may want to check with your ISP and get directions for uploading your Web site to its Web server 1 Click
290. ly redials if the connection is lost 362 Appendix A 2 How do you set up an Internet connection that is used only by the user who set up the connection That is it is not available to other users on the system Use the Kppp dialer The Kppp dialer looks and acts much like the dial up connec tion used by Microsoft Windows In addition to dialing the modem and connecting to your ISP the Kppp dialer can keep track of your Internet use 3 What are the different Internet activities that you can perform with Netscape Communicator Netscape Communicator contains a full suite of Internet tools The Navigator Web browser can display most any Web page that you may come across Messenger can send and receive email Your messages can be composed in plain text or you can add color and flair and use HTML formatting in your email message You can also lurk the newsgroups with Messenger Messenger will store mail and news mes sages in folders that you designate Communicator also includes an address book in which you can keep names email addresses snail mail addresses and other information for everyone you know The address book can be accessed from a new message window so that you don t have to remember email addresses The final player is Composer If you want to create Web pages Composer can handle most of your HTML formatting needs 4 What is the fastest way to download files off the Internet FTP is the fastest download method By using an F
291. m anim animatr html e Animation Meat at ww animationmeat com index2 html contains animation tutorials techniques and tips e Royal Frazier s GIF Animation at www6 uniovi es gifanim gifmake htm shows you how to create animated GIFs but the basics of creating animations are covered Morphing Is for Comedians 315 There are several animation programs that run under Linux Let s take a look at two dif ferent ones mvComicsMaker and Blender mvComicsMaker is the easier and less intimidating of the two Blender will do more than animations and looks more like the animation software used by professional animators and videographers Working with mvComicsMaker mvComicsMaker creates bitmap and vector animations that can be saved in MVA the mvComicsMaker native file format FLC BMP or PNG file formats mvComicsMaker imports BMP and PNG file formats for use as backgrounds in your animations To get your copy of mvComicsMaker go to the mvComicsMaker Web page at members xoom com miishland 9mvCM html You ll want to download the i386 binaries the tutorial and the examples The three files combined are surprisingly small less than 700KB The mvComicsMaker program opens on your screen in four different windows Each window performs a different function as explained here e The Main window shown in Figure 21 1 controls files and animations From the main window you can start a new animation or edit an existing animation The cont
292. m the category list on the left side of the window the detail is shown on the right Q LA When you display information about a package the Install Uninstall button is activated If you request information about a package that is installed the button will read Uninstall if the package that you request information about is not installed the button will read Install Lesson 9 2 Uninstalling Applications with KPackage window You may decide that some of the applications listed in the package managers are just taking up space on your system and you d like to have the space for other applications that you may want to install later Before you can uninstall programs from the Linux sys tem you need to be logged into the root account In both KPackage and Gnome RPM yov ll find the button that uninstalls a package at the bottom of the information window Here s what you need to do to remove any pack ages that you no longer want installed on your system 1 Select the package that you want to uninstall and display the package information Click the Uninstall button to display a verification dialog box like the one shown in Figure 9 4 134 Hour 9 FIGURE 9 4 kpackage ox ra Select acka es that Ze Packages Options Cache Help Lakes p anae you want to uninstall E Properties Fite List from your Linux Wiortune mod 3800K name pilot summar An X Window Sys
293. m your Linux system is potentially a good backup medium Floppy disks can store a small amount of data Zip or Jaz drives can be used to store larger amounts of data such as user account data files If you want to back up the entire Linux system use a CD or a separate hard drive Hour 9 Quiz 1 What is a package manager and which package managers are available in the Linux Mandrake distribution A package manager is a utility that installs upgrades and uninstalls software from your Linux computer The package manager automates the process of loading the necessary files in the right place and checking the dependencies between files The package manager takes care of all the hard work of loading new programs KPackage and Gnome RPM are both found in the Linux Mandrake distribution KPackage works with the KDE graphical user interface and Gnome RPM works with the GNOME interface While both utilities perform the same functions they approach each task in a different manner 2 How do you find software programs that are installed on your Linux computer but do not show up in the KDE or GNOME menus Open up a package manager either KPackage or Gnome RPM and browse through the list of software categories To find out how to execute one of these pro grams display the package information and look for the execution command It is usually the first item listed in the package information 3 Where can you find packages that can be installed o
294. make the change There are other options for dealing with the word that the spell check has selected e Sometimes a selected word is correct but not in the dictionary If you want to leave the selected word as is click Ignore word e If you ve used the word several times throughout the document and don t want the spell check to show you this word again click Accept word in this session e When the correct spelling does not display in the Replace text box or Alternatives list type the correct spelling in the Replace text box and click the Replace word button e When you will be using a non dictionary word such as a name many times you can add the correct spelling to a personal dictionary Next time you run a spell check you won t be asked to verify the word The spell check will do it for you If you typed it incorrectly the spell check now knows the correct spelling Summary As you ve seen it is possible to create a professional looking document in a short period of time KLyX can take care of many of the text formatting details for you so that you can concentrate on great text Over the past hour you ve learned how to make text stand out on the page how to arrange text in tables and how to add graphical images that 202 Hour 12 enhance your words As you explore Linux Mandrake you ll find other word processing and text editing programs You may find that the skills you acquired during this hour help you find your
295. mands for access ing help FIGURE 16 1 The XEmacs splash screen emacs Splash Toolbar Buffer area Gemacs 21 1 patch 4 Arches linux of Sun Aug 22 1999 on vador Copyright C 1985 1998 Free Software Foundation Inc Copyright C 1990 1994 Lucid Inc Copyright C 1993 1997 sun Microsystems Inc All Rights Reserved Copyright C 1994 1996 Board of Trustees University of Illinois Copyright C 1995 1996 Ben Wing es comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY type C h C w for full details You may give out copies of XEmacs type C h C l to see the conditions Type C h C d for information on getting the latest version Type fl or use the Help menu to get help Type C x u to undo EAD C means use the Control key To get out of XEmacs type C x G c a Fundamental Top Modeline XEmacs Splash Status of buffer changes Current buffer working file Editing mode Cursor location in buffer area Minibuffer Before getting started take some time to look around XEmacs You may notice some screen elements that are unfamiliar and in other instances screen elements have names that you may not recognize Here s a quick rundown of what you ll see on the screen You ll learn more about these screen elements as you progress through the hour The toolbar contains buttons that execute a number of common tasks To find out what a button does h
296. me information about the computer and a login prompt that looks something like this localhost login Also if you remember during the installation you were asked for a root password and an additional username and password for an unprivileged user You ll want to use the root account only to perform system administration We ll be sure and point those places out to you as you go along For these lessons use your user account We re going to play musical chairs as we access the user account take a look at two popular graphical user interfaces and then exit the system Create separate accounts for each person who will be using the computer You ll learn how to create and manage user accounts in Hour 7 System Administration Tasks M4 oN X N ij e N if Lesson 4 1 Logging In and Starting KDE Your computer is quietly waiting for you to do something with it But it needs for you to log in and tell it what to do When you log in you are requesting access to the computer by providing a username and password The Linux operating sys tem checks your login information against information in its database and if it finds a match presto you re in From this point you have access to your own user account as well as any programs and files for which you have access permissions This first lesson shows you how to access your user account and display the KDE graphi cal user interface Try these steps
297. me Tool Workshop Managing users and groups is a simple method of sharing files After you ve tested your knowledge of system administration try out your new skills on your own system Quiz 1 What method do you use to share files with other users on the system 2 How do you give members of a group the capability to make changes to a file 3 Where can you find out how much space is being used on your computer s hard drive 4 When do you need to change the time on your computer s clock System Administration Tasks 117 Exercises 1 You may want to learn more about how file permissions work One way to do this is to read the man pages about some of the file commands Look up the chmod command which changes access permissions There s also the chown command which changes the ownership of files and directories You may also want to look up the Linux Security HOWTO usr doc HOWTO Security HOWTO to learn how to keep your computer system secure It covers physical security users and groups file permissions passwords and backup and restore procedures 2 Get out your system administrator s notebook and record the users that you ve cre ated Next decide how users will share files You may want to create a directory where the family managers share household budget information Another directory can be accessed by members who are creating a Web site together You ll also want to make note of any groups that you formed
298. memos and letters It can also accommodate larger documents and can include such features as page numbers a table of contents cross references pictures and tables You may think that KLyX works just like other word processing programs Well KLyX is a little different To put it simply KLyX acts more like a pro fessional typesetting system It takes care of every aspect of producing a document KLyX uses document classes and templates as the starting point for your letters reports and books Each document class and template con tains a list of styles These styles control how the document looks and keeps track of page chapter and section numbering 182 Hour 12 In this hour you use KLyX to create a document that contains text lists tables and graphic images You also learn how to make your documents look better by e Creating documents from templates and formatting text e Using a variety of list styles e Organizing information with tables e Inserting graphic images that reinforce the document s message Creating a New Document KLyX is one of the applications that you may find listed in the KDE menus Most likely it will be in the Applications menu If you can t find it try typing klyx in an X terminal window And if that doesn t work you may need to install KLyX on your system The first time you use KLyX you ll see the Question dialog box KLyX needs to create a directory file in which to store changes that you make t
299. mes refer to files that are in the subdirectories of the working directory your present location As an example if Joe were working in the home Joe books Linux directory he could get the file with the relative file specification which just names the directories between his current working directory and the file like this chapters Hour6 Since the filename does not begin with a slash the system will begin searching for the file from the working directory home Joe books Linux This is a bit shorter at least Relative filenames work only if you stay in the same working directory If Joe s working directory changed to home Joe books the relative path to the file would change to Linux chapters Hour6 The Marvelous Mystical Filesystem Tour 89 Here are some short cut conventions that you can use for directories that are easy to use and remember e One dot specifies your current directory e Two dots specify the parent directory of your current directory e All filenames that include or are relative filenames As an example on a terminal in your home directory type cd and press Return You are taken to the parent directory of your home directory the Linux home directory To confirm this type pwd and press return You may also use directory short cuts for other commands like the copy command cp To copy a file into your working directory type cp lt filename gt and press Return The file w
300. morphosis which can be found at ww graphics stanford edu papers morph Introducing XMorph XMorph shown in Figure 21 5 is an image warp program that can be found on the Linux Mandrake CD XMorph uses Targa tga files as the source and destination images in order to perform a morph To start your own morphed pictures you need to start with two files that are the same size in pixels Load one as the source image from the File menu and the other as the destination image Then click and drag mesh points in both images to shape the morph Once this is done you can warp the images so that you either have a single image or a series of morphed images that can be used as an animation 320 Hour 21 Source image Destination image goes here Figure 21 5 xmorph XMorph creates a Fill Mesh Morph Sequence morphing animation Properties Commands from two images Adjust mesh destination mesh warp source mesh destination mesh destination image dissolve source image a destination image warp dissolve source image Getting Started with XMRM XMRM is a digital image morphing program with many possible applications It is also another of those applications that you won t find on the Linux Mandrake CD Here s where you ll find XMRM e The XMRM Home page is located at www cg tuwien ac at research ca mrm xmrm
301. mount is entered in the Credit field You do want your balance to increase don t you The example in Figure 13 9 shows a simple deposit FiGurE 13 9 10726799 XYZ Company 0 00 froo 00 f Li Debit means decrease credit means more Deposit amount cash Transferring Funds Between Accounts For those times when you need money and it isn t in the right bank account you ll need to make a transfer A transfer is actually two transac tions in one First it is a withdrawal out of one account Second it is a deposit into another account If your bank allows you to transfer money between accounts and those accounts are set up in CBB you can com plete both these transactions in one easy step a Keep your eyes open when making changes to a transfer The change should a appear in both the account from which the money was withdrawn and the Nt D account to which the money was deposited You may want to check the transaction in both accounts to make sure it was handled properly Lesson 13 5 Moving Money from Savings to Checking Let s pretend that it s vacation time once again and you need to buy the train tickets for your Siberian journey You go to the bank and move money from the savings account to the checking account so that you can write a check to the travel agent who found you this great deal Follow these steps 1 Open the account register for a savings account You will be moving money from this account and
302. mp 295 Screem 221 222 druids 223 installation 222 Web sites creating hyperlinks 229 images 230 imported files 230 pages displaying 228 pages inserting 226 227 site organization 224 225 text formatting 228 229 screen capture utilities KSnapshot 331 332 screen notes creating for GUI panel icons 59 60 screensavers 75 76 SCSI Configuration screen installation program 25 search replace operations Emacs 262 searching diary file Emacs calendar 281 games on the Internet 351 352 screensavers 75 system information 16 17 security accounts Check Book Balancer 218 networks 154 Select Color dialog box 306 Select Mode tool KIllustrator 305 selecting dates Emacs calendar 275 files graphical file man agers 97 98 sendmail daemon 15 servers X server setting up 36 37 shapes KIllustrator arranging text around 308 309 color changing 305 306 drawing 299 300 shared resources 152 153 sharing files with groups of users 112 114 shielded twisted pair cabling 146 Site druid Screem 224 225 sizing application windows 61 slash character directories 87 Slides document class KLyX 185 slideshows K View 329 330 small office networks 141 142 administration 153 154 building 150 152 cabling 145 146 documenting 147 equipment records 147 149 importance of 155 network diagrams 149 importance of 155 NICs network interface cards 147 planning 142 143
303. mputer we ll go step by step through each DrakX instal lation screen and help you make the right choices Once Linux Mandrake is installed you ll learn how to log in and out of your new Linux system and how to shut it down properly Today you accomplish the following e Create an installation boot disk e Prepare your hard drive e Make the right choices during installation e Set up your computer to dual boot Locating the Boot Disk The Linux Mandrake installation program on the CD is self booting that is if you have a computer that can boot from the CD ROM However if your computer doesn t boot from the CD ROM you need an installation boot disk This is a 3 5 inch disk that can be used to boot the installation program on the CD The disk image for the installation boot disk along with the program to create the disk with the boot image on it can be found on the Linux Mandrake distribution CD in the back of the book If you purchased Linux Mandrake in the boxed set you may already have an installation boot disk If you do not have one you need to make one Even if your computer does boot from the CD ROM if you don t have an installation boot disk we recommend that you make one The program that you use to make this disk is the rawrite program found in the dosutils directory on the Linux Mandrake Installation CD The rawrite program can be run from inside Windows in a DOS Window or from DOS Lesson 2 1 Creating the Installatio
304. n a gt a You must specify at least the name To maintain security renane update passwords Base info Params Mail aliases Priviteges regularly and keep F The account is enabled passwords a secret Login name henry Full name Henry Ross Rigues group henry v4 Supplementary groups Home directory opt home henry Command interpreter opt bin bash Z User ID opt 506 Accept Cancel Del Passwd Tasks Help Permanently remove a Change password Edit user information user from the system 3 Click the Passwd button to display the Changing password window 4 Type the new password and click Accept Then type it again to confirm it and click Accept again The new password will be exchanged for the old one Also the User information window will close and you will be returned to the Users accounts window 5 Click the Quit button and make sure you activate the changes when you close Linuxconf 110 Hour 7 Removing a User Account When users are no longer using the system their user accounts can be closed If the files created by the deleted user are needed by anyone else on the system they can be saved and used by others If they are not needed you can delete the files to create more space for other users To delete a user select the user account from the Users accounts window to display the User Information window Then click the Del button You will be asked how you want to use the account s data The t
305. n ing the Linux program 2 If you have a video camera try your hand at digitizing some of your favorite film footage Once you have the video stored on your computer try one of the video editing programs and turn your amateur production into the next winner at your local film festival A N A 1 N V aay 2 CNN N ay m i HOUR 22 a a Graphics Viewers and a a a Utilities It s been a graphical whirlwind tour over the past few hours You ve learned how to create your own pictures with some of the best graphics programs that Linux Mandrake has to offer But what if your graphics manipulation needs are relatively simple There are several utilities sprinkled around your system that allow you to view a variety of image file formats and to perform simple editing jobs such as sizing rotating and papering your desktop You ll be introduced to sev eral of these utilities in this hour You may have other graphics needs that require a special tool You may want to create your own desktop and panel icons Then if you want to show your friends how your new icons look you can take a picture of your desktop You ll see a few tools that can get this job done 326 Hour 22 During the next hour you learn how to perform a number of tasks with the following image utility programs e Edit images using Electric Eyes e Sort through image files with GQview e View slideshows with K View e Create icons with Icon Editor
306. n Boot Disk To make the installation boot disk you need a blank 3 5 inch disk and the rawrite exe program and its documentation Rawrite and the documentation are located in the dosutils directory of the CD in the back of this book You may want to read the file named README before you begin If you want to use the rawrite program in DOS follow these steps EA 4 To get to the DOS prompt from Microsoft Windows click the Start button sf and select Shutdown Use the Restart in MS DOS Mode option Installing Linux Mandrake 23 1 Change to the CD ROM drive by typing D and pressing Enter Where D is your CD ROM drive 2 Change to the directory where the rawrite program is stored on the Linux Mandrake CD by typing cd dosutils and pressing Enter type prompt p g and press Enter If your screen prompt doesn t display the directory but shows only the drive Z 3 Type rawrite and press Enter The rawrite program interface will appear and ask you for information 4 The first thing rawrite needs is the disk image source filename Enter the path to this file by typing D images cdrom img and then press Enter 5 Next you need to specify the target disk drive which is your floppy drive Type A and press Enter You ll then be asked to place the disk into the drive The files will be copied to the disk 6 When the copy process is finished remove the disk Be sure to label the disk Linux Mandr
307. n building a network is to make sure that all the equipment is compatible Since you need to start with the computer equipment that you presently own you ll want to be sure that everything works together It is also important that you plan for future growth As your home office or small business grows you ll want to add more workstations to the network You need to be sure that there is enough space on the network to add these workstations You should also plan for new technologies that you may want to take advantage of 3 Why is the job of network administrator so important The network administrator is responsible for keeping the network up and running This involves setting up accounts for each user who needs access to the network and creating accounts so that several users can share files in a workgroup The net work administrator is also responsible for backing up the network so that valuable files are not lost It is also the network administrator who must plan for the growth of the network and keep abreast of changing technologies that could benefit the organization Hour 11 Quiz 1 What is the most efficient way to set up an Internet connection that can be used by all user accounts Linuxconf allows you to create one connection that can be used by any person who is logged into a user account Also by using Linuxconf you can use UserNet to connect to the Internet UserNet is quick at making the connection and it automati cal
308. n elements adding 197 editing 190 Encapsulated Postscript Images adding 198 199 entering text 186 187 formatting 191 graphics adding 197 opening 189 print preview 187 printing 185 186 rearranging 191 tables adding 199 DOS files backing up 125 126 DOS floppy disks backing up files 124 DOS partitions moving files to 125 downloading applications 136 drawing lines The Gimp 293 drawing programs KIllustrator 298 309 aligning objects 310 color picker 298 colorizing drawing objects 305 307 Create Polygon tool 310 Create Polyline tool 310 designing drawings 301 304 drawing basic shapes 299 300 drawing tools 298 fill colors 305 307 grids 301 302 helplines 310 importing graphic files 309 layers 302 304 polygons drawing 310 saving work 300 301 Select Mode tool 305 text adding to drawings 307 309 toolbars moving 298 window 298 299 Zoom tool 304 drivers SANE 153 sound drivers 37 38 drives CD Read Write drives 126 127 floppy disk drives 123 124 Jaz drives 126 Zip drives 126 druids Screem 223 227 Page druid 226 227 Site druid 224 225 dual booting machines 30 dump utility 123 dust hardware problems 144 E Ecasound Web site 38 edit commands Emacs 257 Edit Controls window Electronic Eyes 327 328 Edit Local Printer Entry dialog box 236 editing category list Check Book Balancer 209 210 diary file entries Emacs cal endar 282 text Emacs
309. n handy because you can easily change the formatting of paragraphs Styles are also used to create different levels of text in a document such as headings and table of contents entries There are a number of styles that are ready for use in KLyX To apply a 192 Hour 12 paragraph environment to a paragraph place the cursor in the paragraph open the Paragraph Environment list and click a style Watch how the paragraph looks different on your screen Changing the Appearance of Paragraphs While you re typing along and pounding out those paragraphs notice how the paragraphs are formatted The first paragraph on the page is not indented But each paragraph that follows is indented Also notice that there is no extra space between the paragraphs If you would rather not have indented paragraphs you can change the default format To change to a paragraph format that places an extra space between paragraphs and does not indent them click Layout Document to display the Document Layout dialog box shown in Figure 12 2 and select the Skip option in the Separation section If you need to change other paragraph attributes such as spacing around paragraphs spacing between lines inside the paragraph hanging indents or borders you need to make these changes from the Paragraph dialog box To get there select the paragraph you want to format and then click Layout Paragraph One way to set a paragraph apart from other paragraphs is with the use o
310. n in the color picker This opens a color selector Not only can you pick a color but you can also select a color shade 3 What are some of the basic photo enhancements that you can use to correct the quality of your photographs You can fix poor exposure color imbalance color saturation brightness contrast remove blemishes and apply a variety of filters to your photos Hour 20 Quiz 1 How do you change the color used to draw a shape Use the color bar located on the right side of the KIllustrator window When you right click a color box you change the default color for the outline Clicking a color box changes the fill color 368 Appendix A 2 What is the purpose of gridlines and how do you use them in KIIlustrator Not only do gridlines help you align objects to a straight line but they are also used to divide the drawing into sections These sections are used to place objects so that they appear balanced on a page To set up the gridlines for a drawing select Layout Grid and select the distance between each gridline To show and hide the gridlines select View Show Grid from the menu 3 When is it helpful to use layers in a drawing When there are parts of a drawing that do not need to be displayed or printed for every purpose By using layers you can select which elements to view edit and print 4 Is it possible to add text to a KIllustrator drawing that does not appear on the page in a straight horizontal line
311. n pages varies To access the man pages in Emacs for X11 select Help Manuals Read Man Page In XEmacs go to Help Manuals UNIX Manual The following command appears in the minibuffer Manual entry default buffer If you want to display the man page that describes how the man pages work type man and press Enter This is the same as using the brief syntax for man at the command line as follows man man The man page appears in a buffer window like the example in Figure 17 1 You can save the man page to your user directory and then use the text modes and editing tools you learned about in Hour 16 to work with the A A files Figure 17 1 xo emacs locaihostiocaldomain 2 m X Di l Buffers Files Tools Edit Search Mule Help isplay man pages in pro man a separate frame or a ME d i f man format and display the on line manual pages man page split window manpath determine user s search path for man pages SYNOPSIS man acdfFhkKtuh m system p string C con fig_file M path P pager S section_list section Scrollbar reese G DESCRIPTION man formats and displays the on line manual pages This version knows about the HANPATH and HANDPAGER environment variables so you can have your own set s of personal man pages and choose whatever program you like to display the formatted pages If section is specified man only looks in that section of the manual You may also specify the or
312. n stuff Q amp A Q I want to edit some of the entries that I ve made in my diary What s the best way to do this A First you need to display the entire diary file Do this by selecting any date in the calendar and using the S command This will display the entire diary file If you don t edit the entire diary file you may inadvertently delete something that you ll need later After you make your changes you need to save the diary file with the Ctr1 X Ctr1 S command Q Is there an easy way to remind myself to change my contacts every three weeks A Use cyclic diary entries to keep track of events that occur on a regular basis but do not occur on the same day each month or week To create this type of entry select the first date on the calendar on which you want to set the event such as the day you started a new pair of contacts and then use the I1 C command The minibuffer will prompt you for a number of days For a 3 week interval type 21 You ll see a diary entry that looks something like this diary cyclic 21 11 6 1999 Change contacts Time Management with Emacs 283 Workshop Emacs may not look like the classic diary with the lock and key but it does make a suitable electronic substitute Use the Emacs calendar and diary to keep your life orga nized and to record your personal history To get yourself motivated stick around for the workshop Quiz 1 What is the quickest way to move to a date that is several
313. n the Info file To dis play a menu topic middle click the topic name You can use the middle button with the Node Next Prev and Up navigation tools at the top of the page to jump from page to page in the Info file and back and forth to the Directory node where you can middle click to select another topic Displaying Command Documentation The first Emacs command that was discussed in the last hour was the Ctr1 H T com mand When you pressed this series of keys the Emacs Tutorial appeared in a buffer window From that point you saw long lists of these commands that performed tasks such as moving the cursor editing text and working in text modes These commands were all shown as a series of keystrokes If you d like to know more about these commands you use the Describe Key command The Syntax for the Describe Key Command The following code shows how to find information about a command Ctr1 H K command key sequence lt SYNTAX where Ctr1 H K is the command that displays the help documentation and command key sequence is the command typed as a series of keystrokes for which you are requesting the documentation For example to view the documentation for the save command type the following Ctrl H K This displays the following in the minibuffer Find documentation for key Then type the key combination for the save command which is Ctrl X Ctrl S The documentation for the command shown in Figure 17 4 a
314. n top of it to Create the new page Page Path home authorwebsite resume html 4 Browse Page Title About Us E Page Author Coletta a _j Use Template 4 Browse lt Back gt Next amp Cancel EEES 5 If you want to use an image file for the page background select the Use back ground image option and then type the directory path and filename for the image that you want to use When you are satisfied with your choice click Next 6 You re now finished creating the page Click Finish and you ll see the new page added to the File tree as shown in Figure 14 5 FIGURE 14 5 4 Screem ox The Web page is added l File Edit Insert CVS Settings Help to the File tree and is Y ready for you to add xa FZ ean ella zou rrt content in the Editor a view area HTML gt HEAD gt TITLE gt About Us lt TITLE gt HEAD gt BODY bgcolor ffft text 000000 gt BODY gt HTML gt Save your work Site Bey F index html The new page Add content here Page structure every page in the Web site is saved There s no need to save each individual Remember to save your Web pages often When you click the Save button Zz page 228 Hour 14 Designing Web Pages Your site structure is complete and you ve added a few pages It s time to start adding content to those pages To display the page to which you
315. n your Linux computer The first place to start is with the Linux Mandrake distribution CD ROM Unless you elected to install all the components there are still many programs that are not loaded on your machine Another place to look is on the CD for other Linux distributions Not all Linux dis tributions are created equally Some distributions will have software that other dis tributions do not have or have a more up to date version of that software The most complete list of packages available for Linux can be found on the Internet There are many Web sites that make Linux applications available for downloading If you want to find Linux software on the Internet check out the Web sites for the various Linux distributions or look up the Free Software Foundation www gnu org Answers 361 Hour 10 Quiz 1 What is the first task you should perform before you start building a network First you will need to document every piece of equipment workstation printer scanner that will be attached to the network Collect as much information about each component as you can The more you know about your equipment the better you can plan a network After you know which pieces of equipment will be used on the network you can use this information to draw up a plan for the proposed network 2 Why is it important to design your network on paper before you begin the actual creation of the network One of the major obstacles to overcome whe
316. ncluded on the CD ROM by special permission from their authors This software is provided as is without warranty of any kind either expressed or implied including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Neither the publisher nor its dealers or distributors assume any liability for any alleged or actual damages arising from the use of this program Some states do not allow for the exclusion of implied warranties so the exclusion may not apply to you What s on the Disc The companion CD ROM contains Linux Mandrake 7 0 GPL Edition Installing Linux Mandrake from the CD ROM 1 2 3 Insert the disc in the CD drive Restart your computer You may need to change your BIOS settings to boot from the CD ROM Typically you enter your BIOS setup program with the F2 or DEL keys during the boot sequence Make your changes if any and exit the BIOS setup utility If your CD drive is capable of booting from CD ROMs you will boot into the Linux Mandrake setup program Follow the onscreen prompts to complete the installation Installing Linux Mandrake from a Boot Floppy Disk ie 2 11 Using DOS or Windows format one 1 44MB floppy disk Copy two files from the CD ROM to a temporary location on your hard drive such as C TEMP D IMAGES BOOTNET IMG and D DOSUTILS RAWRITE EXE If your CD drive letter is not D substitute the drive letter that corresponds to yo
317. nd cd Change to another directory do not use a backslash chfn Change the finger information display chmod Change the access permissions for a file or directory chown Change the ownership of files and directories chsh Change the shell you are using control panel Launch a system administration tool cp Copy files dd Copy disk images df Display available free disk space dir List the contents of a directory dmesg List the startup messages du Display disk space used dump Make filesystem backups export Set environment variables in bash find Find that is search for files fdformat Low level format a floppy disk finger Look up information about users on a network free Display RAM and swap memory usage grep Find lines matching a specified pattern groupadd Use groups to manage files and workgroups groupdel Delete a group groups Display a list of groups gzip Compress and decompress files halt Shut down the computer system host Look up host information hostname Display the hostname for the system ifconfig Set up network interfaces Troubleshooting the Linux Mandrake Installation 43 Try This Command To Learn How To init Change the run level insmod Install modules kill Abort a system process less Launch a pager to view files and directories ln Create links between files or directories locate Locate files that match a certain pattern login Sign on to the system or switch users logout Sign out of the current user accou
318. nd you will see the beginnings of your new site in the File tree Site druid such as where the Web site will be published select Settings If you need to make any changes to the information you entered into the A Site 226 Hour 14 Adding Web Pages to Your Web Site Once you have built a structure for your Web site it is time to start adding pages It s pretty easy to insert pages into the site the Page druid does all the hard work for you The Page druid not only adds pages to your Web site but it can also set the text link and background color or image If your Web site will contain a large number of pages you may want to create a directory structure in which to store different types of pages For example if your site will contain information about your products a corporate profile and pages for your employees you may want to place each group in a separate subdirectory such as the following home username website products home username website profile home username website employees The use of subdirectories makes it easier to manage a large Web site by allowing you to place information in logical groupings You can use a file manager to create these subdi rectories For help using file managers go back to Hour 6 The Marvelous Mystical Filesystem Tour Lesson 14 3 Creating a New Web Page Part of building a structure for your Web site is to add the pages you want contained in the
319. ndar can be used to record appointments and set reminders so that you don t miss meetings to keep track of important dates such as birthdays and anniversaries and to help remind you of things you need to get done Before you start this hour you may want to read Hour 16 Text Processing with Emacs if you are not familiar with how Emacs works This hour helps you organize your time by introducing you to the Emacs calendar You learn how to e Flip through the months of the calendar and select dates e Look up holidays and moon phases e Keep a list of important dates and appointments e Set reminders so that you won t miss any meetings with the boss 274 Hour 18 Trying the Emacs Calendar You ll find that the Emacs calendar lacks the slick graphical interface found in some other calendar programs Don t let this keep you away The Emacs calendar can keep your life organized quite nicely and you ll get a chance to learn more about Emacs As you work through this next hour you learn how to use lots of commands for navigating around the calendar in addition to using the mouse And as we ve said before the more you use Emacs the more you ll find out about it and then you ll want to learn more Before you get started make sure Emacs or XEmacs is displayed on your computer screen Starting the Calendar The easiest way to get started is to display a three month calendar that includes the current month the previous mont
320. ndconfig introductory panel appears press Enter to start the probe Your soundcard will be probed and if one is found then the card will be displayed in the probe results If there is a card listed press Enter again The sound for your system is automati cally configured In most instances this will work quite well Because not all sound problems are treated equally here is a list of Web sites that you can visit to find free or commercial drivers for your sound card e 4Front Technologies supports the Open Sound System OSS 4Front Technologies provides commercial sound drivers for Linux at ww 4front tech com linux html If you are interested in free sound drivers go to www 4front tech com ossfree index html where you can download the Open Sound System Free drivers e Advanced Linux Sound Architecture ALSA at ww alsa project org ALSA is the official Linux group that is redesigning the Linux Sound System The Linux kernel will not be using OSS in the future but will be using ALSA drivers to control sound e If you are looking for a quick reference to the Linux Sound Subsystem try www uk linux org OSs e Creative Open Source page at opensource creative com provides Linux Soundblaster Live Emu10k1 device drivers the driver sources for Dxr2 cards and the driver and utility sources for AWE32 64 cards e Sculpscape information is provided by Ecasound at www wakkanet fi ecasound Ecasound is a multitrack audio processing tool I
321. ndow will disappear and the welcome mes sage and details about the server you chose will appear in the XChat window like the one shown in Figure 11 16 Read conversation thread FIGURE 11 16 Read the discussion or be brave and join in X Chat Windows UserModes Settings Scripts amp Plugins Post your response Type your response jaimie hello world Type a nice greeting and someone on the channel will say hello After that it s just like talking to someone on the bus 178 Hour 11 Summary In this hour you configured an Internet connection using a combination of LinuxConf and UserNet or using the KPPP dialer You learned how to get around the Internet with the Netscape Communicator suite of Internet applications You were also introduced to two other tools to enhance your Web experience XChat and gFTP There are other Internet tools and utilities that we did not mention here and we encourage you to try out others Q amp A Q My Internet connection doesn t seem to be working like it normally has in the past I d like to know if the problem is between my computer and my ISP s servers What can I do A You can use the ping command to verify that you are using the correct IP address for your ISP the time it takes for the ISP s servers to respond to your requests and if any data is lost in transmission When you are connected to your ISP type the following command ping c 5
322. ndows GUIs 60 63 focus policies changing 62 63 moving 62 property options setting 64 sizing 61 title bar buttons customizing 63 applications downloading 136 finding 130 138 installing 134 135 Gnome RPM 135 136 KPackage 136 138 multiple applications 138 management see package managers uninstalling KPackage 133 134 appointments Emacs calen dar 278 281 apropos command 41 Article document class KLyX 185 atd daemon 14 Auto Fill mode Emacs 253 254 background settings desktops 72 75 gradient backgrounds 73 74 solid color back grounds 72 wallpaper selecting 74 75 backing up files 120 126 backup tools 121 123 with CD Read Write drives 126 cross platform filing 124 126 DOS files 125 126 find command 120 121 with floppy disk drives 123 124 important files to back up 120 moving files to DOS partitions 125 Zip Jaz drives 126 backup tools 121 123 balancing accounts Check Book Balancer 215 217 base memory addresses 151 basic input output addresses 150 Blender 316 Blue Moon Rendering Tools 317 Book document class KLyX 185 Bootdisk screen installation program 28 BootMagic 30 Broadcast 2000 323 browsers Web browsers Netscape Navigator 169 buffer windows Emacs 247 248 bulleted lists KLyX creating 194 195 Co cables pass through parallel port cables 234 cabling 145 146 configuration 150 calendar Emacs 274 282 dates selecting
323. ne you need to collect all the data you have on your video card and monitor You should have all this data from your preparation in the first hour To open Xconfigurator you must be logged in as root Then perform these steps at the command line 1 Type Xconfigurator and press Enter The Choose a Monitor screen appears Here you have the opportunity to select your monitor from the list of monitors pre sented The important items that you need to know about your monitor are the scan rates and supported resolutions This information should be available in the moni tor s manual If you don t know the refresh rates and resolutions select a generic monitor from the Monitor list look for one that most closely resembles yours Select the monitor description with parameters that you know your monitor can fit into S In other words if as a Windows machine your machine is running a resolu tion of 1024x768 with 16 bits per pixel color thousands of colors and a ver tical refresh rate of 70Hz select the monitor description from the list that does just that 2 Use the arrow keys to highlight your monitor choice and then tab to OK and press Enter The Resolutions screen appears Here is where you select the resolution and color depth that is suitable for your monitor and that fits your needs The graphics used in the book were taken on a 15 inch monitor screen with a reso lution of 800x600 and an 8bpp color depth whi
324. ned that you can make desktop icons with this tool You may want to go a step further and learn how to create an entire desktop theme Here are a few Web sites that will get you started x themes org gtk themes org kde themes org 2 You may have created pictures with the various graphics programs covered in this book Or you may have a collection of images you ve downloaded off the Web If your collection is growing large take some time to organize these files into a direc tory structure You can use a program like GQview or you can work in a file manager Qrt 1 qs ay p N a Y PART VII Sit Back and Have Some Fun Hour 23 Multimedia 24 Games A N A 1 V aay 2 CNN N a A HOUR 23 Multimedia You re almost at the end of a long 24 hour stretch So put on some tunes and shake a leg If you re the couch potato type pop in a video and stretch back In this hour you learn about a few of the GNU Linux multimedia players If you enjoy listening to your favorite melodies while you work experiment with the different CD players You ll see three CD players at the top of this hour If you share music and video files with friends or download these files from the Internet there are players for most of the popular file formats And if you like to sing along with the music but are unsure of the words check out the karaoke player Sit back and enjoy the music while you learn how
325. nf to make the changes by clicking the Activate the changes button 106 Hour 7 Working with User Accounts Each person who will be using the computer needs to be assigned a user account This user account consists of a username which can be some form of their name or a made up name and a password Each user then receives a personal home directory on the sys tem for personal file storage This also allows users to set up the desktop as they wish within their user accounts and they don t have to use the settings of other users or change other users settings What do you do if users want to share files The users need to be organized into workgroups whereby each workgroup has a common job task or com mon need to share specific information You manage these workgroups by creating group accounts and then assigning users to the appropriate group After user and group accounts are set up directories and files can be created and usage permissions can be set Adding Users to the System Your first task is to create an account for each user who does not already have an account on the system For each user account you need the full name of the user a login name and a password Use a login name that will be easy for your user to remember and choose a password that will be hard to decipher Passwords should be a combination of upper and lowercase letters numbers and characters There are a few characters that you cannot use and
326. nfiguring a server e Several Linux distributions have added an X configuration tool of their own as a part of their distribution Red Hat has Xconfigurator which you will meet in a minute SUSE has SaX and Caldera has a more automated configuration for mouse and video that occurs during the initial installation of OpenLinux The Linux Mandrake distribution includes the Red Hat configuration utility for X Window called Xconfigurator Xconfigurator has its own user interface So even if you weren t able to get X working you can just type Xconfigurator on the command line you must be logged in as the root account and the graphical user interface for Xconfigurator will appear Xconfigurator works much like XF86Setup does It uses a pre configured XF86Config file that you modify by selecting hardware and options from lists and then the program makes a new XF86Config file and saves it to the proper directory In the Linux Mandrake distribution this is the etc X11 directory Xconfigurator will overwrite any XF86Config file you have in the etc X11 directory If you do not want to lose the configuration you have make a back up copy of your existing XF86Config file and rename it before you begin To do this you must be logged in as root On the command line type cp etc X11 XF86Config etc X11 XF86Config old 4 G 10 36 Hour 3 Lesson 3 1 Setting Up the X Server To begin configuring XFree86 on your machi
327. ng a Document Just when you think you re finished there s one last task you need to perform Before you send the document to the printer run the spell check utility To start the spell check save the file move the cursor to the beginning of the document and click Edit Spellchecker KLyX uses the ispell1 program to check each word in the document It displays unknown words in the Spellchecker dialog box shown in Figure 12 11 The spell check also suggests the correct word and displays it in the Replace text box If the spell check guessed correctly click the Replace word button and the next misspelled word will appear in the Unknown text box Document Processing with KLyX 201 FIGURE 12 11 3 richer Xf Check your spelling Unknown before you print docu Replace jitem Insert in personal dictionary Accept word in this session Ignore word Replace word Stop spellchecking 82 Close spellchecker ments Alternatives Word not found in dictionary Suggested replacement Other possible replacements Ignore selected Use replacement Create a new word and move on textin document dictionary entry You also have the option to select a different word from a list of possible matches If you click a word in the Alternatives list it will appear in the Replace text box If you don t see the correct word in the list make corrections to the text in the Replace text box Again click Replace word to
328. ng hours and frustrated writers And of course to our roosters for getting us up early in the morning so that we could start our workday bright eyed and bushy tailed xviii Sams Teach Yourself Linux Mandrake in 24 Hours Tell Us What You Think As the reader of this book you are our most important critic and commentator We value your opinion and want to know what we re doing right what we could do better what areas you d like to see us publish in and any other words of wisdom you re willing to pass our way As an Associate Publisher for Sams I welcome your comments You can fax email or write me directly to let me know what you did or didn t like about this book as well as what we can do to make our books stronger Please note that I cannot help you with technical problems related to the topic of this book and that due to the high volume of mail I receive I might not be able to reply to every message When you write please be sure to include this book s title and author as well as your name and phone or fax number I will carefully review your comments and share them with the author and editors who worked on the book Fax 317 581 4770 Email opsys mcp com Mail Mark Taber Associate Publisher Sams 201 West 103rd Street Indianapolis IN 46290 USA Introduction Why All the GNU Linux Hype Linux is a free UNIX clone that runs on personal computer systems It provides users with an operating system that su
329. ng in your mailbox Checking for New Messages The first time you click the Get Msg button on the Messenger toolbar you ll be asked for the password to access your account After that you ll see a status dialog box that tells you how many messages are being downloaded and the percentage of download that is complete When Messenger is done checking your messages the new messages will appear in the Message List Getting on the Internet 173 Q Going too fast You can learn more about the different Communicator pro Y A grams by looking in the Help menus Netscape has some very good help AA 7 documentation Creating Web Pages The best way to share information is through a Web page or if you have a lot of information to share an entire Web site Netscape Composer is a full fledged graphical what you see is what you Il get with the same monitor settings WYSIWYG HTML editor You can insert the usual HTML elements into a Composer page hyperlinks images lines and tables Oh yeah there s the text which is the most important part of any Web page You can format text in the same way you format text in most word processing programs font style and size paragraph alignment and formatting and colorful text Composer even has a rainbow up its sleeve And don t forget use the spell checker before you use Composer to publish your pages to a Web server The fastest way to start using Composer is to dow
330. ng programs that you use frequently You can customize the panel by adding and deleting icons e Both KDE and GNOME have the capability to use multiple desktop areas The vir tual desktop icons provide a means to navigate between desktops e The GNOME pager works the same as the KDE taskbar Any open applications and files are shown as icons on the pager Lesson 4 4 Finding Useful Applications and Utilities Many of the applications and utilities that were installed with Linux Mandrake are avail able in the KDE and GNOME menus Take a few minutes to look through the menus and find out how much fun you re going to have once you get started This lesson is easy just look through the list of menus and open a few programs that you d like to explore 1 Click the Application Starter button in KDE or the Main Menu button in GNOME to see the list of menus 2 Move the mouse pointer to a menu item that has an arrow to the right You ll see a list of applications 3 Click the application that you d like to explore Voila You ve just opened your first program Desperately Seeking Help When you need an all purpose reference for the KDE and GNOME interfaces check out each one s respective Help browser Each of these Help browsers works differently and contains different information The next two lessons show you how to access each Help browser and introduce you to the different areas of information that each Help browser
331. nge a few things about the way Messenger looks Follow these steps 1 Click Edit Preferences to display the Netscape Preferences panel The Mail amp Newsgroups category will be selected 2 In the main panel of the Mail amp Newsgroups category you can change how Messenger displays messages and how Messenger responds to actions that you perform 3 Click the Identity option You ll need to type your name as you want it to appear in the message headers and your email address This information is displayed to the recipients of your messages 4 Click the Mail Servers option to display the panel shown in Figure 11 10 Type the name of the outgoing mail server used by your ISP in the Outgoing mail SMTP server text box Outgoing mailserver Incoming mail server Figure 11 10 Netscape Preferences Provide Messenger Eteo with the names of the Mail Servers Specify server for mail servers where it needs peee to deposit and pick up 7 Mail amp Newsgroups 7 Identity your mail Mail Servers Noe OERRES To set server properties such fs checking for Delete Addressing new messages automatically felect a server Messages and then click Edit Set as Default Copies and Folders Formatting m Outgoing Mail Server Return Receipts A A Disk Space Outgoing mail SMTP server mail myisp net D Roaming User D Composer D Advanced Use Secure Socket Layer SSL or TLS for outgoing messages Outgoing mail server user name
332. nge the number of characters that display on a line By default Emacs is set to display 70 characters per line To change this use the command Ctrl U number Ctr1 X F Where number is the number of characters that you want to appear on a line Q How do I use Emacs to search for text and replace it with text I specify A You can use two methods to get to the search and replace command From the menu select Edit Replace or use the Alt command Both of these display the following in the minibuffer Query replace Type the text you want replaced and press Enter The minibuffer will contain the following Query replace text with Type the text that you want to use as a replacement and press Enter Emacs will search the buffer for the text and when it finds the first instance you ll see the fol lowing in the minibuffer Query replacing text with text You ll also see that the first occurrence of the text is highlighted in the buffer If you want to replace the text type Y and press Enter Type N if you don t want to replace the highlighted text Emacs will then find the next occurrence Type to stop the search and replace Text Processing with Emacs 263 Q Can Emacs display the cursor position as a line number instead of as a per centage of the document A Use the Alt X line number mode command This will display the line in which the cursor is located in the modeline You can also display the column where the cu
333. ngs you can come back here and do a little tweaking For those who weren t as fortunate and setup did not automatically configure X Window here is where you learn how to do it for yourself Troubleshooting the Linux Mandrake Installation 35 Setting up Xfree86 on your Linux Mandrake system is a simple matter in most cases but if you happen to have newer graphics hardware or if you want to tune your X Window installation to get the best performance from your hardware you will need to know how to write the configuration file XF86Config for the X Server that fits your hardware needs There is something to be said for knowing how to do this from scratch and one day you may want to try doing it that way However since there are probably a large number of people using Linux and most all other UNIX like opertating systems who do not know how to do this from scratch several configuration programs are available to help you with configuring the X server as follows e XF86Setup is a graphical program provided by the XFree86 team It is a very use ful program that first starts a minimum VGA X server It allows you to select from lists for your mouse display type and other options The XF86Setup program then writes the XF86Config file for you e ConfigXF86 is an older text based configuration program that asks you questions and then generates the configuration file from your answers This program some times works when others will not for co
334. ni HOWTO found in the usr doc HOWTO mini directory or at www linuxdoc org HOWTO mini Upgrade htm1 provides a solid plan for backing up your Linux system N N N I fe SSS Important Files to Back Up The files that you generally make changes to are the system configuration files found in etc Other configuration files for programs you have installed should also be backed up You should also archive some directories the usr lib and usr X11R6 1lib X11 direc tories the latter because it contains your X Window configuration files If you built or upgraded your own kernel you should also back up your kernel source files found in usr src linux As you probably remember we have been nagging you all along to keep a notebook that documents the changes made to your Linux system and prob lems you ve encountered along with the solutions Well here is yet another time where keeping track of what you do and writing down what you back up can be a big help if something unfortunate happens to your system Ap G 10 You should back up the home directories for each user These directories are found in home except for root which is found in root If you configured your Linux system to receive e mail you may want to back up the incoming mail files for your users They are found in var spool mail Using the find Command find is certainly one of the more useful commands for any files
335. ning CBB Check Book Balancer 206 diary file Emacs calendar 277 files Emacs 250 252 Kppp dialer 167 Linuxconf 162 UserNet 165 programs 383 optical fiber cabling 146 organizing Web sites Screem 224 225 outlines Emacs 260 261 overheating hardware prob lems 144 SS package managers 130 Gnome RPM 131 installed applications finding 131 132 installing applications 135 136 starting 131 Web find utility 138 KPackage 132 133 installing applications 136 138 starting 132 uninstalling applications 133 134 packages downloading 136 finding 138 installed package list 353 installed packages finding 131 132 installing 134 135 Gnome RPM 135 136 KPackage 136 138 multiple packages 138 uninstalling KPackage 133 134 Page druid Screem 226 227 page layout KLyX 184 186 pages numbering KLyX 196 197 panels GUIs 58 60 application launchers adding 59 icon screen notes creating 59 60 icons rearranging 64 moving around the desktop 58 59 paragraphs aligning Emacs 259 KLyX changing appearance 192 customizing 192 193 formatting with styles 191 margin notes 192 partitioning hard drives 23 Disk Defragmenter 23 24 mount points assigning 26 partitions DOS moving files to 125 Partitions to Format screen installation program 26 27 pass through parallel port cables 234 password protecting screen savers 75 76 passwords user accounts 106
336. nload a template from the Netscape Web site and edit it so that it contains your text and pictures And to tell you the truth you don t have to use a Netscape template you can use the information in Lesson 11 3 to copy any Web page you find on the Internet and use it in Composer Lesson 11 3 Using Templates to Create Web Pages Before you attempt this lesson make sure you are connected to the Internet Then follow these steps 1 Click on File New Page From Template to display the Netscape Web Page Templates page in Navigator shown in Figure 11 12 In the middle of the page you ll see a list of templates 2 Browse through the list of templates until you find one that closely matches the Web page you d like to design To select a template click the link to display the template in the browser window If you don t like the template click the browser s Back button to return to the template list 3 With the selected template displayed in the browser window click File Edit Page This opens the template in a new Composer window as shown in Figure 11 13 174 Hour 11 http home netscape com browsers templates FIGURE 11 12 File Edit Help Choose a Web page Taga ea ae template thar fiis your needs and style j Netscape Web Page Templates Communicator View Go Netscape Publishing Suite Composer ye tollc age t t arting point to al u te you
337. nt lpc Manage the printer queue lpq Display the printer queue lpr Print files ls List the contents of a directory lsmod Display the loaded modules make Compile and maintain programs makewhatis Build the make database man Display the manual pages mcd Change to a directory on a DOS disk mcopy Copy files to a DOS disk mdel Delete files from a DOS disk mdeltree Delete directories from a DOS disk mdir List the contents of a directory on a DOS disk mformat Format a DOS disk mkdir Make a new directory mkswap Set up a swap device partition more Launch a pager to view files and directories mount Access mount a filesystem mv Move or rename files netcfg Launch a network configuration tool netstat Display the status of network connections passwd Change a user s password ping Check for a host on a network printtool Configure a printer continues TABLE 3 4 continued 44 Hour 3 Try This Command To Learn How To ps pstree restore rm rmdir rmmod rpm set startx su tar top touch umount uname unzip updatedb uptime useradd userdel usermod whatis whereis which who whoami Display the status of running processes Display the entire process tree Restore a backup see dump Remove files permanently Remove directories permanently Remove loaded modules Manage RPM packages install and upgrade packages Temporarily change environment variables Start the X Window System Switch to the sup
338. nt file size Select a printer driver W Suppress Headers OK Cancel 3 Click the Select button to open the Configure Filter dialog box shown in Figure 15 3 Figure 15 3 Configure Filter A my Driver Description Al Either select a printer Bee ai Spin medres Driver for the HP LaserJet 4 printer It also may support the 0 n that closely matches Epson Stylus 800 amp ESC P 2 printers Persas hee aA ya e ee S l Epson Stylus Color UP Z yours or select one HP DesignJet 650C Resolution Paper Size j HP DeskJet 1600 series that youn printer can HP DeskJet 400 500C 520 540C emulate HP DeskJet 500 HP DeskJet S50C S60C 6xxC series HP DeskJet 670 680 690 series HP DeskJet 850 855 870 1100 series HP DeskJet DeskJet Plus HP Deskjet 550C UP HP LaserJet HP LaserJet 4 dithered Printing Options Select a printer ouHP LaserJet 45 6 series _ 4 4 Send EOF afer job to eject page HP LaserJet III with Delta Row Compression 3 Fix stair stepping text HP LaserJet IlI with duplex capability g HP LaserJet Ild lip Ili with TIFF compression Fast text printing non PS printers only HP LaserJet Plus w 8 yy 4 x 2 1 pages per output page HP PaintJet Margins in pts 1 72 of inch OK Gal nel Right Left IB Top Bottom f18 Extra GS options Set print defaults Printing and Faxing Documents 237 4 Scroll through the Printer Type lis
339. nux system you need to check the hardware compatibility list and make sure you have the additional drivers and software to make these peripherals work with The Gimp System Requirements Since The Gimp can handle any graphics job from creating a simple illustration to edit ing a high resolution photo scan and handling pre press production it is important to know just how much hardware is required so that you can use The Gimp to fit your needs At a minimum The Gimp will run on a 486 66 DX2 computer with 16MB RAM and a 40MB Linux swap partition You will also need space on your hard drive to work with image files Ideally you should keep a minimum of 200MB hard drive space available A computer with this configuration can produce simple illustrations and handle low resolution and small file size photo images But be warned The Gimp may perform slowly in this environment CR it Although The Gimp will run with an 8 bit 256 color display you may not DA always like the results The Gimp prefers a color depth of 16 bit or greater Like many software applications if you want more performance get more RAM More RAM also means larger swap space which means that you can create larger images with less drain on your system Web graphics work requires a beefier computer A Pentium 133 with 32MB RAM and a 64MB swap partition will perform admirably Most home users and many small busi nesses will find this setup adequat
340. o gram with the image displayed You can find GQView in the GNOME main menu under Graphics or by typing gqview in an X terminal window When GQview appears on your screen the contents of your home directory appear in the Directory List and the File List as shown in Figure 22 3 FIGURE 22 3 4 GQview mandrake jpg c ol Sx File Edit View Help ee ME BEG ie gt Use GQview to man Resize image preview age your graphics home author files home author Display thumbnails Desktop in file list nsmail wasna Preview Directory 22FIG01 pcx 22FIG02 pcx fishanim pni File List Mt vA 4 files 1 1024 x 768 16562 bytes 1 74 Select file to preview Graphics Viewers and Utilities 329 Navigate through the Directory List to display the files with which you want to work in the File List When you click one of the filenames in the File List the image appears in the preview pane The File menu contains the commands for managing your image files You can create new directories in your user account in which to store images You can then make a copy of any file on the system and place it in this new directory You can also move files from one directory to another or delete them from the system If you d like to watch a slideshow of all the image files in a directory click A View Toggle Slideshow To use another graphics program as an external editor all you have to do is open the
341. o the program s configuration Click Yes to create the directory and to display KLyX on your screen You ll notice that the KLyX window looks very much like other word processing pro grams There s an assortment of menus buttons and other screen elements And there s the familiar work area where you enter and format text tables and images Before you begin using KLyX take a look at Figure 12 1 and familiarize yourself with the different screen elements Menu bar Create anew Work area Table Title bar General document toolbar FIGURE 12 1 ltl ox n Eile Edit Layout Inseft Options Documents Help o o Z KLX contains features aam oja PERS mal im SE Ke wo similar to popular La p she n T word processing pro Z Portrait IOa SF EZZ MeH E grams zl Math toolbar Move or hide toolbars Bj Status bar iyx document lyx Changed Document Processing with KLyX 183 e The Title bar displays the name of the document and contains the window controls that minimize maximize and close the window e The Menu bar contains all the commands that the program can execute You may find that the menu commands will work when sometimes a toolbar button won t e The General toolbar contains buttons that execute file commands such as open save preview and print move text around in a document cut copy and paste format text and paragraphs and insert images and tables If you w
342. o you would type emacs FIGURE 6 3 Select File 5 Enter a filter here to select files You ll need to type in the panel view with enough information in Boia order to make a close png will select all png images emacs 4 2 OK X Cancel match 3 Click OK The file manager will search through the filesystem All of the files that match the criteria will be selected in the file manager window Managing Files and Directories As you begin working with the applications that were packaged with Linux Mandrake you ll need space to save your work These files can be saved in your user account To make your filing system more organized you can create directories and move files between directories Creating Directories You could save all of your files in your home directory but after a while things would get crowded and difficult to manage If you are trying to keep track of your work like The Marvelous Mystical Filesystem Tour 99 spreadsheet files graphics or word processor files you can create a folder subdirectory for files by type of file or perhaps you might want client folders for all your projects for clients To create a new subdirectory select the directory in the tree view under which you want to create the subdirectory In Midnight Commander select File New Directory from the menu In KFM select File New Folder This brings up a dialog box All you need to do is type a name for th
343. oaxial cabling 146 color Emacs 259 260 color picker KIllustrator 298 color schemes desktops 76 colorizing drawing objects KIllustrator 305 307 command documentation dis playing 268 commands apropos command 41 Describe Function 270 Describe Key 268 displaying last 100 commands entered Emacs 271 emacs 246 Emacs calendar commands 275 276 282 cursor commands 255 256 edit commands 257 file commands 90 93 find command backing up files 120 121 gimp 290 gnorpm 131 kpackage 132 Linux commands 42 44 ls command 41 man command 41 mkdir command 93 94 ping command 178 rm command 94 rmdir command 94 tar 122 123 Communicator Netscape 169 174 Composer 173 174 Messenger 170 172 Navigator 169 Components to Install screen installation program 27 computer user manuals 17 computers turning off 31 Configure Filter dialog box 236 Configure Paper Format dialog box KLyX 185 configuring KVoice 239 network cables 150 printers 234 237 local printers 236 237 Red Hat Linux Print System Manager print tool 235 testing parallel port con figurations 234 sound 37 38 sound cards 343 video 34 37 45 X Windows 34 37 ConfigXF86 35 X server setting up 36 37 Xconfigurator 35 37 45 XF86Config file 35 XF86Setup 35 ConfigXF86 35 connections Internet connec tions Point to Point Protocol PPP 160 167 169 troubleshooting 178 cpio utility 123 Create Polygon tool
344. oe wanted to change from his home directory to the books subdirectory he would type cd books at the command line and press Enter His command prompt would change to show the new working directory as follows Joe localhost books If Joe were to use the pwd command he would find that he is now working in the home Joe books directory All this will work as long as the subdirectory or file you want is in the directory structure below your working directory If you specify a file that is in another directory Linux won t be able to find it unless you use its absolute filename and specify the whole directory path filename on one command line The Linux command line editor sees line wraps as end of line characters and will not finish reading the part of the command that continues on the second line The solution use the slash character at the end of each line that continues to a second line a When working with long filenames you may not be able to get the whole PF Lesson 6 2 Moving Around the Filesystem You now have three commands in your arsenal that you can use to fight through the filesystem maze Let s use these commands to go to the usr directory This directory contains some useful documentation about many of the programs you ll find with the Linux Mandrake distribution Once again you ll need to open an X terminal window for this lesson The Marvelous Mystical Filesystem Tour 93 1 To go from
345. of other options Follow along and create a simple line 1 Click the Pencil tool button to select it 2 Click the foreground color in the color picker to display the Color Selection dialog box shown in Figure 19 3 Figure 19 3 44 Color Selection Z Choose colors for lines fills and gradi ents from the Color Selection dialog box e T vG P N fies ve EC 34 Revert to ld Color Select a shade Pick a color 3 Click and drag the slider in the color bar to select a color The various shades of the color from darkest to lightest appear in the area on the left of the color bar 4 Click the color shade you want to use for the line Notice that the foreground color in the color box changes to the shade you selected 5 Click File Dialogs Brushes to display the Brush Selection dialog box shown in Figure 19 4 FIGURE 19 4 4 Brush Selection TERA lt X A JA Guitar 72x26 d Mode Normal zi PR Opacity Select from a variety of brush sizes and patterns Set transparency Select a brush 6 Click the brush style that you want to use and change the opacity and spacing options if needed 7 Draw the line on the canvas Click and hold the pointer over the place where you want to start the line move the pointer to the end of the line and then release the mouse button 294 Hour 19 Enhancing Photographs Because your photographs don t always turn out just ex
346. old the mouse pointer over the button A description will appear in the minibuffer The buffer is the area in which you work with files and applications Each open file and application is contained in a separate buffer Figure 16 1 shows one buffer dis played in the XEmacs window A window can be split so that multiple buffers can be viewed at one time Think of the modeline as a status bar The modeline tells you the name of the file contained in the buffer and whether changes to the buffer have been saved The minibuffer is the Emacs command line If Emacs thinks you are typing a com mand the command will appear in the minibuffer The minibuffer also prompts you to enter information that may be needed to complete the command 248 Hour 16 two button mouse here s the deal click the right and left mouse buttons Emacs assumes you are using a three button mouse So if you are using a A simultaneously when told to click the middle mouse button Switching Between Multiple Buffers Every time you open a file the file is placed in a buffer The buffer keeps track of any changes that may have been made to the file while it is in the buffer The buffer will store the changes but you need to save the files to make the changes permanent When you have several files open you can use the Buffer menu to display a buffer when you need it When you are finished working with a file in a buffer save the file and then c
347. olumns that you need You can add rows and columns later by using the Add Row and Add Column buttons on the Tables toolbar 200 Hour 12 z M S n SLF Rows are added below the row in which the cursor is placed and columns S amp a are added to the right of the cursor 2 Enter text in each of the cells While you re at it format the text as well You can use many of the character and paragraph formatting styles that you ve seen earlier in this chapter 3 Insert any graphic images that you want to use into the table and resize the images as needed 4 If you need to change the width of any columns click in the column that you want to adjust and click the Width of Column button on the Tables toolbar This button displays a dialog box where you enter the width of the column The column is resized and the other columns retain their original size 5 Now it s time to decide whether you want a border around the outside edge of the table You also can add or remove lines between the cells at this time 6 To merge two or more cells select the cells to be merged and click the Multicolumn button on the Tables toolbar 7 To align the text within a cell place the cursor in the cell and click either the Align Left Align Center or Align Right button on the Tables toolbar 8 Make adjustments to your table until you have a table that conveys your informa tion and is well organized and designed Spell Checki
348. om Screensaver choice Every time you turn around you ll see a new assortment of lines boxes and other objects moving around your screen In KDE you can use the X screensaver choice Q I m using GNOME and I ve changed the window borders to a color I like but I don t like the way the elements such as options buttons and text appear inside the window Do I have any recourse A Yes you do Open the GNOME Control Center and select Desktop Theme Selector There are 11 themes from which to choose When you click one of the available themes a preview will appear at the bottom of the Control Center If you want to try the different window elements you can play with them in the preview area If you like the way Microsoft Windows displays elements select the Redmond95 theme Workshop Time for another pop quiz and after the quiz we ll hand out some extra credit assign ments We covered a large area of the desktop and it s time to see how well you followed along Don t worry we won t be grading papers today Changing Your View of the Desktop 81 Quiz 1 Where do you find the navigation controls for the virtual desktops and how do you move from desktop area to desktop area 2 When does it make sense to use sticky windows 3 What options do you have when you want to change the desktop background Exercises 1 You ve probably used some of the background wallpaper images that were installed with Linux Mandrake You c
349. ompatibility FAQ to see whether your hardware is listed there You can find the hardware compatibility list on the Linux Mandrake Web site at http www linux mandrake com en fhard php3 There s also the Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO at http www Linuxdoc org HOWTO Hardware HOWTO html You can also seek information from the distribution support page For current informa tion on hardware that Linux Mandrake supports see the Macmillan support Web page at http www linuxcare com mcpsupport comp_linux epl Getting Ready for the Installation Now that you have collected information about your hardware and thought about how you will be using your Linux Mandrake machine it is time to decide how you want to install Linux Mandrake on your system The following is a description of three suggested ways that you can install Linux Mandrake Preparing for the Installation 19 e As a standalone GNU Linux machine e As a dual boot machine with Linux Mandrake installed on a separate hard drive e As a dual boot machine with Linux Mandrake installed on a shared hard drive The tasks to be performed for each of the three methods of installation are listed in Table 1 4 TABLE 1 4 Installation Tasks Task Linux Only Separate Drive Shared Drive Back up files x x x Create boot disks X x x Create rescue disks x x x Defragment hard drive x Install Linux Mandrake x x x Summary During this hour you learned how to prepare your computer
350. omputer and the others may not be as enthusiastic as you are about Linux in the beginning Those that want to boot their favorite operating system can do so without hassle and not be bothered by the presence of another operating system at all In many cases it is the function that the computer is being used for that is the determin ing factor about whether to set up Linux to share the drive with Windows or some other operating system Summary In this hour you learned how to prepare your computer to install the Linux Mandrake operating system You installed the Linux operating system and set up lilo to make yours a dual boot computer In Hour 3 you finish configuring your Linux installation with some information about configuring XFree86 and configuring sound along with an introduction to the Linux man pages where you can find information and help about many of the applications and utili ties in Linux Installing Linux Mandrake 31 Q amp A Q How do I turn off my computer A After you log off your user interface and are at the command line type shutdown h now The three arguments in the command tell the computer what it needs to know what shutdown how halt when now The system will shut itself down and you can power off To get a list of the command options for the shutdown command type shutdown Q I m exhausted after installing Linux Mandrake but I m still excited and I want to surf the Web on my Windows machine Are
351. on list Here is a descrpition list N Primitive man must from a very early period have observed that the sun gives head and light and Description list that the moon and stars seem to give light only and no heat The law of universal terrestrial gravitation was one great scientific law which must hdve forced itself upon the attention of primitive man a LyX test lyx Changed Nest list items To nest items in the list select the items to be nested and click the Change A Environment Depth button Using Headers and Footers One way to keep long documents in order is by using headers and footers Headers and footers display the same information on each page of the document Headers appear at the top of the page and footers appear at the bottom Both are located between the margin and the edge of the page 196 Hour 12 If you are using one of the document templates the template may or may not already contain a preformatted header You can use this default header or you can change to one of the other header formats provided by KLyX To change to a different heading style open the Layout menu and select Document The Document Layout dialog box contains several heading styles in the Pagestyle drop down list see Figure 12 9 Lesson 12 5 Numbering Pages The easiest way to keep a long document in order is to use automatic page numbering in either the header or the footer of a document In this lesson y
352. onal files You can also create areas where two or more users can share files These directories can have permissions so that multiple users can work with and make changes to the file or with different permissions set may have only the ability to read the file All this is done using the user and group accounts and must be performed by the root account better known as the superuser or system administrator It s a tough job but you ll have the help of Linuxconf to maintain your list of users and groups 104 Hour 7 After you ve set up user and group accounts you ll need to create directories in which users can share files From there users can assign ownership and permissions to files that are used by the group In addition to maintaining user and group accounts you ll want to maintain the health of your computer Over the following hour you learn what it s like to be a system administrator by performing these tasks e Create accounts for users and assign users to groups e Share files with users in a workgroup e Gather information about the computer system e Use the Time Machine to change the computer clock Configuring Accounts with Linuxconf One of the utilities that you will see again and again through the course of this book is Linuxconf Linuxconf is a graphical system configuration tool With Linuxconf you can set up networking either a small computer network or a dial up connection work with user and group account
353. one places to be visited birthdays and anniversaries or what you ve done Create a diary file in Emacs and write to your heart s content The diary file stores your thoughts appointments and important dates Emacs can search the diary to help you find a specific event in the volumes of words that you ve stored away For those that need a gentle reminder that it s time to leave for a dentist appointment Emacs can take the place of the string you keep tied around your pinky finger Lesson 18 1 Starting Your Diary The first time you make an entry in the diary you ll also create a file in which all your diary entries appointments and reminders are stored This file is actually just in the buffer until you add something to the buffer and then save the file This lesson shows you how to start a diary file add a simple diary entry and then save the file Follow these steps 1 Display the month in the calendar that contains the date for which you want to create a diary entry 2 Click with the middle mouse button or if you don t have a middle mouse button click the left and right buttons simultaneously on the date you want to create the diary entry A menu will appear 3 Click Insert diary entry A new window will appear in the top of the frame and will be named diary The date you selected will appear in the diary buffer You ll also notice that there is a blank space between the date and the cursor There must a
354. one that is the parent of all of the other directories is called the root directory and is represented by a forward slash Everything else grows out of it branching like a tree with all of the directories and subdirectories forming the limbs and branches Directory names are like filenames and they can use the same characters numbers and symbols The way that you can tell the difference between a filename and a directory name the slash character is used to separate directories and files If there is nothing in front of the slash the slash signifies the root directory Directories contained within other directories are called subdirectories The relationship between the two directories is expressed as a parent child relationship Your user home directory is one of these branches it starts at root and all users have a subdirectory within the home directory For example in the path home Joe home is obviously a subdirectory Since the slash character has nothing preceding it this indicates the root directory and so home is shown as a subdirectory of the root directory You know this because of the slash character usage During this hour you ll explore the filesystem along with our imaginary user Joe Joe s home directory is located at home Joe As you look at Joe s filing system you may notice that he s a bit ahead of you He needed to set up a few examples Joe has created a 8 8 Hour 6 directory
355. only the uncleared transactions will appear Lesson 13 6 Reconciling an Account It s that time of the month again the bank statement has arrived in the mail Better make sure that your records and the bank s records agree before you go on that next shopping spree Follow these steps to do so 1 Open the account that you want to balance and click the Balance button to bring up a list of uncleared transactions 2 Enter the statement ending balance You may want to make sure that the statement starting balance in CBB and on your statement match 3 Double click those transactions that appear on the bank statement An asterisk will appear to the left of each transaction that you have marked as cleared Also as you select transactions the difference amount will change as shown in Figure 13 11 FIGURE 13 11 EEE IETS The Difference amount Statement Ending Balance e000 Ending balance on statement is reduced as you clear Debits 500 00 Credits 1100 00 Difference 0 00 Account reconciled transactions from the Chk Date Description Amount j 10 01 99 Begin Balance 500 00 register 10 26 99 XYZ Company 100 00 10 26 99 Vacation 2000 500 00 1521 10 26 99 Henry Rossman 500 00 Select cleared 1522 10 26 99 Super Big Marke 66 87 transactions 7 Refresh Update Dismiss 4 When all the transactions have been selected click the Update button The Balance window will close and you
356. ons multimedia html Q Ihave been interested in Linux but I haven t seen any applications that are suitable for my business I produce TV commercials and need a professional quality video editing software program Do you have any suggestions A If you aren t in a hurry the folks at the Free Film Project are trying to organize the Linux community to create a commercial quality film studio Their goal is to cre ate a suite of utilities that will produce manage design and publish movies and animations Information about the Free Film Project can be found at www gnu org software ffp ffp html and www geocities com ResearchTriangle Facility 6309 index html You may also want to check out Broadcast 2000 at heroine linuxbox com bcast2000 html This program will capture render edit compose mix and master movies and sound Workshop Did you have some fun during the past hour Hopefully you found a few multimedia applications that started your creativity spinning Quiz 1 Which types of software applications create moving pictures 2 What is animation 3 What is the difference between warping and morphing Exercises 1 Many of the programs covered in this hour have an equivalent program that runs on the Windows operating system See whether you can determine the Windows look alike for any of these programs that you d like to explore Using help docu mentation from these Windows programs can provide a good foundation for lear
357. onsider yourself a Web traveler give your downloading skills a try Here s how to install Linux software that you find on the Internet _ Before you begin this lesson you need an Internet connection Turn to Y I Hour 11 Getting on the Internet if you need to create a dial up connec pone tion You also need to be logged into the root account 1 Open your favorite Web browser and navigate to rufus w3 org Here you ll find more applications than you could possibly need When you find one you like download it to your computer You can store it in a subdirectory of the root directory Managing Applications 2 Open the KFM file manager and navigate to the directory in which you stored the RPM file that you downloaded 3 Click the package that you downloaded KPackage opens with the Install Package panel showing in the left pane and the Properties sheet and File list for the package you have selected in the right pane see Figure 9 6 FIGURE 9 6 KDE knows when you want to load a package Download package file rootrpms Caled File Edit View Go Bookmarks Options Help te 6 BOE F amp Package information Location fievrootrpms gnumeric 0 38 6 1386 rpm E 4 kpackage 0X Eile Packages Options Cache Help AWAY SSS Properties File List Install Package name gnumeric summary A full featured spreadsheet for GNOME version 0 38 6 M Upgrade group Applications Productiv
358. onths Moving from Date to Date Before you can add diary information to a date such as appointments and birthdays or view other information for a specific date the date on the calendar must be highlighted You can move around the calendar by using the Arrow keys on the keyboard or the Page Up and Page Down keys An easier way is to use the commands found in Table 18 1 to travel through the days weeks months and years TABLE 18 1 Using Commands to Select a Date on the Calendar To Select This Time Period Use This Command Next day Ctrl F Previous day Ctrl B Beginning of the week Ctrl A End of the week Ctrl E One week forward Ctrl N One week backward Ctrl P Beginning of the month Alt A End of the month Alt E One month forward Alt One month backward Alt Beginning of the year Alt lt End of the year Alt gt One year forward Ctr1 X One year backward Ctrl X Go to a specified date G D Go to current date Period A Few Fun Features Before we get into the mundane calendar keeping tasks let s play around with the calen dar a bit There are ways to display holidays for a specific day or for a range of days Or if you need to know the phases of the moon so that you can plan your summer garden the calendar can give you those dates also 276 Hour 18 Displaying Holidays The Emacs calendar knows the dates of all holidays recognized in the United States the major religious holidays and the occurrence of solstice
359. ontrol software select this option and enter the path to the program If not click Next to move to the next screen 6 Type the address where your Web site host requires that you upload your Web pages in the Remote Address text box You also need to add the URL address from which your site can be accessed An example is shown in Figure 14 3 When you are finished click Next FIGURE 14 3 si Screem Site Druid ox Tell the Site druid where to upload your Web site on your ISP s Web server SCREEM Site Druid The Remote Address is the address that the site will be uploaded to Enter the url to view the site in the http entry area This can be used when previewing the page to see the effects of cgi scripts Or preprocessor results Remote Address frp myisp net http www myisp nev user lt q Back gt Next X Cancel 7 The next screen needs to know how you will be uploading your Web pages to the Web server Select the method required by your ISP from the Remote Method drop down list Many ISPs use FTP You will also need to enter the directory path in the Remote Path text box where the Web site is stored on your ISP s Web server Click Next when you are ready to move to the next step 8 Enter the username and password provided by your ISP that are needed to access the Web server so that you can upload your files Click Next when you are finished 9 Your site is ready to go Click Finish a
360. oon 503 itchy jaimie Coletta Witherspoon 504 jaimie Great lists BeroList 500 lists Existing user accounts ip ip 4 Ip mail mail 6 mail news news EJ news operator operator 11 root Quit Add Help Do not make changes Create a user account to system accounts 2 Click the Add button at the bottom of the Users accounts panel to display the User account creation window shown in Figure 7 3 The Base info tab should be selected This is where you keep information about how each user logs in FIGURE 7 3 User account creation At a minimum you need the user s full name a login name You must specify at least the name and the full name Base info Params Mail aliases Privileges F The account is enabled and a password Login name henry ______1 __ Account name group opt Supplementary groups Home directory opt Command interpreter opt bin bash User ID opt Accept User s real name Leave blank to use default directory name Create account and then assign a password Cancel _Del Tasks Help 3 Make sure that the The account is enabled option is selected 4 Type the Login name and the Full name first and last name of your new user Linuxconf will create a user directory automatically If you want the user s home directory to have a name other than the username type the directory path in the Home directory opt text box 108 Hour 7 5 Click
361. op area the window is stored Virtual desktop 1 Click a to see desktop 3 gaama sonm ws Desktop area buttons FIGURE 5 1 The virtual desktop buttons on the KDE panel Changing Your View of the Desktop 69 Virtual desktop 1 Tasklist button Pager settings button FIGURE 5 2 re ei he fe Momevautnor Gnome Help Browser Fri Oct os Esi Nj E Gi r E 01 44 PM The pager controls gt poa L _ navigation between virtual desktops in GNOME Lesson 5 1 Relocating Windows KDE has another method of moving and organizing windows into and out of different desktop areas Try these steps 1 Click the application window s Menu button and move the mouse pointer to the To desktop option A list of the desktop areas will appear as seen in Figure 5 3 FIGURE 5 3 E CD Payer Use the Window ac t lm vwx ore Menu in KDE to Move matching CDDB entry found move windows around desktop areas Sticky v One Close Two 2 Click the desktop where you want the window to be relocated The window will disappear from the current desktop area and will be moved to the selected desktop area 3 When you want to work with the window you moved click the corresponding vir tual desktop icon You ll see a different desktop area and the relocated window will be ready and waiting for you zM Can t remember where you stored a window Click either the application icon on the KDE taskbar the GNOME panel
362. opular games are now available for the Linux operating system This Web site shows some of them tp www mcp com resources operatingsys Keep track of frequently visited Web sites News amp Info Newsgroups MACMILLAN SUPPORT Quake The Offering Address Starter kit utilities book Quake Quake it Web page SUPPORT ditor Open New incident Support Ontions edi El Email Launch Communicator applications Web browser Checking Your Mailbox The email client used by Communicator is Messenger Messenger also handles news groups With Messenger you can send and receive email view attachments in the mes sage area and create folders in which to sort your mail You can even send messages that are rich in graphics and HTML formatting But please conserve the bandwidth Keep track of your friends Use the address book to store email and address information You can then use the address book to fill in the To field of a A new message Getting Started with Messenger When you first open Messenger you may be told that it cannot access your ISP s mail server You ll need to set up preferences So let s get that done and then we ll get on with the program Getting on the Internet 171 Lesson 11 2 Setting Messenger Preferences Messenger needs to know where to go to check your mail At the same time you may want to cha
363. or one of its many mirrors has all of the online Linux documents HOWTOs manuals and pointers to other sources of information Workshop Fixing computer problems is not any easy task and can at times be very frustrating But persevere some Linux problems take a few attempts before you get them corrected Here are a few exercises to help you reinforce your Linux troubleshooting knowledge Quiz 1 Why do most configuration problems occur in the Linux installation 2 Which sound standard does Linux support 3 If you want to read the Linux documentation on your computer but do not have access to a user interface how do you do this Exercises 1 Run Xconfigurator and change your screen resolution and color depth Remember to make a copy of the XF86Config file before you begin If you make a mistake you can always restore the backup configuration file and return to your original settings 2 As you progress though this book you ll find places where we show you how to use a program or utility to perform a task Some of these tasks can be performed using commands found in Table 3 4 For example in Hour 7 System Administration Tasks you learn how to use Linuxconf to create user accounts You can also do this from the command line by using the useradd command When you come upon one of these places where a command can do the same job as a program or utility test your skills by performing the same task but from the command lin
364. ore you begin entering text To make sure you are in the right mode look at the modeline The editing mode should be Text Enriched 5 Type a few words in the buffer such as a title for your document 6 Save the buffer contents to the file You can use the Ctr1 X Ctr1 S command to do so Entering Text Now that Emacs knows that you want to work with formatted text you can begin typing in the buffer area As you type the cursor automatically moves to the next line in a para graph when you get to the right edge of the window At the end of each line you ll see a continuation character like the one shown in Figure 16 4 FIGURE 16 4 emacs mscript doc Type text in the buffer File Edit Apps Options Buffers Tools just as you do in a Seb FIB E LVAT The Complete Angler word processing pro by Izaak Walton gram The first day A Conference betwixt an Angler a Falconer and a Hunter each commendi ng his Recreation OZ Ks At rr End of line character Chapter I Piscator Venator Auceps Piscator You are well overtaken Gentlemen A good morning to you both I have stretched my legs up Tottenham Hill to overtake you hoping yok ur business may occasion you towards Ware whither I am going this fine 2 fresh May morning Venator Sir I for my part shall almost answer your hopes for my pu rpose is to drink my morning s draught at the Thatched House in Hoddesdi en an
365. orking Usernet ae Don t close that terminal The UserNet interface closes if you close the X termi l nal window Instead minimize the terminal window to get it out of the way Don t close it until you log off the Internet and close the UserNet window UserNet displays all the PPP connections that are configured on your machine and avail able to the account you are using The example shown in Figure 11 5 displays a single PPP connection Other connections would be shown as ppp1 ppp2 and so on and would be displayed below ppp0 166 Hour 11 Figure 11 5 UserNet EEIE When you don t need Toggle Status interface info to worry about keeping track of your Internet time try UserNet pppo Connection status Turn connection on and off To the right of each PPP connection button you ll see a Status button When you first open UserNet the Status button should be red This means that you are not connected to the Internet and you cannot pass Go until you click the Toggle interface button for the PPP connection you want to use Turn on the modem If you are using an external modem make sure it is u turned on and ready before you try to connect A When you activate the connection the Status button will turn yellow while the modem is dialing When the modem has made the connection with your ISP s server the Status button will turn green All systems go When you want to disconnect click the Toggle inter
366. ormatting 191 graphics adding 197 opening 189 print preview 187 printing 185 186 rearranging 191 tables adding 199 200 Encapsulated Postscript files 197 General toolbar 183 inlined EPS files 197 interface 182 lists creating 195 Math toolbar 183 Menu bar 183 minibuffer 183 numbering options 196 page layout 184 186 pages numbering 196 197 paragraphs 191 193 Tables toolbar 183 templates 184 189 text entering 186 187 Title bar 183 undo feature 187 work area 183 KPackage 132 133 installed package list 353 installing applications 136 138 starting 132 uninstalling applications 133 134 kpackage command 132 Kppp Configuration dialog box 167 168 Kppp dialer 166 169 opening 167 Kshow 333 KSnapshot 331 332 Kuickshow 333 KView 329 330 KVoice 238 241 Le LANs local area networks 145 Launcher properties dialog box 60 layers KIllustrator 302 304 Layers dialog box 303 LDP Linux Documentation Project 39 Web site 46 Letter document class KLyX 185 Lilo Installation screen instal lation program 28 29 lines drawing The Gimp 293 links creating Screem 229 Linux 3D Web site 318 Linux Archives Web site 352 Linux commands 42 44 Linux Game Tome Web site 352 Linux games 349 Linux Games Web site 352 Linux Links Web site 19 Linux Media Labs LLC Web site 322 Linux Online Web site 37 Linux Planet Web site 19 Linux Portal We
367. ot only be com mended for their efforts but also assisted if possible 40 Hour 3 Exploring the man Pages Although a wealth of information is contained in the GNU Linux man pages and HOWTOs and many of the solutions to your problems may be found there working with the man pages from the command line can be a bit intimidating This section pro vides a path through the maze of man pages It shows you where to go to get the right man page and how to use it once you are there Each man page is divided into sections although not all sections may appear in every page Table 3 3 lists the different sections of a man page and the contents of each section TABLE 3 3 Portrait of a man Page This Section Is a Description of NAME The name and a brief description of the command SYNOPSIS How to use the command and its command line options DESCRIPTION Explanation of the program and its options OPTIONS All options with a brief description of each SEE ALSO Related man pages DIAGNOSTICS Description of the error messages FILES List of files used by the command and their locations BUGS Known problems HISTORY Milestones of program s development AUTHOR Program s author and contributors The manual pages are the built in online help system that comes with all Linux systems The man pages won t provide solutions to all problems but they are a searchable store house of information about Linux commands not paralleled by any other source
368. other sources of information and some of the available software It is also maintained by Michael K Johnson Summary During the past hour you worked on tuning your Linux installation If your video dis play was not working correctly you used Xconfigurator to fix it If you find that your computer will not make any noise or play your music CDs you need to search the Internet for a sound driver that will work with your computer s sound system Finally you learned how to find helpful information from the command line by using the man command Q amp A Q Id like to learn more about how to configure my video display with Xconfigurator Are there any additional sources of information A If you want to know more about the video configuration process you can read the following documents found in the Linux directory structure e The Xfree86 documentation in usr X11R6 lib X11 doc e The README file for your chipset if there is one also in ust X11R6 lib X11 doc e The manual page for Xfree86 e The manual page for XF86Config To access this documentation and the man pages from the command line refer to the section entitled Getting Help in this hour 46 Hour 3 Q Id like to help create better Linux user manuals How can I help A The Linux Documentation Project is a volunteer project always looking for good help If you feel you have something to contribute let them know The LDP main site is www linuxdoc org This site
369. otograph to look more like a painting use the Canvas filter Filters Artistic Apply Canvas If your photo is blurry sharpen it Filters Enhance Sharpen e To get rid of unsightly blemishes scratches or any other object that you don t want in the picture try the clone tool you ll find it in the toolbox There are some every good Gimp tutorials on the Web Start your search at the official Gimp Web site www gimp org A You may also want to check out Sams Teach Yourself Gimp in 24 Hours The Gimp 295 Summary The Gimp is the all purpose graphics tool for almost every need During this hour you learned how you could set up your computer to handle different graphics jobs You then played with the drawing tools you ll need to supply the creativity and scored a few tips for making photographs look better than life Q amp A Q Where can I find more brushes patterns and gradients that I can use with The Gimp A If you look on the Linux Mandrake CD you ll find a package that you can install that adds more brush and pattern files to The Gimp directories You ll want to install the package named gimp data extras 1 0 0 6mdk noarch rpm You can also download brushes patterns gradients and patterns from www gimp org data html Q I understand that there is a scanner plug in so that images can be scanned from The Gimp Where can I find out how to do this A We re going to send you back to the Web to f
370. ou can navigate through the maze of directories subdirectories and files You were introduced to the command line and a few commands to help you get around and find out where you are We also showed you the GNU Midnight Commander and KFM file managers You ll find these file managers to be easy ways to manage your filing system The Marvelous Mystical Filesystem Tour 101 Q amp A Q Help I ve forgotten where I stored a file What s the easiest way to locate the file A There is a Find File utility that you ll find helpful From Midnight Commander select Commands Find File Type the name of the file into the Find File dialog box If you can t remember the entire filename use wildcards A list of directories will be displayed Select the file you want and click the Change to this directory button Q I like to display files and directories in the file manager as text but I d like to make the text larger Can I do this A It s easy to change the font size in KFM Select Options Configure File Manager to open the configuration dialog box The Font tab controls the size and typeface of the text that is displayed in the directory view You can change the text color from the Color tab Q I threw some files in the KDE trash and I want them back What do I do A Open the Trash and copy the files back into your home directory Workshop The filing system is one of the more important aspects of Linux You ll need to be famil
371. ou create a header for your document that not only contains a page number but also other information about the document 1 Click Layout Document The Document Layout dialog box shown in Figure 12 9 appears FIGURE 12 9 E Dozenaka X es a Sides Columns Using page numbers in Class aricie lilies Ban headers or footers C Two C Two helps keep printed Fonts geau a 5 Separation pages in order Font Size gefauit Indent L Buletshapes C Skip Language default g IF Use AMS Math PS Driver defaut 5 Float placement Select header style Encoding latini z Extra options Default Skip Medskin Section number depth J Spacing Singe l Table of contents depth 3 2 From the Pagestyle drop down list select an option for how you want the headings and page numbers to display on each page There are five options e Default uses the heading and page number style defined by the document class or template e Empty does not use headings or page numbers on the pages of your docu ment e Plain contains only page numbers e Headings displays page numbers along with either the chapter title and num ber or the section title and corresponding number e Fancy allows you to create your own headers and footers for a document Document Processing with KLyX 197 To change the spacing around the header click Layout Paper and change A the spacing in the Foot Head Margins section of
372. ou want installed on your computer The custom installation presents you with a list of application types from which you can choose You probably won t need everything and you may not have room for everything If you select too many packages the installation will let you know that there is not enough room and you will be asked to go back through the list and choose fewer packages Don t worry if you don t get everything you can install more applications later 2 What is the purpose of the startup disk that you created during the installation If for some reason you can t get your newly installed Linux Mandrake to boot put the startup disk in the floppy drive and reboot the computer A small version of Linux will load and start up the processes and access your Linux system Reasons why you would need to use the startup disk include a faulty LILO or BootMagic installation or when LILO or BootMagic cannot be used on the system 3 How do you change the operating system that will start by default when BootMagic loads Return to the BootMagic configuration in Microsoft Windows by selecting BootMagic Configuration from the PowerQuest BootMagic program group Select the operating system that you want to use as the default from the Menu Name list and then click on the Set as Default button Hour 3 Quiz 1 Why do most configuration problems occur in the Linux installation The major contributor to hardware configuration problems
373. ould rather work with just the menus or if you want more room for the work area you can hide and move the menus and toolbars Drag the A bar at the left of the menu bar or toolbar to move it to another area on the screen Click the bar to hide the menus and toolbars To determine which toolbars appear when you open the KLyX program select Options Screen Options and click the Toolbars tab on the dialog box that opens If you want a toolbar to appear only when you are using that feature select the Automatic option e The Math toolbar allows you to easily add math equations to a document e The Tables toolbar creates and formats tables Tables can contain any number of rows and columns and you can change the size of the table as needed To make tables more attractive or to make information stand out you can add borders to the table and format the table text e The work area is where you type text and insert other items such as tables and images e Along the bottom is the minibuffer or status bar which displays the document on which you are working and the directory path to that document whether the docu mented is read only or can be edited and if there are any unsaved changes to the document PE SA If you want to learn more about KLyX look in the Help menu and read the Y S as Introduction Tutorial and User s Guide Now that you ve looked KLyX over it s time to get started on a document You may
374. our user directory will not be available to other users and your desktop settings cannot be changed by anyone but you New TERM Living in a Graphical Workspace 53 FIGURE 4 2 S Aname HEL BMMWGer KEETE The GNOME desktop MR Ee Woe sme we Home director lt b gt o amp N Back Forw Reload Index History BMarks Help L Location fr A ocation toc is Fhome gander Bie Edit Settings Layout Commands Help gt 8 amp Sk 82 Up Forward Rescan Home Icons Brief Detailed Custom Desktop tmp jande O4FIGO R pex enlightenment G gimp gnome _ gnome desktop gnome help browser F G_ gnome_private home gander Show all files f 54 G5 el Af t cone ep browsera moneron von Fena Main Menu button e REA fs a e fg meme aN The GIMP Terminal Emulation button To log out of the system follow these steps 1 Exit the user interface by selecting Logout from the Application Starter in KDE or the Main Menu in GNOME A logout dialog box appears on the screen 2 Click Logout in GNOME you will also need to click Yes The X server will shut down and you ll be returned to the command line 3 Type logout and press Enter The login prompt with the cute penguin appears on the screen You can just leave the computer in this state until the next time you want to use it You just need to log back into your user account But if you want to turn off the compu
375. our first step is to select each object that you want aligned Press and hold the Shift key while you click each object Once the objects are selected click Arrange Align to display the Alignment dialog box Objects can either be aligned horizontally or vertically from the Align tab You can also select the spacing between objects from the Distribute tab Killustrator 311 Workshop If you ve worked with other graphics programs such as Adobe Illustrator and CorelDraw you may have found KIllustrator to be a snap If you haven t try the exer cises in this workshop Quiz 1 How do you change the color used to draw a shape 2 What is the purpose of gridlines and how do you use them in KIIlustrator 3 When is it helpful to use layers in a drawing 4 Is it possible to add text to a KIllustrator drawing that does not appear on the page in a straight horizontal line Exercises 1 Design a card that you can customize for special occasions Put different design elements on a separate layer For example you may want a greeting on one layer a design on a second layer and a personalized message for each recipient on the third layer Look around the Web for free clipart If you need some design ideas go shopping at your local card shop or look at some of the electronic greeting cards on the Web 2 Try exporting your KIllustrator drawing in a variety of file formats Then experi ment using these files as graphics on your Web site
376. our types of simple lists in KLyX e A bulleted list is simply a group of unordered items KLyX uses the Itemize para graph environment to format bulleted list items e A numbered list consists of items that must be in a particular order such as steps required to perform a task The Enumerate style automatically numbers each item in the list If an item is moved the numbers in the list are automatically adjusted Document Processing with KLyX 19 e A definition list contains a series of terms and their corresponding definition and uses the List style This style puts space between the term and the definition e A description list is a series of short paragraphs where the first line of each item is positioned along the left margin and each additional line is indented This type of list uses the Description style Figure 12 8 shows an example of each of the four types of lists FIGURE 12 8 iT Kigxitestiyx Changed 7 0 x n Eile Edit Layout Insert Options Documents Help Lists are easy to create frz s and format when you 4 Standard J0 Be aROS xe ft RES H z use one of the list This is an itemized list styles The first item And the last item Select a list This is an enumerated list environment 1 One for the money 2 Two for the show Bulleted list E Here is a basic list Numbered list Title Located at the top of the screen os hae P Status Located at the bottom of the screen Definiti
377. our working files every few days You do have several options for using floppy disk drives as backup devices You can for mat them as DOS floppies and then read the files stored on them in Linux Or you can install a Linux filesystem an ext2 filesystem on the floppy disk and just copy data there The following section discusses using the 3 5 inch floppy drive as a DOS drive and storing Linux files on it DOS Floppies During the initial setup Linux Mandrake mounts and configures your floppy drive to automatically determine the filesystem type In other words when you mount a DOS disk in the floppy drive it will recognize the vfat filesystem and mount the drive as a DOS drive The same process takes place when you mount a disk with an ext2 filesys tem Linux checks the filesystem type and mounts the floppy as a Linux drive No matter which filesystem is mounted you can read files from it and save files to it This is a big improvement over having to mount each floppy filesystem by hand Another big advantage to this is that it enables you to download Linux RPMs and appli cations to whichever computer is convenient Unlike many applications for Windows and Macintosh which sometimes require many megabytes of space Linux applications tend to be much smaller and sleeker In fact quite a number of them even many of the com plex ones are small enough to download to a single 1 44MB floppy disk You can just take the floppy disk straight to your
378. ow that an empty categories account will be created for you You learn how to change this category list to fit your spending habits later in the hour 4 Click OK and you ll be returned to the CBB window where you set the beginning balance for the account 5 Click in the Date field in the Entry area and type the date of the balance 6 Click in the Description field and type Beginning Balance 7 Click in the Credit field and type the amount of the beginning balance The Entry area should look something like the one shown in Figure 13 3 Date ie Beginning balance Accept transaction Figure 13 3 J aL Begin Balance 0 00 jE l E sy Set the beginning bal ance for each account Clear entry 8 Click the Accept button to add the beginning balance to the register You ll see a Yes No dialog box asking if you want to use a category for the entry Make a mistake You can clear the entry fields by clicking the Clear Entry button 9 ClickYes You ll see the beginning balance entry in the Account Register If you create more than one account you ll find them in the Account list To work with a specific account double click its entry in the Account list A A Saving Data Before You Exit CBB As you create accounts update category lists and enter transactions into CBB all your work is stored in memory You ll want to click the Save button frequently as you enter transactions and perform other tasks
379. ownload the album title artist and song names from an online CD database You then learn how to select songs from the playlist To learn how to keep track of your music CD follow along with these steps 1 Connect to your Internet Service Provider 2 Open the GNOME CD Player and place a music CD into the CD ROM drive The player will query the database and display the artist and album title 3 Click the Open Track Editor button to display a list of the songs on the album An example is shown in Figure 23 4 4 To play a song from the Track Editor double click the title of the song If you want to makes notes about a song you can type information in the A text box below the Track Information A 340 Hour 23 FIGURE 23 4 Susie Q ox The Track Editor lists the songs found on the music CD Track Editor x Open Track Editor Disc Information 68 13 minutes Trk Time Title Artist Title Double click to play song Creedence Clearwater Revival Chronic 4 32 puta spell on you 3 09 Proud Mary 2 20 Bad Moon rising 2 3 4 5 311 Lodi 6 7 6 2 34 Green river 2 43 Commotion 2 45 Down on the corner 9 2 20 Fortunate son Type comments Track Information susia Q 10 209 Travelin band 11 2 29 Who ll stop the rain Download 12 243 Up around the bend 13 3 06 Run throught the jungle CD database 14 2 33 Lookin out my back door int 0 15 3 34 Lann ac
380. peripheral locations 145 power supplies 144 user needs 143 workstation locations 143 144 shared resources 152 153 topologies 146 solid color backgrounds desk tops 72 Solitaire 353 sound configuring 37 38 sound cards configuring 343 sound drivers 37 38 spell checking KLyX docu ments 200 201 split windows Emacs 249 Stanford Computer Graphics Laboratory Web site 319 starting Emacs 246 247 Emacs calendar 274 Gnome RPM 131 KDE graphical user interface 50 KPackage 132 KVoice 238 Linuxconf 104 105 The Gimp 290 X 29 status bar KLyX 183 sticky windows 71 72 styles KLyX paragraphs 191 subdirectories 87 88 creating 98 SunSITE Web site 317 switching between Emacs buffers 248 GUIs 52 syslog daemon 15 system data files 86 system information 15 18 finding 16 17 114 115 hardware compatibility determining 18 system logs Linuxconf 115 System Monitor 116 system properties 17 System Properties dialog box 17 system requirements games 349 T tables KLyX documents 199 200 Tables toolbar KLyX 183 tabs Emacs 258 259 tags HTML inserting with Screem 228 229 online resources 230 tar command 122 123 technical support resources 44 45 templates KLyX 184 189 Web page templates Netscape Composer 173 174 Texinfo documentation system 266 268 text adding to drawings KIllustrator 307 309 arranging around shapes KIllustrator 308 309 twisted pair
381. pl e s rath a Program execution fust X11R6 bin xanim fustX1 1 R6 lib xanim 5 directory ust X11R6 lib xanim cvid readme Location of usr X11R6 lib xanim cyuv readme amp Verity Y Uninstall X Close Remove application from system installed files 2 If you can t find this program in the KDE or GNOME menus open an X terminal window and type the program execution command found at the top of the Package Info window The program will either open or a message containing more infor mation about how to run the program will appear in the X terminal window 3 Whenever you suspect that a program is not working correctly click the Verify but ton Gnome RPM will verify that this application is properly installed and look at the program files for problems After it compares what you have installed with the source it will inform you of any problems files for the package You ll see the letter D in the first column of the list Make a note of the directory path and filename for the documentation file and open the file in a text editor or browser window If you want to learn more about an application look for the documentation Z 4 When you are finished reading the package information click the Close button Browsing Through KPackage KPackage is the KDE package manager and although it does most of the same things as Gnome RPM it does them a little differently There are severa
382. pp dialer opens you ll see a blank connection box After you assemble the information needed to make the dial up connection to your ISP click the Setup button This displays the Kppp Configuration dialog box Your first task is to click the Device tab shown in Figure 11 6 and tell Kppp where to find your modem You ll need to select the modem port from the Modem Device drop down list You may also want to change the connection speed If you want to make sure the dialer detects the modem click the Modem tab and query the modem After you have configured the modem it s time to tell Kppp how to call up your ISP Click the Accounts tab and then click the New button to open the New Account dialog box featured in Figure 11 7 displaying the Dial tab Set up modem Test access to modem FIGURE 11 6 amp Dre Make sure you have Accounts selected the right p Serial device s Modem Device modem device by querying the modem Modem PPP Graph About 7dev cuad Select modem port CRTSCTS a Flow Control Line Termination Connection Speed Set modem speed W Use Lock File Modem Timeout 60 Seconds Cancel 168 Hour 11 Figure 11 7 2 Ds x Supply an access Dial i DNS Gateway Login Script Accounting Supply DNS IP addresses phone number and IP p Dial Setup pply i 5 addresses for your ISP conpectonname My TBE Phone Number 555 1111 Enter phone n
383. ppears in a buffer window The Emacs Help System 269 Command Lisp function name n zi FIGURE 17 4 101 x Files Tools Edit Search Mule Help Lear n about C x C s runs the command save buf feril which is an interactive compiled Lisp function in files commands with the save buffer optional ARGS i a Save current buffer in visited file if modified Versions described below Describe Key com By default makes the previous version into a backup file if previously requested or if this is the first save mand Mith 1 C u marks this version to become a backup when the next save is done With 2 C u s unconditionally makes the previous version into a backup file With 3 C u s marks this version to become a backup when the next save is done and unconditionally makes the previous version into a backup file With argument of 0 never make the previous version into a backup file He Ka file s name is F00 the names of its numbered backup versions are 00 i for various integers i A non numbered backup file is called FOO ees backups rather than F00 will be made fie value of version control is not the atom never and either there are already numeric versions of the file being backed up 2 version control is non nil 122 Help Help Wiew L1 Top SS See Introducing Lisp Functions In the last hour you learned how to work with formatted text
384. pports true multitasking a multi user environment TCP IP networking the X Windows system and much more Linux is a small friendly version of UNIX that comes with all the tools you need to learn system administration programming networking and all the other things that computing is about You can install Linux on virtually every personal computer made since the introduction of the Intel 1386 family of processors Linux can also be ported to 64 bit RISC processor sys tems like DEC Alpha and Sun Sparc workstations Lots of older equipment like Commodore Amigas and low end Pentium machines and even a large number of Apple Macintosh and Power PC platforms will benefit greatly from the installation of a Linux operating system Linux normally provides some mea surable improvement in the operation of every piece of hardware where it is installed But perhaps most importantly Linux provides a popular platform for ordinary people to have access to the astounding volume of open source software available from the GNU project and others and distributed under the GPL GNU Public License Reasons for Giving GNU Linux a Spin If you have been wondering what it would be like to have a faster computer and all those dream applications to do just about anything you can think of from playing games to running a professional Hollywood movie studio without spending any money then you need to look into GNU Linux If you want a real platform for learning UNI
385. quick You ll then see a message that asks whether you want to start X on boot Answer No It is a simple matter to type startx at boot and if there is a problem with the video you will need to be at a command line when you start 30 Hour 2 Congratulations This is the end of the installation A Congratulations installation is complete message appears on the last screen Remove the CD and Installation Boot Disk and press Enter The computer will now reboot into your Linux Mandrake operating system A bootstrap loader is a program that steps in just after the BIOS loads and offers you a menu of the operating systems installed on the machine You select the one you want to boot at startup For many of you that will be a choice between Windows and Linux Mandrake but bootstrap loaders including the Linux Loader lilo can load other operating systems as well There are several variations of Linux you might have loaded on your system and all these could be sharing your 22GB hard drive with OS2 or Windows NT instead of just WIN9x If you install Linux Mandrake on a second hard drive you need to use the Linux Mandrake Startup Disk you made during the installation process to A boot the Linux Mandrake system There are many reasons for having a dual booting machine It is great to be able to experiment with Linux and the Linux Mandrake distribution has lots of new things to learn and do But you may not be the only user of the c
386. r Pause before screen capture Select directory Click to preview full size image to save file When KSnapshot opens it captures the screen and displays it in the Preview pane If you want to keep the screenshot just type a destination directory and filename in the Filename text box select a format in which to save the file and click Save If you need a different screen capture image set an amount of time before KSnapshot takes the picture of the screen in the Delay text box click Grab and then set up the screen within the allotted time before Ksnapshot takes another picture If you only want a picture of a specific window place a checkmark in the Only grab the window containing the cursor checkbox click Grab and then click the window that you want to capture Summary You ve just seen a few of the added graphics utilities that Linux Mandrake has to offer These utilities can be used to make minor changes to image files and to manage these files If you work with graphics files you may find yourself in need of some of the pro grams covered during this hour Graphics Viewers and Utilities 333 Q amp A Q Where can I find examples of icons A The KDE Icon Editor can open several types of files xpm gif and jpg and saves files in the xpm format You can search the Internet or the Linux filesystem to find some example files Two directories that contain a number of icon files are as follows usr share icons ustr
387. r questions from other Linux users Lots of documentation and help is out there on the Internet if you just go looking However the remainder of this hour concentrates on the information available from the Linux man pages An understanding of how the man pages are organized will help you organize your efforts and save you time when looking for something Table 3 2 gives you an idea of the contents of the man directories TABLE 3 2 How the man Pages are Organized In This Directory You Find usr man man1 Commands you can run from within a shell usr man man2 Documentation on system calls usr man man3 Manual pages for libc functions usr man man4 Information about files in the dev directory usr man man5 Details of formats for special files such as etc passwd usr man man6 Games usr man man7 Descriptions of Linux filesystem and man pages usr man man8 Pages for root operator utilities usr man man9 Documentation on Linux kernel source routines Linux manual pages usually called man pages are a compilation of the documentation written by the creators and users of the Linux system software Many of the pages are written by the author s of the software command or utility discussed in the man page others are contributions from users The Linux man pages represent an enormous effort by the people at the Linux Documentation Project LDP All those people who make contributions and especially the project founder Matt Welsh should n
388. r View of the Desktop 77 Colors option There are several color schemes from which to choose As you click on color schemes you ll see the change in the preview window If a color isn t quite what you had in mind you can always change the color of individual window elements Lesson 5 6 Trying the KDE Themes Customize the theme There are almost 70 pre designed desktop themes available through the KDE theme man ager These themes are not installed on your computer They are packaged in archive files and will be installed after you select a theme and decide which theme elements to install There are some pretty bizarre themes but they re all creative Follow these steps 1 Open the KDE Control Center and select the Desktop Theme Manager option You ll see the Manager for Desktop Themes as shown in Figure 5 8 Save current desktop settings FIGURE 5 8 Themes can bring KDE Control Center Help as Z Eile Options installer Contents about N Applications a funky or a conser ioe BI vative look to the L 9 Background Blue desktop Borders Blues HA Colors BlueLit Blues it Fonts CagedBird HE Desktop Icons Cecillll CelticGreen ra DPMS Deconstruction mi Depths Desert Pick a theme I HE screensaver E FYWM As Style Factory Y Information Flatx 8 Input Devices Galen 4 gt Phr Mrne Edit View Go Bookmams Cache o BE Bile Qpbans te Save
389. r can perform all of your filing tasks Since both KFM and Midnight Commander basically work in the same manner we ll show you some file manager basics using Midnight Commander see Figure 6 1 As we go along we ll show you how the two file managers do things a little differently FiGuRE 6 1 home Joe When you first open the file manager your home directory is dis played Pa N 9 Desktop books Expand directory RV 6 Collapse directory G Desktop tmp practice pa 88 amp BB 82 Up Forward Rescan Home Icons Brief Detailed Custom G books x Q Tree view Directory view Change pane size Show all files All the commands you can perform with the file manager are contained in the menus The most commonly used commands can be found on the toolbar If you hold the mouse pointer over a toolbar button a screen tip appears that tells you the command that the button executes 96 Hour 6 The left pane shows the tree view of all of the directories located in the Linux filesystem If you don t see the directory tree in the KFM file manager select View Show Tree from the menu The right pane shows the directory view and it displays the files and directo ries contained in the directory that is highlighted on the tree view in the left pane To change the size of the tree view and directory view panes click and drag Y the slider at the bottom of the line between the two panes LA Lesson
390. r copying them you must first select the appropriate files in the file manager The conventions for selecting files are pretty basic and familiar There is even a way to have the file manager do the selecting for you by telling it the types of files you want Selecting files with the mouse is relatively simple You may want to use a view other than the Icon view to select files with the mouse 98 Hour 6 e To select a single file click it e To select contiguous files click the first filename or icon and then hold the Shift key and click the last file in the block you want to select e To select files that are not next to each other hold down the CTRL key and click the filenames or icons you want to select Lesson 6 4 Using Filters to Select Files You can use the file manager to make file selections for you if you don t want to search through the whole directory looking for them You can either search for a specific file or for a group of files that have a common element Common elements can be a file exten sion or a combination of letters To set the criteria for sorting the files 1 In Midnight Commander select Edit Select Files In KDE go to Edit Select The Select File dialog box will open 2 Type in the criteria you want to select Figure 6 3 shows the Midnight Commander being used It can be a file extension such as pcx in which case you would type pex Or you might want to select files that begin with emacs s
391. r example use a format such as 9 15 a m or 6 00 p m Emacs uses this time format to set reminders Time Management with Emacs 279 Figure 18 3 emacs diary File Edit Apps Options Buffers Tools Enter the time of the appointment and a Ske SeUVArkeena fae he Nov 6 1999 To start your diary entry just begin typing At short description Ue celtics to oars 8 ae Lee a on each line after the date Nov 24 1999 8am 10am Dentist Type description r Save your diary XEmacs diary Fundamental All October 1999 November 1999 December 1999 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa eee TEZ eh ch GS BL AES ede cy EPAF II A oe 7 8 91011 12 13 5 6 7 8 91011 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 28 30 26 27 28 29 30 31 a C x lt Calendar info o fother today Mon Nov 8 1999 c x gt Select appointment date Remember that the same rules apply when entering appointments If you want to use more than one line all lines following the date must begin with a blank space You ll also want to save the diary file after adding an entry Lesson 18 2 Keeping Track of Birthdays and Anniversaries When you need to remember special dates and the year on which they occurred create a special diary entry to record the date and year of the event
392. r hard drive in the process When the Disk Defragmenter finishes its task you are ready to begin making room on your hard drive for your Linux Mandrake system Installing the Distribution Once your computer is ready for the installation place the Linux Mandrake CD in the CD ROM drive and place the installation boot disk if needed in the floppy drive Then restart the computer When the computer restarts the installation process takes over your computer The Windows operating system start up process is bypassed The Linux Mandrake graphical installation program DrakX contains several tools to guide you through the installation e The panel on the left of the screen lists all the installation steps and the indicator buttons change color to show the status of each step as the installation progresses Red indicates a step not yet performed orange shows the step that is currently pro cessing and green indicates that the step is completed You may click on any of the steps in the list that are available hold the mouse cur sor over them to determine availability and go back to make changes even if you have already completed the step You can customize the installation screens if you want The three button bars at the bottom left of the screen will change the colors used in the installation screens If you want a different look you can click any one of these buttons at any time dur ing the installation Choose Your Language The fi
393. r on the panel It s just as easy to add a launcher to the GNOME panel 1 Click the Main Menu button move the mouse pointer to the menu that contains the application that you want to add to the panel and right click the application A menu will appear 2 Click Add this launcher to panel An icon for the application will appear on the panel Next time you want to start the application just click the icon Lesson 4 8 Creating Screen Notes for Panel Icons You may find that the screen notes that display when you hold the mouse pointer over a panel icon are not descriptive enough You can change the screen note to fit your needs The approach is the same in both KDE and GNOME 60 Hour 4 1 Right click the icon and select Properties from the menu that appears to display the kfm dialog box in KDE or the Launcher properties dialog box in GNOME The Launcher properties dialog box appears as shown in Figure 4 6 FIGURE 4 6 EE Tamcher properties X Change the text that Basic Advanced displays screen notes Name GNOME terminal on the GNOME panel Comment X terminal window Command gnome terminal Screen note wea THe olcaten A Icon No icon _ Run in Terminal OK V Apply X Close Help 2 Click the Application tab in KDE or the Basic tab in GNOME 3 Clear the text in the Comment text box and type the text that you want to appear as the screen note 4 Click OK
394. r some time and they come in different sizes The Zip drives are available in 100MB and 250MB sizes and the Jaz drive can store up to 2GB of data The disks can be formatted with a Windows vfat 32 filesystem or with an ext2 Linux native filesystem and used as another hard drive Creating Backups on CD Read Write Media As we mentioned earlier in the hour there are systems that will require large media stor age for complete backups When you re backing up a networked system with many users and various backup requirements you will not be pleased with the need to maintain stacks of disks or tapes which still must be carefully stored away from corrupting influ ences The solution which is probably the best at the moment is to use a CD R or CD R W drive to create backups on compact disks This will give you a less corruptible non magnetic storage media with a 100 year life span should you need it for the long term Summary One of the most important maintenance tasks that you can adopt is performing regular backups Backups are important in case files are lost deleted or corrupted due to user error or acts of nature such as power outages By keeping these files on a separate stor age medium you ensure that you can keep Linux in good working order Q amp A Q Ihave an Iomega Zip drive connected to my computer Are there any resources to help me set up my Zip drive to work on my Linux system A You should read the Zip Drive mini HOWTO a
395. r user account You can log out of your user account or use a lock on the screensaver if you don t want others in your user account Also make sure that any backups that you keep of your CBB files are stored in a secure place such as a locked file cabinet or safe deposit box If you are an encryption expert you can use CBB s cryptography feature in the Preferences menu Q Id like to make sure I have the latest version of CBB Is there an easy way to keep the program updated A Fire up your Internet connection and let s go take a look Click External Install the Latest CBB CBB will take care of all the business of downloading the package untarring and gunzipping it and then take care of the installation You ll need to restart CBB when finished Workshop You would think that just making you organize your finances would be enough of a test for this hour No so We want to get you on your way to becoming lavishly and indepen dently rich Yes we dream in mass quantities So let s make sure your financial wizardry is in tune and see how well you remember what you learned over the past hour Quiz 1 How do you switch between account files when you have separate files for each of your banking and credit card accounts 2 If you are entering a transaction and you don t have an appropriate category set up what is the quickest way to create a new category 3 If there are a number of bills that you pay regularly such as telep
396. r web age 1g Ne pe J 5 or Netscape Navigator Golc Please note These instructions work only with Netscape Communicator s Composer component and with Netscape Navigator Gold Download the most recent version of Communicator for free How To Use A Template 1 Choose a template from the list below 2 While viewing the template select the Edit Dacument command from the File menu this automatically brings up the Netscape Composer page editor saves the page template and the linked image files and downloads a copy of them all to your hard disk w Using Composer edit and customize the template to suit your needs When you finish your page be sure to delete all extraneous text sample logos links images and email addresses The template simply uses them as placeholders for your own information Please note that the links in the templates are not real they are meant to suggest how you might use links We ve also provided some pointers in parentheses to help you along the way gt When your page mentions other companies by name it s a good idea to link to their web pages as a courtesy a Choose from the Ee Mie Resume available templates McNab Family Company Small Business Templates Flower and Garden Supplies Home Sale Announcement ED etscape Composer Flower and Garden Supplies Edit View Inset Format Tools Communicator EA am fl Normal d Naravi Width
397. rallel port cable this is not a problem Pass through parallel port cables allow you to attach a device such as a CD ROM drive scanner or ZIP drive between the computer and the printer You will find that you won t be able to use your printer while you re using a device attached to a pass through cable If you don t know whether a printer has been set up for your computer try the exercise in Lesson 15 1 Lesson 15 1 Is a Printer Configured for Linux Before you try to set up a printer test to see if any devices are configured on the com puter s parallel port To begin you need to be logged in to the root account Once you are there open an X terminal window Then follow these steps 1 At the command prompt type the command ls gt dev 1p1 where 1p1 is the name of the parallel port where the printer is attached This sends a directory listing to the parallel printer port If a printer is configured a number of stair stepped lines appear on the printed page Don t worry how this looks it just means you can use the printer If the printer does not print a response similar to the following will appear bash dev 1p1 Device not configured 2 Ifa printer is not configured use the printtool to set up the printer discussed in the next section Printing and Faxing Documents 235 Using the Red Hat Linux Print System Manager A quick way to set up a printer to work with your Linux system is to use the Red
398. ransactions Report This report shows only those transactions that have not cleared your bank This way you know which checks haven t cleared yet You can also use this report to make sure that you cleared all the transactions in CBB that were shown on your statement The Missing Checks Report If you need to know whether a check number was not entered in the register or whether a check number was entered twice run the Missing Checks Report Summary Now that you ve had a chance to experiment with the Check Book Balancer you have hopefully found a new tool that can take some of the stress and strain out of everyday life By taking advantage of this electronic bookkeeper you ll no longer have to madly push calculator keys to see how much money is left in your checking account Reconciling your records to your bank statement is faster because there s no number crunching on your part After you ve worked with CBB to keep track of your basic finances you may want to use this information to prepare budgets and savings plans 218 Hour 13 Q amp A Q I created files for each of my accounts Now I m not happy with the way I ve named them Is there a way I can change these names to something more descriptive A Open the account and then select File Save Account As Q Is my financial data safe in CBB A If your CBB files are stored in your home directory on the system no one can access those files unless they have access to you
399. ras For example sane qcam provides a driver that operates Connectix QuickCam cameras You can x then use the xcam application to grab pictures from your digital camera You can use gPhoto to preview images stored on a digital camera and then select images to download to the computer gPhoto will resize color correct and print your digital photographs There are several programs that you can use to capture images from a scanner Here are two of the programs you can use to scan photographs and other artwork e The original graphical scanner interface for the SANE environment is xscanimage xscanimage can acquire single images from flatbed scanners slide and film scan ners and cameras xscanimage is included on the Linux Mandrake CD and is installed automatically when you install the SANE package 290 Hour 19 e If you want to use your scanner as a scanner fax machine copy machine check out Xsane You can download Xsane from ww wolfsburg de rauch sane sane xsane html Xsane allows you to save scanned images in a number of useful formats including png and jpg And Here s The Gimp Youre probably excited to start drawing The best way to get acquainted with a drawing program is to look at all the brushes paints and selection tools available to you The Gimp comes equipped with quite an arsenal Lesson 19 1 Starting the Gimp for the First Time This lesson shows you how to open The Gimp for the first time Once you
400. re Printer You are next asked if you want to set up a printer If you have a printer attached to the computer click Yes and select the printer from a list of options If you don t want to per form this step right now click No You ll have a second chance to configure a printer in Hour 15 Printing and Faxing Documents Set Root Password You are asked to assign a password to the root or system administrator account The root account or the superuser is the administrator account and it has no restrictions This account is only for performing system maintenance and should not be used for your everyday work or for storing files Add a User Creating a normal user account is an important thing to do at this point because if you don t you will have to do everything logged in as root This could be potentially damag ing So create a non privileged user account where you can log in and not have to worry while you look around and get used to Linux Type in a login name for the account the name of the user and a password When you type in the password nothing is displayed A bit of strategy for choosing passwords Linux is case sensitive so it sees a difference between upper and lowercase letters A good password needs to x be at least six characters long and you should try for a mix of upper and lowercase letters numbers and symbols Create a Bootdisk You are asked whether you want to create a start up di
401. re about the Desktop Panel Control Center KDE desktop File Manager Window M p S ET 4 file ust share doc HTML default kdehelp main html Search for specific help topics 2 Click on a link in the Getting the most out of KDE section at the bottom of the main page if you want to learn more about working with the KDE desktop You ll be taken to the table of contents page for the selected handbook 3 Read through the handbook by clicking on the Next link to move from page to page or use the Back and Forward buttons to flip back and forth between pages 4 When you are ready to go back to the home page open the Goto menu and select Contents Now you re ready to try another help avenue 5 Click on the KDE Application help index link to display a list of applications and utilities that you ll find in the KDE menus Again click on the link for the program to display the help contents 5 8 Hour 4 ieee To work with multiple browsers consider this trick When you want to open E a link in a separate browser use the File New Help Window command to open a duplicate of the displayed page You can then navigate to new pages while keeping the original page displayed Exploring the GNOME Help Browser The GNOME Help browser also works like your familiar Web browser But unlike KDE it does not contain a search feature or easy access to application help It does con tain these useful features th
402. re are many games on the Linux Mandrake CD Where are other places where you can find Linux games 3 What is Wine 354 Hour 24 Exercises 1 If you installed the Civilization game you can add a symbolic link to your GNOME desktop that will open the program The symbolic link needs to point from usr local games CivCTP civctp to your desktop directory You can then use the icon xpm file in the usr local games CivCTP directory as the graphic for the desktop icon 2 Visit some of the game Web sites mentioned in this hour and see if you can find a game that interests you If you find one download it and install it on your system Then have fun with your new game A N A 1 yy Ll APPENDIX A Answers Hour 1 Quiz 1 What does it mean that Linux Mandrake is optimized for Pentiums The operating system is enhanced to run Pentium class machines and will not run on an i386 or i486 machine 2 What is a daemon A daemon is a system server that works in the background by execut ing processes automatically without user assistance 3 What kind of modem is best for Linux Mandrake to connect to the Internet An external serial modem is best because GNU Linux doesn t support PCI internal modems 4 Can you use a ZIP drive with Linux Mandrake Yes but only the parallel port connecting version 356 Appendix A Hour 2 Quiz 1 Which installation class allows you to select the packages that y
403. reate directories in other places Creating Directories Creating directories in Linux is pretty straightforward The command is the same as the DOS command mkdir When you use this command be sure that you are located in the working directory in which you want to create the new directory 94 Hour 6 The Syntax for the mkdir Command 5 The following code shows the syntax for the mkdir command You ll use this command A when you want to create a subdirectory within any directory mkdir newdirectory where newdirectory is the name you want to give to the new directory Deleting Directories It s quite simple to delete a directory But before you try to delete a directory you Il need to delete the contents of the directory You can use the rm command to delete files A Linux can use wildcards to do things with the rm command This can be very GY dangerous For instance the following command will remove everything in Nt D the current directory Joe localhost Joe rm And if you make a mistake you will find that your files are lost forever Before you use the rm command make sure you are in the directory that contains the subdirectory or file that you want to delete If you want to remove a file in any directory other than the working directory use the absolute filename W The Syntax for the rmdir Command The following code shows the syntax for the rmdir command Yov ll use this command gt when you want to remove any dir
404. reated the file can control the access permitted other group members to that file It is the assignment or denial of file access permissions that is the heart of the Linux UNIX security system There are three kinds of access permissions read write and execute These are assigned to three kinds of users Owner Group member and Miscellaneous others By controlling the access to files you control the whole thing The user who creates a file establishes who has access to the file to read it to write to it or to execute it if it is an execution file Lesson 7 4 Setting Group Access Permission for a Directory If you as root or superuser create a special directory in which members of a group store their files you need to give the group permission to access the directory Follow these steps to do so 1 Open the file manager and display the appropriate directory in the right pane as shown in Figure 7 9 System Administration Tasks 113 home FIGURE 7 9 The system administra tor will need to give group members access to any directories used by the group File Edit Settings Layout Commands Help lt a A gt A 6a Be Back Up Forward Brief Detailed Custom Rescan Home Icons VR dev Joe author amp Getc Q Qa Ry wx home G Joe Gauthor Copy G bantam garden g Delete Ghenry Move Gitchy jaimi Symiink amp Gajaimie i lost found 0 bytes in 1
405. rectangles l 3 E Create circles E ia a a m Add text z 300 E 7 7 Selection Mode 68 00 0 00 pt Lesson 20 1 Drawing Basic Shapes There are three shapes that you may use more often than other shapes found in the KIllustrator toolbox freehand lines rectangles and circles This lesson shows you how to create these shapes and how to use the color picker to select a color for the shape before you begin Here s how to create colorful basic shapes 1 Right click a color in the color picker to set the line color for the shape A warning dialog box appears telling you that the default color will be changed Click Yes 2 If you will be creating a square or circle click a color in the color picker that you want to use as a fill color Another warning box appears telling you that the default color will be changed Click Yes 5 4 eee If you do not want to use a color for the line or the fill find the color box se that appears crossed out This is the transparent color box 3 Select the drawing tool for the shape you want to create either the Freehand line rectangle or ellipse tool 4 Click and hold the place where you want the shape to begin and then drag the mouse pointer away from that point Notice that the shape appears as you draw with the mouse When the shape appears on the page as you want release the mouse button Your shape may look like those displayed in Figure 20 2
406. resolution images a Pentium 200 with 64MB RAM and 500MB free on the hard drive will make a killer workstation one that can handle large files easily Deciding How to Install Linux Mandrake The best Linux Mandrake installation method is the one that accommodates your specific needs If you have an old machine that s not a good Windows machine anymore chances are that it might make a good Linux standalone workstation If you have only one com puter and you don t want to mess with its hard drive or operating system you might want to install Linux Mandrake on a second hard drive If you need to install Linux and another operating system on the same drive you create new partitions for Linux and install Linux Mandrake on the hard drive There are several options to consider but before you attempt to install Linux Mandrake you have to make a few decisions and do a little detective work Using Linux Mandrake as the Sole Operating System Linux Mandrake can be installed as the only operating system on a computer A good reason to do this is to restore an old Windows machine to service For example our busi ness has an old Compaq Presario P133 that we have been using for several years as a Windows beta machine It had become so cranky and undependable that we had to restart it a half dozen or more times a day Its 1 6GB hard drive ran constantly sounding like a chattering set of teeth We really thought it was finished We decided to give it on
407. rganized by category There are also links to many of the Web sites of these games 352 Hour 24 One of the largest collections of Linux games is the Linux Game Tome at www happypenguin org There are over 300 games available for downloading This site also contains news about new game releases and a database where you can search for a game by name type or date released Tucows also hosts a number of Linux applications at linux tucows com Tucows con tains a number of games along with a host of other applications for many purposes The LinuxApps Web site at ww 1linuxapps com contains more software than just games You ll find about every software category imaginable The software is arranged by categories The Linux Archives Web site at www linuxarchives com has a few games and a good selection of other Linux software You ll also find links to other archive Web sites that have collections of software for other operating systems To keep up on the latest happenings in the Linux game arena cruise over to the Linux Games Web site at www linuxgames com This site has a daily update of Linux game news with links to a variety of other gaming sites You can also download games from the Linux Games site at ftp linuxgames com Many of the game programs are available as RPM files and can be installed on your system using Gnome RPM or KPackage Another source of Linux game information is GameSpot s Linux page at www gamespot com features lin
408. ring the next hour you learn how to e Search through your Linux system for some fun games e Install commercial games designed for Linux e Find games on the Internet e Determine whether your Windows games will run on Linux 346 Hour 24 Fun Stuff that Comes with Linux Mandrake Let s go back to the beginning for just a few minutes and go over some of the compo nents you may have selected during the installation By installing the KDE and GNOME interfaces a number of games tagged along just for fun There were also a couple of game components console games and X games that you had an opportunity to load along with Linux Mandrake How do you find all these games Well first flip through the KDE and GNOME menus Looking at What KDE Has to Offer If you start at the KDE Application Starter button there is a Games submenu where sev eral games are stored You ll find a number of card games such as Poker many board games such as Abalone Mahjongg Minesweeper and Reversi and a few puzzles remember the Rubik s Cube Maybe the most exciting game you ll find in the KDE Game menu is the GnuLactic Conquest shown in Figure 24 1 If you can t find the game open an X terminal window and type konquest GnuLactic Conquest is a game in which two or more players com pete against each other to take over the universe To set up the game and the player list click the New Game button along the left side of the window You may also wan
409. rols in this window set up new frames as well as the speed at which anima tions play in the Edit window FiGurRE 21 1 4 mv Comics Maker v1 0b2 A ili dit jali The Main window cre Ee AEM Nag e Example SizeX 200 J153 SubFrameg 0 Zoom 0 N ates new frames and P 20 mmm x specs E Create new frame plays animations Frame name Frame number Frame size Play animation e The Edit window shown in Figure 21 2 is the drawing area In this window you ll add background images and work with curves This window also runs the animation FIGURE 21 2 i Example 70X Create each frame in o a the Edit window and aN TEN then run the animation QA i z to see how it looks mi Bitmap background image when finished m EC 316 Hour 21 e The Display Curves window shown in Figure 21 3 controls and edits vector graphics adds text to an animation and controls how curves work in the animation Figure 21 3 Sow ox wisi Use curves to work ae with vector images Layer Thick Dash Len F EEA E IE Ticks f Grid e The Background window shown in Figure 21 4 controls bitmap graphics and adds these images to a frame The background is the first object to display in an animation The Background window is also used to zoom in and out of the animation FIGURE 21 4 a o X Backgnd Use the Background lel x window to place Posxjo vfo j i r Zoom 1 000 Position
410. rrectly Try the Emacs spell checker You ll find it under Apps Spell Check Buffer A N A 1 V aay 2 CNN N ay m p HOUR 1 The Emacs Help System Now that you ve had a chance to get acquainted with Emacs and learn about it s text processing modes it s time to use Emacs to learn more about Linux Emacs and other GNU applications To help you understand some of the concepts and commands that were cov ered in Hour 16 Text Processing with Emacs you ll use the Emacs help commands You may also want to spend some time learning about the programming lan guage that keeps Emacs running Emacs and some of the other programs that you ve seen that run under Emacs use the Lisp programming language If you understand what makes Emacs tick you can create your own applica tions that will work with Emacs You will also be able to customize Emacs to fit your needs During the next hour you learn how to do the following e Read Linux man pages with Emacs e Search for GNU documentation e Find documentation on commands and Lisp functions 266 Hour 17 Reading the Linux man Pages Remember the Linux man pages from Hour 3 Troubleshooting the Linux Mandrake Installation Well guess what They re back Only in Hour 3 you learned how to read the man pages from the command line You can also read man pages in Emacs Depending on which flavor of Emacs you installed the menu sequence to the ma
411. rsor is located by using the Alt X column number mode command These two commands act as toggle switches When you no longer want to see the line and column positions in the modeline type the command a second time Workshop Here you are at the end of another hour Standard operating procedure says it s time for another workshop where you can test the skills you ve acquired If you can breeze through the Quiz and Exercises jump right on over into the next hour If you stumble a bit don t worry no one will ever know if you read the lesson a second time Quiz 1 Where is the modeline located in the Emacs window and what purpose does it serve 2 How do you start a new file in Emacs 3 Which commands move the cursor to the beginning of the buffer file and to the end of the buffer file 4 How many asterisks precede a third level heading in an outline Exercises 1 Get on the Internet and learn a bit more about Emacs and XEmacs Visit the GNU Web site and see what they have available for Emacs www gnu org software emacs The XEmacs site http www xemacs org also contains a few user manuals For help on the Gnus newsreader go to www gnus org To find out more about the VM mail reader try www wonderworks com If you like newsgroups check out gnu emacs help comp emacs comp emacs xemacs gnu emacs gnus and gnu emacs vm info 2 Before you print any document you want to make sure that everything is spelled co
412. rst screen you ll see is the choose a language screen You are asked to select a lan guage to use during the installation English is the highlighted default but if English isn t your preferred language use the scroll bar to move through the list and click to highlight the language that you want to use Then click the OK button Once you have finished with each screen you will be automatically moved to the next one Installing Linux Mandrake 25 Select Installation Class On this screen you may choose from three different skill levels for the class of installa tion you want In this book we concentrate on installing and configuring Linux as a workstation for small business and the home In order to have some control over the installation and customization process you need to select the Customized installation class You will then be prompted to specify your usage of the system For this discussion select the Normal usage in the screen that follows Q The Linux Mandrake Install Guide which is on the Installation CD in the EA back of the book in doc en mdkinstallguide index htm1 is directed Seg 4 toward those users who want to use the Recommended class to install Linux Mandrake Setup SCSI The screen that comes up next asks whether you have any SCSI adapters If you do Select Yes and then the type of SCSI card you have If you don t have any SCSI adapter cards select No Choose Install or Upgrade The next scr
413. s are cheap and you can use thinnet cables a type of coax and BNC connectors they resemble silver Ts to hook everything up You don t need a hub You can set up TCP IP networking between the two machines that you use with both Linux and the Windows operating system The directions to do so are available at www mandrakeuser org connect cmlan html You need a network interface card NIC for each computer and each peripheral directly attached to the network The connector on the peripheral has to be the same as the one connecting it to the network at the attachment point Document Everything About the Network It is absolutely essential that network planning be documented Allocating your resources and planning for new acquisitions will require a detailed inventory The best time to col lect this information is while you are preparing the equipment to connect to the network Draw a map of the network that shows the location of the workstations server cabling and how peripherals are attached This will help you plan for access and avoid potential problems like high traffic areas or having to run network cabling in areas where there might be interference from power lines or equipment In addition to the information about the physical layout of the network you need to col lect detailed information about each of the components you are going to install on it Keeping Equipment Records It is necessary to keep good records with
414. s dis play options for brushes and colors and run scripts that create objects FIGURE 19 1 The Gimp toolbox con tains all the art tools you need to draw and edit graphics Select an area of the image Work with text Add color to objects Draw and edit objects SS Foreground color Color picker Background color Hold the mouse pointer over a toolbox tool to display a short description gm A Lesson 19 2 Creating a Blank Canvas Now that you have a toolbox it s time to set up a canvas so that you can experiment with the toolbox tools Here s how to open a new file and save it in the native Gimp file format 1 Click File New to display the dialog box displayed in Figure 19 2 FIGURE 19 2 a Width 256 Set the size and back wnf gt Canvas size ground fill for the image Type i A RGB drawing area Pek Fill Type v Background A White Canvas background Transparent Foreground OK Cancel 2 Set the size in pixels for the drawing area in the Width and Height text boxes 292 Hour 19 It is recommended that you work in RGB You can convert your drawing to grayscale later 3 Select a fill type for the canvas background Choose one of the following options e The Background option uses the background color from the color picker as the canvas color e The White option gives you a white canvas e The Transparent option is grea
415. s that match the image If you want to see less background color use the Centered Maxpect option Cool variations of the Centered option are the Centered Brick and Centered Warp options You get the image in the middle of the screen and a pattern in the back ground You can change the pattern colors using the One Color and Two Color option buttons Symmetrical Tiled and Symmetrical Mirrored work the same as Tiled and Mirrored but you may find that the Symmetrical options retain the original aspect ratio of the image better Changing Your View of the Desktop 75 e The Scaled option fills the entire desktop with the image but the image may be distorted 4 Like surprises Click the Random checkbox and you ll see the background Z gt f 4 change every 600 seconds You can customize the random generator by A me clicking the Setup button Changing the D cor with Screensavers The original idea for screensavers was to protect a computer monitor from burn in Burn in was caused when an image appeared on the screen for too long and traces of it became permanent Not a pretty sight Screensavers were designed so that the image on the monitor was constantly changing thereby preventing burn in That was the past Today most monitors turn themselves off when the computer isn t in use So screensavers have become office art But you ll only see this artwork if you haven t been working for a while And when you re tire
416. s Together Cabling is the basis for connecting all networks except for a small number of wireless networks that use radio waves If you have never installed a network before and your net work is going to be large and complex you should consider contacting a cabling com pany or an industry certified consultant to help you plan the network and assist you in properly installing the cables and connectors Laying Cables If you are going to install the cable yourself these tips can help you plan the best cable installation e If possible run cables down corridors or hallways You won t have to contend with climbing over desks and users to check for cabling problems e Avoid locating workstations or peripherals at the outside edge of the cable length specifications If necessary you may have to install a direct line to a workstation from the server but try to avoid stray cables e Always have more cable than you need Doing so avoids two potential hassles One you can avoid those situations where you have to locate the network connec tor on the ceiling or half way up a wall because you don t have enough slack Two in the case of UTP you can plan for expansion and also be prepared to switch to an unused cable in a pinch rather than waste time chasing down cabling problems when you can t afford network down time Installing Network Interface Cards It may be necessary to configure the interface card with some basic information outl
417. s and equinoxes You can use the menu to display a list of holidays but the commands in Table 18 2 give you more control over which holidays are displayed TaBLE 18 2 Commands for Displaying Holidays To Show Holidays For Type This Command Selected date H or click middle mouse button Months displayed in calendar A or pick Apps Calendar Holidays from the menu Previous current and next months Alt X holidays Specified month and year Ctrl U Alt X holidays Specified range of years Alt X list holidays Highlight holidays in calendar X Unmark highlighted holidays U Z Q Need a short break Look in the Apps Games menu You ll find a number of AP time wasters fun games and rudely humorous quotations It s Full Moon Again When you need to know when the next full moon is coming around you can ask the calendar to display the dates of each phase of the moon The calendar will also show the time for each phase using your local time zone Table 18 3 lists the commands used to display the dates and times for the moon phases for a period of time that you select TABLE 18 3 Use the Moon Phase Calendar to Decide When to Plant that Vegetable Garden Display Moon Phases For Use This Command Calendar period displayed Shift M Previous current and next month Alt X phases of moon Apps Calendar Phases of the Moon from menu Time Management with Emacs 277 Dear Diary Do you need to keep track of things that need to be d
418. s are found quite frequently Both file formats are relatively small which means they transmit quickly and there are players available for most computer operating systems Web browsers can also play these sounds automati cally 370 Appendix A Hour 24 Quiz 1 Where can you find the games that are installed on your Linux system If you use a graphical interface such as KDE or GNOME you can start at the main menu button and navigate to the Games menu Also found in the GNOME menus are the AnotherLevel menus You ll find strategy and video games in the AnotherLevel menus Another way to find out what game programs are installed is to open either KPackage or Gnome RPM and browse through the list of installed packages You can also mount the Linux Mandrake CD to find additional games 2 There are many games on the Linux Mandrake CD Where are other places where you can find Linux games Several software publishers have recently begun porting their games to the Linux operating system These Linux versions are the same as the Windows versions and cost about the same There are also many places on the Internet where you can download Linux games Some of these sites are dedicated just to games others have a wide variety of soft ware packages from which to choose 3 What is Wine No it is not a beverage that you serve with dinner Wine is the Windows emulator that is currently in development Wine will allow you to run Windows
419. s for each work station attached to the network Figure 10 3 Make note of the set tings of each device installed on each workstation in the net PC Device Settings Worksheet Name of Primary User Location of the Workstation work Hardware IRQ Base I O Base Memory Device Address Address coms of o o e coma oP Ce a rs ed Floppy Disk Drive Controller Hard Disk Drive Controller Interface Card somsa oooO O TSS i Video 152 Hour 10 Setting Up a Web Server Web servers are what the Internet is all about they are also what intranets are all about Linux distributions all come with Web server software included in the distribution It is this server software that you will configure to be the Web server for your intranet Documentation and directions for the server can be found in the application package for the Web server To access this information you can use Gnome RPM or KPackage to query the Web server package For more information about using package managers turn to Hour 9 Managing Applications Sharing Peripherals A major consideration for the design of your network is the need your users have to share the peripherals attached to the network The placement of peripherals is influenced by the way that your physical space is laid out It also is influenced by the desires and needs of the users The way that the system of sharing is organized and the way that the network compo nents
420. s for file sharing and perform other regular system maintenance functions like setting the date and time and perform many other tasks Now recall that you can perform all these tasks from the command line That s just what Linuxconf does for you but with one exception it s much easier to see what you are doing In order to work with Linuxconf you must either be logged into the root account or you must have superuser access from your user account When you are logged in as root or superuser you must work carefully The root account has permission to change anything within the Linux filesystem D So you don t want to delete any important files Starting Linuxconf If you are in the root account it s easy to start Linuxconf GNOME users who are logged into the root account will find Linuxconf in the System menu Both GNOME and KDE users can click the DrakConf icon on the desktop and select Linuxconf from the graphical interface If you do so from a user account you will be prompted for the superuser password If you still can t find Linuxconf open an X terminal window type linuxconf and press Enter If you would rather use Linuxconf from your user account you ll need superuser access This means that you must know the root password System Administration Tasks 105 M If you click the Linuxconf icon on the KDE desktop when you are logged in to your user account a panel will ask you to enter the root password
421. s in use in many private networks That makes it possible to have lots of clients sending requests to an X server This means that not just the local client but those out on the network can be configured to send requests to your X server Carrying this out further if you have a TCP IP connection you can log into a computer on the network run your X application remotely and have the server display it on your local system X Window makes windows but it does not resize them move them paint the borders pretty colors with nice decorations and frames or add the buttons at the top that is left to another program called a window manager The window manager doesn t affect the presentation of the window created by the client it just provides the frame and buttons which move resize and close the window Window managers can do more than that They may be configured to allow the user to select the focus policy mouse button bind ings decorations window orientation on the display and much more The window man agers provide window management services to a graphical user interface GUI like KDE or GNOME Only one window manager can be on an X server The KDE GUI uses kwm as its window manager GNOME can run under more than one window manager but not as well with others The Enlightenment window manager works best ICE is reputed to work well also KDE can t run under anything but the window manager made for it kwm and GNOME can t run under kwm
422. s will appear in another window and you can click any change to see the commands that were executed 116 Hour 7 Q Are there any other utilities that I can use to see what s going on with my computer A It depends on which user interface you are using A quick way to see how much hard disk space is being used is with KDiskFree which is in the KDE main menu under System There s also the K File System Control found in Utilities in the KDE main menu which also shows how your hard disk is being occupied KDE also has a User Manager but this is available only if you are logged into the root account If you are using GNOME try GNOME DiskFree You ll find it in the Utilities menu of the GNOME main menu This utility shows you how much space is free on the hard drive Also in the Utilities menu is a utility to change the password you use to log into your user account And the GNOME System Monitor is in the Utilities menu look at it if you want some specific details about what your com puter is doing Q Is it possible to use Linuxconf to change the time for my computer A Yes Open Linuxconf and click the Control tab in the main window Then select Date amp Time You ll need to type the correct date and time in the text boxes of the Workstation date amp time window Since you need to be logged into root to use Linuxconf you may also find the Time Machine a handy tool You ll find it in the GNOME main menu by selecting System Ti
423. s you might enjoy After you get bored with these games you can find a number of commercial games or you can download games from the Internet Q amp A Q I know there must be more games installed on my Linux computer than I can see in the KDE or GNOME menus Is there some way I can find out what other games are installed A To see what is installed on your computer open either Gnome RPM or KPackage On the left side of the window you ll see a list of package categories Expand the list to see all the installed packages If you want more information about a package click it In KPackage a description of the application will appear on the right side of the window To do the same thing in Gnome RPM click the Query button to see a description of the game or other application Q What s the best Solitaire game gt Try xpat2 This Solitaire game contains 14 card games that you can play by yourself Q Id like to try one of the multiplayer games Are there any demos I can use first A You may find a copy of FreeCiv in the usr games directory Click the file named civ FreeCiv is another space exploration conquer the universe game and is a clone of the Civilization game Workshop It may seem crazy to test you on your game knowledge when we just told you to have some fun with this hour But hey you can learn and have fun at the same time Quiz 1 Where can you find the games that are installed on your Linux system 2 The
424. se steps Living in a Graphical Workspace 59 1 Click the Application Starter button move the mouse pointer to Panel and click Configure The Configuration dialog box will open and display the Panel tab 2 In the Location section click the option button that corresponds to where you want to move the Panel For example if you want the Panel along the right edge of the screen select the Right option 3 If you want to move the taskbar click an option button in the Taskbar section To get rid of the taskbar click the Hidden option button KPanel Configuration dialog box and select the Auto Hide options in the To hide the panel when you don t need it display the Options tab in the A Visuals section 4 When you are finished click OK to close the dialog box and apply the changes Lesson 4 7 Adding Application Launchers to the Panel When you find an application that you use frequently you can add an icon for the appli cation to the panel Next time you need the application you can just click the panel icon To add an application launcher to the KDE panel follow these steps 1 Click the Application Starter button and move the mouse pointer to Panel Add Application You ll see a list of the menus found on the Application menu 2 Move the mouse pointer to the menu that contains the application that you want to start from the panel and then click the application An icon for the application will appea
425. se the pwd command at regular intervals It always pays to know where you are working in the filesystem 2 Which command gives you a list of the contents of your working directory as well as detailed information about each item in the directory The 1s 1 command displays the long list description of the contents of the working directory The information in this list tells you the following whether the item is a file or directory file permissions its owner file size and the date it was last updated 3 What does a Linux filename consist of and how long can it be The Linux filename consists of the directory path and the filename Filenames can be as long as 256 characters They can contain letters and numbers as well as characters like the dot and underscore Filenames cannot contain asterisks or question marks Answers 359 Hour 7 Quiz 1 What method do you use to share files with other users on the system You need to create user accounts for each person who will have access to the com puter Once this is done you ll need to decide which users need to share files and create groups based on file sharing needs You can then create a separate directory for each group in which files can be stored and permissions for read and write access to the directory and the file can be assigned 2 How do you give members of a group the ability to make changes to a file First every user who is to be a part of the group must be added to the group l
426. set up as an Apache Web server Enables the workstation to monitor traffic on a network to which it is connected and to make changes to the network configuration Installs information from the Linux Documentation Project along with important HOWTOs and other information Installs databases such as MySQL and PostgreSQL which are both based on the Structured Query Language database language Selects packages that are not included in the list above Sorting Out the Daemons During the installation DrakX selects the daemons or system servers to run on the computer system based on the choices you make during setup Daemons run system processes automatically in the background The user does not have to execute these processes before they can be performed DrakX loads only the necessary system 14 Hour 1 services By doing this DrakX helps you avoid system overload security problems and conflicts But nothing is perfect and you may find that you want to load a Daemon to perform a service not included in your original installation The information in Table 1 2 will give you some help with choosing others Table 1 2 helps you decide which daemons you want to run on your system TABLE 1 2 Choose Your Daemons Daemon Description Service Performed apmd Advanced Power Select this daemon if your computer runs on a Management BIOS Daemon battery atd At Daemon Required Manages scheduled jobs crond Cron Daemon Required Manages repe
427. sideration for placing equipment and assigning users is to under stand who will be working with whom and who needs to share what Placement of Workstations and Peripherals When selecting locations for workstations and equipment some important factors need to be considered The environment effects the location for equipment the most because of user considerations It might be great theoretically to lock the workstation in a closet to keep it away from the dust and traffic but the users will probably not like working there 144 Hour 10 The desires and needs of the users will be a much more important consideration when deciding where to place the workstation than the difficulty in cabling it into the network Workstations must be ergonomically situated to provide the users with the best working environment and facilitate interaction with other members of the workgroup The placement of the workstations and workgroup members influences the location of the server and peripherals Providing easy access to the printer or other peripherals to as many of the workgroup members as possible is important and if this is planned well you may be able to reduce expenses for network cabling or additional components There are also some environmental concerns to consider when placing equipment Just like the old mainframes which had to be kept in clean rooms with temperature control and air filtration and the like microcomputers must be secured from many of t
428. sing with Emacs Before you begin your outline open a new file and turn on Enriched Text mode If you need a refresher course go back to Lesson 16 3 To this mode you ll need to add the Outline minor mode Type Alt X outline minor mode The editing mode in the mode line will read Text Enriched Out1l Your outline will consist of two types of lines heading text and body text A heading represents a specific topic level and is preceded by a series of asterisks A single asterisk is a first level heading two asterisks represent a second level heading and so on Body text is any information that supports the heading above it Body text does not use an asterisk The following is an example of how headings and body text are represented in an outline file First level heading Regular text appears within the outline Don t use the asterisk before the line of text Second level heading Second level heading Regular text can add descriptions and notes to your outline Third level heading Third level heading First level heading Another first level topic with its header line If you need to move text around in your outline use the kill and yank commands dis cussed earlier You can also expand and collapse your outline to see how things are pro gressing You may have noticed that three new menus appear on the menu bar when you added the Outline minor mode Headings Show and Hide Use the Headings menu to jump
429. site Quiz 1 What is a druid 2 Name two ways in which a druid can make your life easier 3 Which HTML tags provide the basic structure of a Web page Exercises 1 If you have a large Web site with several pages and several people working on dif ferent pages you may want to use the To Do feature to keep track of tasks that need to be accomplished for each page who is responsible for completing the task and when the task needs to be completed To access the To Do List click the View Site To Do List button 2 One of the easiest ways to make your Web site look good is with graphics Your job is to collect images that look good together and give your Web site a unifying theme There are several Linux programs that you can use to create your own graphics In Part VI Going for the Graphics you ll learn about The Gimp KIllustrator and a host of other graphics utilities that can help you create good looking artwork You can also download images from the Internet use a search engine to find free Web graphics You ll also find images on your computer Look in usr share wallpapers for background images in jpg format A N A 1 N V aay 2 CNN N ay m i HOUR 1 5 Printing and Faxing Documents Even though it is an ecologically sound idea to work in a completely paper less office there is still a need for paper documents because there are times when an electronic file just doesn t cut it You may find
430. site to the Site tree When you create a page the only content that is contained in the page is the title and color information You will add content such as text hyperlinks and images after the pages have been created To add a page to your Web site follow along with this lesson 1 Click File New New Page to start the Page druid 2 Click Next to get to the first screen of the Page druid 3 Type the directory path and filename for the new page in the Page Path text box Following the example in Lesson 14 1 the path may look something like home username website pagename html You should also type a title for the page in the Page Title text box This title will appear in the Title Bar of the Web browser when the page is visited An example is shown in Figure 14 4 Click Next to move to the next screen 4 You are then asked to select colors for the different elements of the Web page To change a default color click the option button for the element you want to change and then click the corresponding color button to display a color picker After you have selected colors click Next Building a Web Site with Screem 227 FIGURE 14 4 Screem Page Druid ox Provide the Page druid with the directory path and filename title and author of the page being created SCREEM Page Druid Enter page details The path and title are required before proceeding If you use a template then the details we be overlayed o
431. sk Choose Yes and place a blank 3 5 inch disk in the A drive Follow the directions onscreen The files will be transferred to your disk and a window will open when it is finished Remove the Start up Disk and label it Linux Mandrake 7 Start up Disk Install Bootloader The next screen asks where you want to install the Linux boot loader lilo Follow these guidelines e If you are going to make this a dual boot machine and use a boot disk for Linux select the First sector of the partition Installing Linux Mandrake 29 e If you are going to be using the machine as a Linux only machine select the First sector of boot partition e If you use lilo on a dual boot system instead of a boot disk or another bootstrap loader program such as BootMagic select the MBR There are some cases in which it is not possible to use either lilo or another bootstrap loader because of the presence of some manufacturer s proprietary application or data taking up space on the hard drive at the wrong place Compaq computers come to mind In these cases you will use the Start up Disk you made to boot Linux Configure X The installation program runs an X Window configuration utility called Xconfigurator Xconfigurator probes your computer to determine which video card you have If the test is successful the installation program will select and install the proper X Window server for your card If the test fails you are shown a list of cards from which
432. sses the Hyper Apropos function You supply a keyword and Emacs will list functions vari ables and commands that match your keyword Press Enter or click the mid dle mouse button on one of the listings for more information Typing will exit Hyper Apropos Working with Files When you open existing files or create new files you can either open the file so that it appears in the entire frame or you can open the file in a split window so that it shares the frame with another file Windows are an easy way to com pare the information in two documents or a way to browse one file while working in another New TERM Since you are working with XEmacs moving between windows is as simple as clicking in the window that you want to make active You can then use the scrollbars to move through the file Creating a New File When you need a blank file you can t just tell Emacs to give you a blank buffer New files must be created before an empty buffer file will appear in the window To create a new file use one of the file commands e To open the file in a separate frame click File Open in New Frame or use the command Ctr1 X 5 F e To open the file in a window select File Open in Other Window You can also use the command Ctr1 X 4 F Using the menu to create a new file opens a Find File dialog box like the one shown in Figure 16 2 Use the dialog box to navigate to the directory where you want to store the new file an
433. ssions Options Help ilities i i gt Voice Mail amp Fax Tgander localhost gander amp S Find Files X Emacs a Home Directory B KDE Control Center amp KDE Help Refresh Desktop W Trashcan Gnome and X Apps gt 4 Disk Navigator dfs Panel Lock Screen R Logout amp X PDF Application Starter button Three Four 07 51 Feb 14 Logout button X terminal window Terminal Emulation button e When you click the Application Starter button the Application Starter menu appears This menu organizes all the packages installed on the system into sub menus You ll find all kinds of applications and utilities just by browsing through the various menus e The Logout button and the corresponding Logout command on the Application Start menu is used when you no longer want to work inside a GUI and want to return to the command line e The Terminal Emulation button opens an X terminal window when you click it You can find the Terminal Emulation button by holding the mouse pointer over each button and reading the screen tip that appears The X terminal window works much like the command line 52 Hour 4 Lesson 4 2 Switching Between GUIs You ve seen what KDE looks like Maybe you d like to check out GNOME and compare the two Before you can do this you need to open the Desktop Switcher tool using one of the methods in Table 4 1 Taste 4 1 Where
434. ssvacecosstsstensesasteotasusveseosveneencusenns Chatting with Your Friends in XChat Summarys sce veciaesssaeiassstestsassssosecccuasvedosvdvaseisesdessce E OA teste E E A E S eetisash E sete Workshop sicsscesessesscnncsnibssvssueesvenysfestes cossexsesesbavencnsaviesasstesthoansanetesboenteieontonareaense UTZ ATES PTEN E E ET E A TOES EXETCISES o E E EE N io esanseuntese aon daceeae Hour 12 Document Processing with KLyX 181 Creating a New DOCUIMCRE pisicii anepi A tdpeceuiean Steen 182 Entering Text arrarir nee E EAEE A E E EVENS 186 Opening and Closing Document sa srsvsesiisissinsesrii iniinda aieeaa 189 Editing A Document seszseiea e eenean EE nates A E EE 190 Formatting the Document casses eena E oevseag ssi deseeas tasenies 191 X Sams Teach Yourself Linux Mandrake in 24 Hours Using Styles to Format Paragraphs 000 0 ccc cece cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 191 Changing the Appearance of Paragraphs a192 Applying Character Formatting ssassssnsiniiioniir ndeir aii 193 Creatine Tisis neeesa eana e na thas att EEE ene eevee 194 Using Headers and HOOKS 220 6525 aoa iia 195 Design Elements for Your Documents 0 ccccesesceseseesceseeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaees 197 Looking Good with Graphics occ eeeseeceseseeeeseeeeeeeseseeseeeesseaseesaeeeeeeeanes 197 Adding Tables tora Document iis isscccseciscs scdscsacedsssacvasesh eE R 199 Spell Checking a Document cerez Dreri coes ge25sy EE R 200 Hour 13 Checkbooks Gone Digital 205 Getting
435. t Click the image to display the Edit Figure dialog box You can change the width and height by selecting a size option and typing the amount in the text box at the bottom of the list of option buttons Hour 13 Quiz 1 How do you switch between account files when you have separate files for each of your banking and credit card accounts There are two ways you can go about this one If the account list is displayed in the CBB window double click the account that you want to use The register for that account will display If you don t see the account in the account list click File Load Account You need to select the account file from the Select File dialog box 2 If you are entering a transaction and you don t have an appropriate category set up what is the quickest way to create a new category Type a name for the category in the Category field of the entry area When you accept the transaction CBB will ask you whether you want to add the category to the list If you respond with a yes the category will be added 3 If there are a number of bills that you pay regularly such as telephone and car pay ments how can you enter these recurring transactions quickly CBB memorizes every transaction you enter Each time you pay recurring bills such as the phone bill type the check number and the date Then type a few char acters of the description and press Tab CBB will fill in the rest of the transaction for you If need
436. t To add emphasis use bold char acters or italics Underlining can also make text stand out You can also use two different fonts to show a difference between titles and the body of the text To apply character formats to text with the click of the mouse select the text and then click Layout Character to open the Character Style dialog box shown in Figure 12 7 194 Hour 12 Select font Normal or bold Italics FIGURE 12 7 Fox Make words and mily sansserr a phrases stand out by Series pod using a font that looks T Snapa different from the sur rounding text Noun Style or underline Ble O Color Font size The Character Style dialog box provides a quick way to change the look of text Once you have made your selections click the Apply button You ll see the changes made to the text and the Character Style dialog box will remain open You can format another block of text using the same settings by selecting the text and clicking the Apply button Format text quickly with the Emphasize Style Noun Style and Bold Style z commands found in the Layout menu Creating Lists When information needs to be ordered a list can come in quite handy Lists are great for organizing tasks that need to be done A list can come in the form of an agenda that is distributed before a meeting Lists are also found in procedure manuals that outline the steps required to perform a given task You can create f
437. t www Linuxdoc org HOWTO mini Zip Drive htm1 You may want to look into the latest Zip parallel port drivers at www torque net campbe11 Check out the jaZip program that works on both Iomega Zip and Jaz drives You ll find jaZip at www scripps edu jsmith jazip Backing Up the Filesystem 127 Q Ihave a CD R W attached to my computer Where can I find information about how to use it with Linux A The first place you should start is the CD Writing HOWTO at metalab unc edu 1linux HOWTO CD Writing HOWTO htm1 This HOWTO gives you all the information you need to set up your CD R W and what programs you need in order to burn your own CDs Q In addition to keeping my filesystem backed up is there anything else I can do to protect my Linux system A You may want to consider hooking up your Linux system to an uninterruptible power supply UPS If the power goes out unexpectedly Linux will not shut down properly and you may have problems getting the system to boot after the power returns By attaching a UPS to your system you can set up Linux so that when the power goes out and the UPS starts its alarm Linux will shut itself down properly To learn more about how to do this read the UPS HOWTO www 1inuxdoc org HOWTO Workshop Keeping your Linux system safe means that you must constantly back up important files Understanding what you ve learned over the past hour means that you must test your knowledge Quiz 1 What are the most
438. t Packard DeskJet and LaserJet printers are high on the list Most of these printer models can be supported Even if your HP LaserJet isn t listed you can try either the plain HP LaserJet driver or try the driver for the LaserJet 4 and 5 Cannon Epson and DEC printers are also on the list If you don t see your printer you can try either a text only printer or a PostScript printer 3 How much information can be included in a K Voice outgoing fax The most important information is the recipient s fax number Without this the modem will not dial You also need to enter a short note for the fax cover page If you have more information to send you can attach an electronic file to the fax Hour 16 Quiz 1 Where is the modeline located in the Emacs window and what purpose does it serve The modeline is located at the bottom of each window and contains status informa tion for the data contained in the buffer The modeline indicates if there are any unsaved changes in the buffer the name of the file contained in the buffer any modes that are used by the buffer and where the cursor is located in the buffer window 2 How do you start a new file in Emacs When you create a file you are actually opening a new buffer You tell Emacs to find a file but the name you give Emacs does not yet exist Emacs creates a buffer for the file Then when the file is saved it becomes an actual file that resides on the computer s hard disk Once
439. t and select your printer or a printer that is close to it Then click OK You are returned to the Edit Local Printer Entry dialog box Notice that the printer appears in the Input Filter text box 5 Click OK again You are returned to the printtool and the printer will be listed there 6 To test the printer select the printer from the list and click Tests Print Postscript test page An Info dialog box will tell you that the test page printed Did the page print correctly If not you may want to make changes to the printer Just select the printer and click the Edit button 7 When you are finished click PrintTool Quit You re ready to print away Working with HP LaserJet Printers Those of you with a Hewlett Packard LaserJet printer can use a utility that lets you man age your HP LaserJet printer from your desktop This tool allows you to change the paper size and orientation print resolution and a number of other options To find this utility open the KDE main menu and select Utilities HP LaserJet Control Panel You can also type kljettoo1 from an X terminal window The HP LaserJet Control Panel opens to the Paper tab From this tab you can change the paper orientation the number of copies to print and the paper orientation The Printer tab shown in Figure 15 4 changes the print resolution and density and selects a differ ent printer if one is set up on the system FIGURE 15 4 Use the Printer tab to change
440. t can be used to play audio sound as well as to record and format conversions But it is more than that it can also be used to create professional sound effects and to mix and record audio files Getting Help If you purchased the Linux Mandrake boxed set you have a user s manual and several other pieces of documentation that contain lots of good helpful hints tips and directions You can use these to get up and running with Linux Once you have successfully installed Linux Mandrake other truly invaluable sources of information become available for most every application utility and command that came with your Linux installation There are sources of information available to you from both inside the computer avail able as local documentation or outside the computer on the Internet Table 3 1 describes where locally available documentation is stored on your computer Troubleshooting the Linux Mandrake Installation 39 TABLE 3 1 Location of Local Installed Documentation Type of Documentation Where You ll Find It Manual pages usr man Info usr info HOWTOs usr doc HOWTO Frequently Asked Questions FAQ usr doc FAQ Program documentation usr doc lt program name gt The documentation and help available online includes newsgroups mailing lists and books Of course there are also printed books like this one and there may be Linux user groups lugs present in your area where you can seek assistance and answers to you
441. t colors for a drawing object before drawing the object on the canvas What do you do if you don t like the color you chose Well change it And while you re at it you can also change the thickness of the shape s out line To change the color of a shape click the Selection Mode tool and then click the shape to which you want to make changes With the shape selected right click the shape and select Properties from the menu The dialog box that appears see Figure 20 6 shows you the type of shape and its coordinates on the canvas Change outline Change fill color color and width or pattern Figure 20 6 Propertie x Change a shape s out into owine Fm line and fill colors Type Ellipse Bounding Box from the Properties e A Gog 7 Y Position 142 00 pt dialog box Width 344 00 pt Height 113 00 pt Information regarding selected object OK Cancel Help The outline is the line that appears around the outside edge of a shape This line can take on a different color and line style by displaying the Outline tab and making new choices The color that appears inside a shape is the fill color You can make changes to this color also Display the Fill tab you have several choices of fill colors Solid fills the shape with a single color Pattern fills the shape using a pattern consisting of white and another color of your choice Gradient uses two colors to fill a shape Each color in the shape blends
442. t get the display you dreamed about To install most of these games you either need to find a Readme file on the CD or a printed user manual that tells you how to install and play the game Make sure you read the instructions carefully Lesson 24 1 Installing Civilization If you are looking for a game that installs just as easy as any game that runs on the Windows operating system Civilization may be your answer Before you can install the program though you must first be logged into the root account 350 Hour 24 Civilization is an animated strategy game that gives you a unique opportunity to build and shape your own civilization and rule it through several levels spanning time You will build and guide your civilization from primitive beginnings in an ancient world all the way to colonizing a planet in a future of 3000 AD Actions and decisions outcomes of wars and other factors in the earlier world reflect in the future one Civilization can be played as a multiplayer game or just you against the machine 1 Place the Civilization CD ROM in the computer s CD ROM drive 2 At the command line type mount dev cdrom and press Enter to mount the CD ROM so that the contents of the disk can be read by the system 3 Type sh mnt cdrom install and press Enter The Civilization Call To Power setup screen will appear Notice that along the left side of the window there are three buttons 4 Click the Install button The W
443. t text Horizontal Root Grid Spacing 20 background Vertical Root Grid Spacing 20 a I Transparent Text for Desktop Icons Change spacing between icons Remove icon background Icon foreground color Select text color T Show Hidden Files on Desktop Help Default Apply Cancel Lesson 5 7 Using a Transparent Background for Icon Text If the icon text appearing below each desktop icon in KDE is contained inside a color box you can change it so that the background disappears What you ll see behind the text is the desktop background Try these steps 1 Place a checkmark in the Transparent Text for Desktop Icons 2 Click the Icon foreground color color bar This displays the Select Color dialog box where you can choose the color you want to use for the text that appears below the desktop icon Or you can use a different color for the text background If you d rather do C N this don t mark the Transparent Text for Desktop Icons checkbox and click aw the Icon background color color bar to change the color 3 Click OK when you are ready to apply the new icon settings Summary During the past hour you found that working in a virtual desktop environment can not only help you keep your desktop clutter free but also can help keep applications out of your way and out of sight when you don t need them You also had some fun making your desktop fit your personality You may have e
444. t to read the Help file before you begin FIGURE 24 1 EE GNU Lactic C js Game Help If you can t really take over the universe you ENI can at least pretend you are that powerful THE GALAXY IS MINE Start a new game i i i AMM oest x Player List Preview Maj Competing players Add more players Number of Neutral Planets 9 F Add Delete Clear Reject Map f Number of turns 15 ea oii Milan a Heeeuean ale Start Game Cancel Let the game begin Games 347 Finding Games in GNOME The GNOME main menu also contains a Games submenu where you ll find plenty to keep you entertained You may also notice some of the same games listed in the KDE menus Both KDE and GNOME have a version of Mahjongg that is identical to the classic tile game But the KDE version has three other tile layouts that vary Z from the standard game If you are a fan of dice games get out your dice cups and gather around GNOME Tali see Figure 24 2 GNOME Tali is a takeoff of the Yahtzee dice game that was so popular in the 1970s If you want to try out a little wrist action select Game New Game and see how well you score against the computer players If you d rather play with a real friend click Settings Preferences and choose a different class of players Select number of players FIGURE 24 2 GNOME Tali is a strategy game for dice Tear pas ae 4 s total of 4s 5
445. t when you are creating transparent GIFs or when you do not want any color for the background e The Foreground option uses the foreground color from the color picker 4 Click OK The drawing area will appear on the screen in a separate window 5 Right click the drawing area and select File Save As to display the Save Image dialog box 6 Navigate to the directory in which you want to save the file 7 From the Determine file type list select XCF This is the Gimp native file format Use this file format when you are working on files with The Gimp This file format supports all The Gimp s tools and features When you are finished with a drawing you can save the file in a variety of image file formats 8 Type a name for the file in the Selection text box You do not need to add an exten sion The Gimp will add this for you Click OK when you are finished You re now ready to start playing with the drawing tools Selecting a Drawing Tool Now that you have a blank canvas it s time to experiment with some of the drawing tools You can create a variety of shapes in every color imaginable You can change the way a tool operates by double clicking the tool button Zz and changing the options The Gimp 293 Lesson 19 3 Drawing Lines There are quite a few steps you need to perform before you can draw an object on the canvas You need to decide what colors you will use and decide on a number
446. tallation itself in detail followed by a discussion of troubleshooting infor mation and techniques for anything that might not have automatically worked for you In Part II An Interface for All Occasions you learn to work in a graphical user environ ment GUI This will be a good introduction to Linux Mandrake for users of Microsoft Windows or other operating systems who have limited command line experience You will even get to use more than one graphical user interface here In Part III Understanding the Filesystem you will explore the directory structure learn to manage files with both command line input and with the file managers included with the graphical user interfaces Here you will learn the system administration tasks that you must perform to manage your system how to back up your system and how to plan for networking your enterprise with Linux Mandrake In Part IV Putting Linux Mandrake to work you will learn how to get on the Internet and we will introduce you to some of the production applications that come in the Linux Mandrake distribution and some others that you can download You will learn about KLyX a word processor how to manage your checkbook with the Check Book Balancer CBB and how to print and fax documents You will also meet a really SCREEMing HTML editor and site manager In Part V The Beginner s Guide to Emacs you will meet the most powerful application found in Linux distributions Richard Stallman
447. tem RAM Hard drives Number of hard disk drives how they are numbered size of each drive partitions hard drive controller IDE or SCSI amount of space to be dedicated to Linux Mandrake continues 16 Hour 1 TABLE 1 3 continued For This Device You Need to Know Keyboard Keyboard language number of keys Mouse Type of mouse PS 2 serial mouse number of buttons CD ROM drives Manufacturer model number controller type ATAPI IDE SCSI or other Monitor Manufacturer and model maximum resolution vertical and horizontal refresh rate parameters Video card Manufacturer and model type of graphics card and chipset video memory color depth 256 color 16 bit color 24 bit color Sound card Manufacturer and model type SoundBlaster ESS IRQ address Serial ports Number of serial ports port assignments COM1 COM2 IRQ addresses Modem Manufacturer and model number speed communications port COM port fax support Printer Manufacturer and model type of printer PostScript HPCL Network interface cards Manufacturer and model SCSI controllers Manufacturer and model Use an external modem Your chances of getting Linux Mandrake to recog nize an internal modem are slim And if it s a Winmodem there s no chance Z it will work External modems on the other hand work like a charm Finding System Information Finding out the necessary information about your computer can entail some detectiv
448. tem based multiplayer System felene SES 4 aerial combat Saas cae i gnuchess eels version 3 6 2 7mdk Wkdegames 5642K group Amusements Games trojka 15K size 1633122 F xbill 183K description Xpilot is an X Window System based Baoa sek nitpiayar gane calc The B xboing 1050K down or you can use aa rana moan ta Bxgammon 3356K just fly around Xpilo kpackage lt 2 gt x Commodore 64 Thrus Bevel 506 similar to Atari s Grav Uninstall xpilot BWxpat2 462K note this is not missp pilot 1633K already have an xpilc B xpuzzles 445K network you ll need on one machine and F Brojka ah clients on all of the pl Use Scripts Select package 4 ae of Uninstall M Check Dependencies Management Mode Single Selection J F Test do not uninstall Uninstall Cancel J Remove package Verify uninstall 3 If you are sure you want the selected packaged removed from the system click the Uninstall button KPackage removes all the application files from the system When the application has been uninstalled you are returned to the KPackage window Installing Applications Now that you ve had a chance to look around your Linux system and see all the installed software it s time to load more software To install software packages on your Linux machine you need the aid of a package manager The package management system enables you to maintain your Linux system and its applications by providing an easy pat
449. tems use the same keyboard keys An alternative Meta key is the Esc key But use the Alt key if it s on your keyboard TABLE 16 3 Using Cursor Commands to Move Through Text Cursor Direction Command Down one screen Ctrl V Up one screen Alt V Up one line Ctrl P Down one line Ctrl N Left one character Ctrl B Right one character Ctrl F Center cursor position in window Ctrl L Right one word Alt F Left one word Alt B Beginning of a line Ctrl A End of a line Ctrl E Beginning of a sentence Alt A End of a sentence Alt E Beginning of buffer file Alt lt End of buffer file Alt gt 256 Hour 16 Using Numeric Arguments with Cursor Commands Let s make things a bit more complex You can move a specified number of character spaces lines words or sentences You don t have to move one line at a time or one screen at a time The following code shows the syntax for using numeric arguments with cursor commands lt SYNTAX Ctrl U number cursor command Ctrl U is the command that tells Emacs that you will be using a numeric argument to perform a cursor command the number is the number of units you want to move and cursor command indicates whether you want to move forward or backward by charac ters or by sentences The exceptions to this syntax are the Ctrl V and Alt V commands which control screen movement The numeric arguments that you use with these commands will not scroll the A entire screen the screen moves by th
450. ter 20 Minutes Password F Keyboard L Mouse F Require Password protect the Startup Programs Priority display i URL Handlers po Aoma User Interface _j Use power management f Applications Shutdown monitor minutes after tar Dialogs MDI j Try Revert OK Cancel Help Configure the settings of the screensaver 2 You may choose to use the default settings or you can change settings such as colors and speed by clicking the Setup button in KDE or the Settings button in GNOME When you have changed the settings close the dialog box 3 Change the entry in the Settings text box to the number of minutes you want the computer to sit idle before the screensaver starts 4 Select the Require password option When the screensaver is active any mouse or keyboard movement will bring up a dialog box containing the current username and asking for the user password As an alternative to screensavers consider shutting down the monitor instead GNOME can use power management features to power down the monitor after a specified amount of time 5 Click OK when you have finished setting up the screensaver You may also want to close the Control Center if it s open Adding New Color to Windows If you just want to change the color of the window borders that display on the KDE desktop all you need to do is go back to the Control Center and select the Desktop Changing You
451. ter or if you need to restart it so that you can use another operating system keep following along 4 At the login prompt type root and press Enter The password prompt will appear 5 Type the root password and press Enter The command line prompt for the root account displays 6 You have two shutdown options To completely shut down the computer so that you can turn off the power type shutdown h now and press Enter To restart the computer type shutdown r now and press Enter You ll see Linux shutting down the system and turning off system services 54 Hour 4 It s up to you to get yourself back to your favorite GUI so that you can work the rest of the lessons in this and the next hour and customize the look of the graphical desktop Moving Around the GUI Since most of you reading this book probably have some experience working with a graphical operating system such as Microsoft Windows or Apple Macintosh this next section takes you on a few quick tours of both the KDE and GNOME user interfaces We try to give you enough information to get you up to speed and point you in a few direc tions so that you can learn more about KDE and GNOME on your own Taking a Look at the Desktop Both KDE and GNOME are very popular with a wide variety of Linux users We ll let you decide on the interface that you want to use We ll show you how both of the Linux interfaces are similar to each other and to Windows and the Mac You
452. the Accept button The Changing password panel will appear D Type the user s password and click Accept The panel will reappear for you to type the password a second time to confirm your choice A notification panel then con firms that the password for the user has been changed A Choose your passwords carefully If you type a password that Linux doesn t GR think is suitable an error message will appear telling you why this is a bad Cy password choice You may type another password or you may elect to keep the one you chose and ignore Linux advice 7 Click OK The Users accounts panel will show your new user in the listing The user account created during this lesson is highlighted in Figure 7 4 FIGURE 7 4 Users accounts You can edit add or delete users Once you apply the Select Add to add a new definition OSD Mae waw necon nane foa our Jf users will have Joe Book user 505 Joe X author C Witherspoon 501 author access to their own KDE user 502 bantam FTP User 14 accounts games 12 42 gopher 13 Henry Ross Riques 506 C Witherspoon 503 New user added Coletta Witherspoon 504 BeroList 500 to system Quit to apply changes Add more users Updating User Accounts There are times when it is necessary to make changes to user accounts perhaps to change the password or the username Updating the account information is as easy as creating a new account If you ve closed Linuxconf
453. the New Site button to display the opening screen of the Site druid Read the opening message and click Next to display the next screen of the druid 2 Type the path for the directory in which you want to save your Web site in the Site Pathname text box For example if you want to save it in a subdirectory of your user home directory the path may look something like home username website 3 Type a name for the Web site in the Site Name text box This is the name that will appear in the title bar of the Web browser An example of this first screen appears in Figure 14 2 When you are finished click Next FiGURE 14 2 4 Screem Site Druid aX The Site druid needs to know where to save your files and what you want to title your Web SCREEM Site Druid site The local path for the site needs to be entered into the Site Pathname entry The Site Name entry contains a name by which the site will be known Site Pathname home authorAwebsite Browse Site Name Book Example lt Back gt Next X Cancel I 4 The next screen asks whether you want to use a template to create a directory structure for the site or to create a uniform look for your Web pages Click Next since you have not created any templates Building a Web Site with Screem 225 5 The druid then asks whether you want to use a version control software program to keep track of updates to the Web site If you know about version c
454. the home directory of your user account 2 Type the directory path if needed and a filename and press Enter The frame will be split in two and a new file will be created in the bottom window as shown in Figure 16 3 Figure 16 3 Splitting a window is Apps Options Buffers Tools an easy way to view sana E w ZARB the contents of sev eral files at one time o Copyright c 1985 1996 Free Software Foundation Inc See end for conditions Fret Na You are looking at the Emacs tutorial Emacs tutorial Emacs commands generally involve the CONTROL key sometimes labelled CTRL or CTL or the META key On some keyboards the META key is labelled ALT or EDIT or something else for example on Sun keyboards the diamond key to the left of the spacebar is META If you have no META key you can use ESC instead Rather than write out META or CONTROL each time we want you to prefix a character we ll use the following abbreviations C lt chr gt means hold the CONTROL key while typing the character lt chr gt Thus C f would be hold the CONTROL key and type f a XEmacs TUTORIAL Fundanental Top Click and drag Cursor designates Hi A to resize active window New file XEmacs testing Fundamental All New file Text Processing with Emacs 251 3 To move the cursor between windows use the Ctr1 X 0O command I
455. ther media players that you can download from the Internet There are also TV tuners so that you can watch your favorite television shows on your computer screen Do some research on the Internet and see what else you can learn about using multimedia applications with Linux 344 Hour 23 2 Organize your own karaoke sing along Get on the Internet and download your favorite songs There are quite a few sites that contain archives of kar files After you ve collected a few tunes use KMid to create collections of the karaoke files This will make it easier to manage the sing along You can also print the words File Save Lyrics in case your friends need a lyric cheat sheet A N A 1 V aay 2 CNN N a A HOUR 24 Games Congratulations You ve made it to the final hour It s time to have a party so let the games begin Linux has lots of games In fact plenty of interesting little distractions come with your Linux distribution In addition to those games that are already on the system Linux provides an excellent platform for some of the popular multiplayer games that are begin ning to catch on with Internet enthusiasts After you play with some Linux games you ll have a chance to try one of the commercial games ported into Linux You ll also spend some time finding out where you can get more games on the Internet and find out about playing games from some other popular operating systems on Linux Du
456. there some good Web sites I should visit to help me get ready for the next 22 hours A If you want to learn more about the graphical interfaces check out the KDE Web site at www kde org or the GNOME Web site at www gnome org Learn more about Linux Mandrake from Macmillan s Linux resources at www informit com or the Linux Mandrake site at www 1linux mandrake com Workshop We know you worked hard to get Linux Mandrake installed so we ll try to go easy on you Let s test some of the things you learned while installing Linux Mandrake Quiz 1 Which installation class allows you to select the packages that you want installed on your computer 2 What is the purpose of the startup disk that you created during the installation 3 How do you change the operating system that will start by default when lilo loads Exercises 1 Read the documentation on the CD ROM You ll find most of the documentation in HTML format in the doc directory 2 You ve been sitting behind your computer for too long and you may be tense after the long installation This time we really do want you to get some exercise Remember to take a break from your computer walk around pet your dog or go two wheeling down a mountain trail Enjoy the sunset You can start back in tomorrow refreshed and ready HOUR 3 Troubleshooting the Linux Mandrake Installation There are many of you out there who just had a perfect experience the first time loading Lin
457. tial difficulties New Terms This is the book s on the fly glossary It defines terms that may be unfamiliar as they are used Lessons In the lessons for each chapter we take you through step by step demonstrations of the concepts being explained Q amp A The Questions and Answers section highlights items of particular importance and pro vides more information about how to use features covered in the chapter Introduction 5 Exercises These show how to use features not covered in the chapters or where to find programs that are similar to the ones discussed What s on the CD ROM At the back of this book you ll find a CD ROM with the Macmillan Complete Linux distribution which is based on the Linux Mandrake distribution You ll find everything you need on this CD to get you up and running with Linux except maybe for a few pro grams that you can download off the Internet A N A 1 4 by PART Installing Linux Mandrake Hour Preparing for the Installation 2 Installing Linux Mandrake 3 Troubleshooting the Linux Mandrake Installation A N A 1 V aay 2 CNN N ay m p HOUR 1 Preparing for the Installation Congratulations Your adventure with Linux Mandrake is about to begin and you may be in for the ride of your life While you re taking the ride you ll be seeing some new sights as Linux Mandrake powers you along the trail But be a smart rider and plan your trip
458. tion with the pwd Command In the old days of text only terminals commands were typed into a teletype New TERM which then displayed the computer s response The pwd command told the com puter to print the working directory name The working directory is the default directory where the Linux commands perform their actions In other words pwd tells the computer to print the name of the current directory Lesson 6 1 Looking Around Your Home Directory Let s retrace the steps of the early computer pioneers and try out a few simple commands on the command line Before you begin open an X terminal window You ll find icons for terminals on both the KDE and GNOME panels You ll also find terminals in the Utilities menu 1 When you open an X terminal window you ll see a prompt that looks something like this Joe localhost Joe and the cursor should be located right next to the prompt Type pwd and press Enter The response will appear on the following line and will look something like this home Joe You ll also notice that a prompt appears on the next line waiting for another command 2 Type 1s and press Enter The 1s command returns a list showing the contents of the directory in which you are working The list of files and directories may look something like this Desktop books practice tmp The response to the 1s command shows the contents of the home Joe directory How do you know if the four objects returned by the
459. to do the following e Create a music CD database e Play electronic sounds and music e Sing along with the bouncing ball e Watch movies on the tiny screen 338 Hour 23 Playing Music CDs Noise is a regular occurrence around our office The whole neighborhood has something to contribute to our work day dogs barking roosters crowing birds screeching workers talking tractors backfiring You get the picture To drown out the background noise we pop some classical music into the CD ROM drive of one of the office computers and crank up the volume If you like to listen to music while you work check out the CD players listed in Table 23 1 TABLE 23 1 Choose a CD Player CD Player Execution Command GNOME CD player gtcd KDE small simple CD player ksed X Window CD player xplaycd The first CD player on the list is the GNOME CD player shown in Figure 23 1 This is an easy to use CD player and has the added benefit of being able to automatically download information about a CD such as title artist and song list from an Internet database Play Pause Track Elapsed time Artist FIGURE 23 1 The GNOME CD player automatically downloads CD infor mation from the Internet Show song list Display personal CD database If you want a CD player with a few more features take a look at the KDE CD player shown in Figure 23 2 The KDE CD player also downloads CD information from an Internet database but it does not do t
460. tran saa tha lint bf information CDDB Status Submit 2 OK X Cancel 5 To see a list of all the albums that have downloaded information click the Preferences button and select the CDDB Settings tab shown in Figure 23 5 FIGURE 23 5 gted x Update the local CD Preferences Keybindings CDDB Settings Download site database to stay cur Server senngs for database i f Address freedb freedb org rent with your music laoim Bey CD collection Local Database Disc Title 860bb00b Angelo Badalamenti Twin Peaks Soundtrack 26014 Creedence Clearwater Re 8f0c990c Jethro Tull Original Masi Display CD information Edit Remove Change display color and font Your personal music CD collection Refresh List X Close 2 Help If you want to record music CDs as WAV files you may want to try out the Grip CD player and ripper Listening to WAV and MIDI Files If you collect sound and music files on the Internet you ll need a media player to play these files Two of the most popular sound file formats found on the Web are WAV and MIDI formats Multimedia 341 When you need an easy way to listen to WAV files open the KDE Media Player shown in Figure 23 6 You can access this media player from the KDE main menu under Multimedia or by typing kmedia in an X terminal window FIGURE 23 6 Media Payer O X Use the KDE media
461. trol and modem lines j K _j Escape control characters Internet connection F Abort connection on well known errors F Allow any user de activate the interface Line speed 115200 4 Modem port dew ttySO 4 PPP options Give all users access to the modem Accept Cancel Del Connect disconnect Help 10 On the Hardware tab make sure that Use hardware flow control and modem lines is selected along with the Abort connection on well known errors option 11 Make sure that the Allow any user to de activate the interface option is selected This way all users can connect to the Internet through their own user accounts Test the connection When you click the Connect button Linuxconf will attempt to detect the modem and then dial up the ISP Z 12 Click the Accept button The PPP Interface panel will close and you will be left with the PPP SLIP PLIP Configurations dialog box 13 Click the Quit button to close the dialog box Now you are ready to configure the server connection 14 On the Network Configurator panel click Name server specification DNS The Resolver Configuration panel will appear as shown in Figure 11 4 15 On the line for nameserver 1 type the primary DNS number that your ISP gave you Type the secondary DNS number if you have one on the line for nameserver 2 Getting on the Internet 165 FiGuRE 11 4 Resolver configuration You can specify which name server will be
462. two sides of the paper e Letter is for short documents that require address information or a place for letterhead recipient information and a closing It does not use any section or chapter headings e Report is for documents longer than an article or a letter but shorter than a book It uses chapter headings prints on one side of the page and does not use a header e Slides can be used to generate slides or overhead transparencies that convey additional information or stress important points during a presentation or speech When using the document classes it might be wise to refrain from changing the other options in the Document Layout dialog box until after you have a chance to see how the default layout looks on the printed page 4 Documents can be printed on either one side of the paper or on both sides KLyX will take care of the special formatting required if the document will be printed on both sides of the page such as in a book The Two sides option prints pages that leave extra space in the margin to allow for binding the document This option also uses a different page header format for odd and even numbered pages 5 Documents can be printed with one line going across the entire page or in columns To select the number of columns that appear on the printed page look in the Columns section Click the One option button for one continuous row of text Click the Two option button to display two columns of text
463. uested will begin the down load process and sooner or later depending on the amount of graphics and multimedia attached to the page and on your modem speed you ll get a view of the entire Web page like the one in Figure 11 9 If you think you want to visit this page again add it to the Bookmarks list When you need to locate information on the Internet click the Search button Navigator can help you use a number of search engines and Web databases At the bottom of the Navigator window there s a toolbar that will launch any of the Communicator applications In fact you ll find this toolbar at the bottom of all the Communicator applications When you re done browsing those Web pages and you want to check the mail click the Email button to launch Messenger 170 Hour 11 Modify the Visit new Web sites Search the Internet Personal Toolbar ox Help FIGURE 1 1 9 E Netscape Computer Reference Resource Centers Operating Systems Linux Macm File Edit View Go Communjcator x 2 3 d 2 wi S Back Forward Reload Home Search Netscape Print Security St 7 Bookmarks A Netsite fh EI What s Aplated ii WebMail Contact People amp Yellow Pages g Download Find Sites 4 Channels acmillan Vou Are Here Computer Reference Resource Centers Operating Systems Linux Macmillan Linux Support LINU XCARE Hp Help Search Buyer s Guide Training WhatWe Offer About Us Some p
464. umber Authentication PAP x M Store password Execute program upon connect Execute program before disconnect Execute program upon disconnect Edit pppd arguments Arguments Cancel The first thing you ll need to do is name the connection Use something that will help you remember which Internet account you are using Then type the phone number you ll use to access your ISP Next click the DNS tab and enter the IP addresses used by your ISP s DNS Server When you have entered all the information the ISP needs to make the connection click OK You ll see the connection name in the Account Setup list on the Kppp Configuration dialog box Your dialup connection is almost complete Click OK on the Kppp Configuration dialog box and you ll see the connection name listed in the Connect to list box of the dialer window see Figure 11 8 All you need to do is type the username and password needed by your ISP and then click the Connect button FIGURE 11 8 o gt Ts x Type the username and Connect My ISP 4 select a dialup connection password needed to Login ID myaccount myisp net connect to your ISP EN S Supply username and password and then you ll be ready to hit the Web IF Show Log Window Guit setup Help Connect 1 Get online Power on If you are using an external modem make sure it is turned on A Getting on the Internet 169 Way to
465. ur system At the DOS prompt move to the directory where you copied the two files Type RAWRITE and press lt ENTER gt When prompted to do so type in the name BOOTNET IMG and press lt ENTER gt When prompted to do so type in the drive letter of the disk you are going to prepare and press lt ENTER gt Since you are going to be booting from this disk it s typically As If you don t already have the boot floppy disk in your disk drive insert it now Restart your computer You may need to change your BIOS settings to boot from the floppy disk drive Typically you enter your BIOS setup program with the F2 or DEL keys during the boot sequence Make your changes if any and exit the BIOS setup utility 10 If your computer is set up properly you will boot into the Linux Mandrake setup program Follow the onscreen prompts to complete the installation
466. us purposes There are three types of files with which you need to be familiar e User data files contain information that you create and usually are comprised of simple data made up of text and numbers The simpler files txt files may be read with a text editor The more complex files those created by graphic or spreadsheet programs require an interpreter program to read them e System data files keep track of users logins passwords permissions and other things As a regular user you won t be involved with these files If you are the system administrator however you may be required to edit these files to maintain the system e Executable files are the instructions that tell your computer what to do These files are usually called programs When you tell the computer to do something you are telling it to execute the instructions in one of these files Before messing around in the filesystem it is safe to say that it helps a lot if you know what you are doing But failing that at least you can understand the system a little better in the beginning by learning about the filesystem that was set up when you installed Linux Mandrake You will find useful features in some of the directories others should be left to the Linux experts e The root directory is the base of the Linux filesystem It contains all of the files and subdirectories in the Linux filesystem Never store files in this directory e The bin directory is where
467. used Enter the IP addresses to resolv host ip number Using the DNS is to handle this on a TCP IP network The others used by your ISP are the local etc hosts file see information about other hosts menu or the NIS system DNS usage F DNS is required for normal operation default domain www myisp net URL for your ISP nameserver 1 222 22 222 22 nameserver 2 opt L Primary DNS number nameserver 3 opt search domain 1 opt Secondary DNS number search domain 2 opt search domain 3 opt search domain 4 opt search domain 5 opt search domain 6 opt Accept Cancel Help 16 Click Accept The Resolver configuration panel will disappear 17 You have now finished with the Network Configurator and Linuxconf Click Quit at the bottom of each of the windows The windows will disappear and you are ready to give your connection a try Connecting to the Internet with UserNet Once the root user has created the PPP connection in Linuxconf each user on the system can use the connection If you want a quick no nonsense method to dial up your ISP try UserNet UserNet contains no frills no fancy timers nothing But it sure does make the connection in a hurry and it is so simple Use Table 11 2 to open UserNet TaBLE 11 2 Making the Connection to UserNet To Connect From Here Try This Path X terminal window Type usernet and press Enter AnotherLevel menus Click on Netw
468. ustom installation 12 15 installation boot disk creating 22 23 IRQs 379 installation screens navigating 24 30 installation tasks 18 Internet resources 44 45 local documentation 38 39 man pages 39 44 minimum system require ments 10 partitioning hard drives 23 sound configuring 37 38 system information 15 18 X Windows configuration 34 37 multiple applications 138 NICs network interface cards 150 151 Screem 222 on separate hard drive 11 as sole operating system 11 20 Internet downloading applications from 136 games finding 351 352 technical support resources 44 45 transferring files with gFTP utility 175 176 Internet connections Point to Point Protocol PPP 160 169 Kppp dialer 166 169 Linuxconf 161 165 UserNet 165 166 troubleshooting 178 intranets building 150 152 see also networks IRC Internet Relay Chat XChat program 176 177 IRQs interrupt requests 151 380 Jaz drives Jo Jaz drives backing up files 126 jaZip program 126 K K File System Control 116 karaoke files playing 341 KDE CD player 338 KDE Game menu 346 KDE graphical user interface 50 51 application windows 60 63 CD player icon 64 desktop 54 56 background settings 72 75 color schemes 76 icons 78 79 screensavers 75 76 themes 77 78 virtual desktops 68 72 Help browser 57 KPackage 132 133 installing applications 136 138 starting 132 uninstalling applications 133 134 log
469. ux Playing Windows Games with Wine Many of you may have a favorite game that you play on the Windows operating system It is not an easy task and most times impossible to get a program to work on an operat ing system for which it was not intended But there may be hope Currently a Windows emulator called Wine is in development that allows you to run your Windows programs on Linux Wine is still in development and not recommended for everyday use but you may want to take a look at Wine to see if it is something you want to tackle The Wine Development Headquarters at www winehq com contains a variety of resources for people who want to run Windows compatible software under a UNIX Linux operating system If you want to find out whether an application will run under Wine check out the Wine application database at www winehq com Apps query cgi This is a searchable database and you can limit the type of applications that are dis played As of this writing the database contained over 1900 applications Another source of information about running your favorite Windows compatible games under Linux using Wine can be found in the Wine success stories at www linuxgames com wine Games 353 Summary Over the past hour you learned how to find a number of games which are either installed on your system or can be installed from the Linux Mandrake CD Hopefully you had some fun while you were looking through the menus and deciding which game
470. ux Mandrake in particular Although the book is written with the Mandrake user in mind the general information about Linux and all the application software we discuss in the book applies to all Linux users This book is directed toward the Linux beginner to intermediate user and those with existing knowledge of Windows Macintosh or other computer operating systems The focus of the book is to make as much use as possible of the existing knowledge of the user and build on that to create a good understanding of Linux Mandrake and give the reader a great introduction to its use with open source software from the GNU project and others How This Book Is Organized We designed the book to be read and used along with the included lessons workshops and tests over a total of 24 one hour working sessions The chapter hours are arranged to take the reader from the basic installation of Linux Mandrake through a logically ordered progression from the simplest tasks to the more complex techniques and to provide introductions to applications that most effectively utilize the power of Linux Mandrake to provide a sophisticated and powerful tool to accomplish myriad tasks Introduction 3 In Part I Installing Linux Mandrake we take you through the process of planning your Linux installation including the gathering of the information about your computer and peripherals that you will need to have a successful installation Then we guide you through the ins
471. ux Mandrake on your computer There is something to be said for good fortune and you fortunate ones can shoot on through the first two sections of this hour and get busy right away learning how to find help and the online manuals There are a few recurring areas where the Linux installation can go awry but fear not Linux has tools to remedy the situation There are so many video cards and monitors that sometimes the automatic method of probing and configuring the X server during the initial installation doesn t work exactly right or can t find anything that will work X Window can be con figured to work on almost any combination of hardware you may have One section of this lesson shows you how to use the Xconfigurator to configure an X server for video on your system and create an optimum screen resolu tion refresh rate and color depth 34 Hour 3 The sound setup on the system sometimes isn t automatically handled during the installa tion either There are several remedies for configuring sound If you have an older com puter Pentium 133 or so it s possible that your card was found and your installation worked The newer more complex and feature rich systems in particular the ISA PCI soundcards found on newer multimedia computers require special handling There are some good resources and an update on the state of the art in this section of the lesson This hour helps you work through these common installation problems and
472. want to add text hyperlinks and pictures double click the file in the File tree This displays the page in the Screem Editor From here it s up to you to design a great looking page The Screem Page druid creates the HTML tags required in every Web page WY E These tags indicate the beginning and end of the page the lt HTML gt tag Z heading information the lt HEAD gt tag the title of the page the lt TITLE gt tag and the part of the page that appears in the Web browser the lt BODY gt tag Just remember that your content needs to be placed between the lt BODY gt tags Formatting Text with HTML Tags Adding HTML tags to text is a simple matter of typing the text into the Editor selecting it and then browsing through the Tag tree to find an appropriate HTML tag Figure 14 6 shows an example of a first level heading inserted into the body of a Web page View the page Check your in a browser spelling FIGURE 14 6 4 Screem oS Use the Tag Tree to File Edit Insert CVS Settings Help select an HTML tag oo all sle CW M d l wAnona relle z ub ole gt a Editor Preview Link View B HTML 4 0 Global Structure Erme Body Structure HEAD gt F ADDRESS TITLE gt About Us lt TITLE gt F CENTER HEAD gt Le DIV BODY bgcolor fffil text 000000 gt Select a tag MNS mmm Wt2rs In Loek gt a5 Site B
473. wares Ine inthe ss and ster countries 4 Right click to view main menu splash screen e ctric ye Display screen tips i for extra help vo3 Copyright C 1998 Red Hat Software By The Rasterman This software Is distributed under the GNU Public License GPL See About menu Click right mouse button for menu C E The Image List can hold a number of files in most any graphics file format see Figure 22 2 To start adding images to your list click the Open a New File button The Select a File to Load dialog box which appears can add a single file to the Image List or it can add all the files in the selected directory There is even a preview window to help you find image files Once the images are loaded you can work with a picture by clicking its filename in the Image List The image file appears in a separate window and a preview appears in the Edit Controls window Image file Color controls Add file to Image List Thumbnail FIGURE 22 2 Use the Edit Controls to change the image size and color balance Eyes Images O X Ki S gt ai x S monalisaxpm gimp_logo ppm mandrake jpg colour Modifications Apply Keep Reset J Always Apply eometry Settings Image Size 452 x 80 3 x K2 _ Use Large Thumbnails Crop 0 0 0x 0 e Generate Thumbnails Resize Flip and Screen Display thumbnails Click to rotate capture in Image List view f
474. with Graphical File Managers eseseseesersrseerererrseseseresesesssesese 95 Changing the Look of the Directory View s ssssciiusesiirisireriseiraiiisessnsssaseesesne 96 SELECHIN ES PILES NE EE E AE E E 97 Managing Files and Directories crsessiesrorana aasi a EE 98 Crating DIPECHO ose sii sarroensis nean EEN EET EELA LA EEE E EEEE iR 98 Renaming Files and Directories ss scevishcajesfissacsestesesecadee ducvattayelssiveeetseavte 99 Deleting Files and Directories sa ssssisesssessasesessstestsuvessveivedigussdevasarsosteszterversoaie 100 Summary OBA 5 seccvsatsscitvesl Segtessaivesslavissormvatentensoetwes A Workshop QUIZ eaa fet sa seta cosh avis es ease E A eds ese ses pah A E Exercises Hour 7 System Administration Tasks 103 Configuring Accounts with Linuxconf cccceceeeeeeseeceseeeeeeeteceeseeeeteeeeeeeaee 104 Starting Linux Cont vesiessescessecrescesssivessewsescasszeesapascessvaessrseseame arte ene NEES 104 Close Lamu xconit Aspe i dh cvns ce casetssey Gates ASNE te tea IRS 105 Working with User ACCOUMUS isicisiss seusesideseciiecesedecss castbdestaedtertens A Er NEER 106 Adding Users to the System cii ys di ic sscsscdscesatucesassasesicashactentpiasttpiGciead antes 106 Updating User Accounts wv s sisciecss eosin n a E E NE 108 R moving a User ACCOUNT eoriet eer rR EE N RR 110 Working with Group ACCOUNTS sesers nisme aea ren AE ERE 110 Creating New Groups eranmi ena e i E S 110 Sharing Files with a Group of USers
475. with other graphics applications e Create 3D landscapes e Use morphing techniques to animate pictures e Edit video Creating Saturday Morning Cartoons The art of animation includes a broader world than just the cartoons you may have watched on Saturday mornings Animation isn t just for kids Many independent and major motion picture studios use animation Animation doesn t necessarily consist of cartoon drawings Some animations appear to be larger than life Animation describes a sequence of drawings in which each drawing is con tained in a separate frame Each drawing is slightly different from the one before this is how motion is added to an animation An animated film requires 24 draw ings for each second of film in order to create smooth animation Computer animation may require more than 24 drawings per second If you re wondering how to get started with your animations use some of the drawing programs you learned about earlier such as The Gimp in Hour 19 and Killustrator in Hour 20 to create your cartoon characters and backgrounds Then check out the anima tion programs discussed in this section To learn more about how to create animations visit these Web sites e The Animation Learner s Site at come to animate provides a good general intro duction to creating animations e Aimee s Studio at aimee wyvernweb com contains a wealth of tutorials You ll find animation articles and tutorials at aimee wyvernweb co
476. xes due happen once a Event occurs on same ka year day each week xEmacs diar PUrdan ental Sam Al esa ee February 2000 March 2000 April 2000 Event takes place on Su Mo a Be a a oa Su Mo Tu ve aa WB Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr oa 6 7 8 91011 12 5 6 7 8 91011 2 IA ESG eD the first of each 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 month 27 28 29 26 27 28 29 30 31 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 J 30 4 C x lt Calendar info o other today Mon Nov 8 1999 C x gt e When an event occurs on the same day each week such as backing up your com puter files every Friday you ll first need to select any date that falls on that day of the week and then use the I wW command The day of the week will appear at the end of the diary file All you need to do is type yourself a note about what needs to be done e For meetings that occur on the same date each month select the date and use the I M command e To keep track of events that happen on the same date each year select the date the year you use is not important and use the I1 Y command Lesson 18 3 Scheduling Vacation Time There may be times when you need to block out a range of dates for a vacation confer ence or when the kid will be off to summer camp 1 Middle click the first day of the vacation and select Mark date The first day of the vacation is remembered by Emacs
477. xperimented with colors images schemes and themes There s a lot more to working with and customizing the desktop than we covered during these past two hours Explore the KDE and GNOME documen tation or you might want to check out their Web sites at http www kde org and http www gnome org 80 Hour 5 Q amp A Q Is there anything I can do to change the appearance of the pager on the GNOME panel A Click the GNOME Pager Settings button It s the small question mark below the tasklist You can make the pager smaller move it on the panel or make it disappear altogether Q I tried to use a wallpaper in GNOME but I had to browse the filesystem Is there another way to find wallpapers and change the desktop background quickly A Try this one Right click on the desktop and move the mouse pointer to Enlightenment Menu Desktop System Backgrounds You have several categories from which to choose When you display a category a thumbnail image of all the images in the category will appear What You can t see all the images Some image lists are longer than your screen Move the mouse pointer over the images As you get to the bottom of the screen the list will scroll and you ll see more images Just move the mouse pointer to the top of the screen and the list will move in the opposite direction Q What do I do if I don t want to use the same screensaver all the time A If you re using GNOME you re in luck Use the Rand
478. y tesasean tes os E ses fast Acavetedissdestaate th ceikeins 152 Using Scanners Gna Network ve iccsissccccssscsbvsssstisesseconthuevsessonchsievtenseaniedeansies 153 Tips for Administering the NetWork sess sessserisesersrisinesisesisesnenisorcsbienisesesnaesssesisese 153 EStablish ROUDES eorom N AAE 153 Establish S ctirity Procedures siseses eeii aridan i ee 154 Maintain the Network 1 0 scsecsssdesteisersvnesscisssveasisaesiaevasaivesaueststassiee N RS 154 Plan for the Future MUNIN AL Yoss a EEE EE N E cede Peeneceeaes OA Fas S 2a vs tee gh eee Arn es va ys hades Satoh ay tanec te te Meth sash Ads vero teeta Sea Workshop szcsscescavesscnneasibssessueesvesvavestescessenceveessavs ons sviestoasseghsateeressestusnsuseeNvontereseres QUZ anande Ene IAEA ERR EEAS ELAR AER NARE PE ces ERRARE EXETCISES a E E E E A R Part IV Putting Linux Mandrake to Work 157 Hour 11 Getting on the Internet 159 What You Need Before You Begin s ircsiiiirieieniis neinir 160 Setting Up a PPP Connection Usmo Eeamux On eh as stpscp sce fesvesttte tress carats tay Paden deters a a AES Connecting to the Internet with UserNet c ce ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeaees 165 Usine IR OPP nenea a 166 Working on the Web with Netscape Communicator ssseseseeseserererereeererreereee 169 Explonna Navigator reerde ana eree eaaa T EAN Checking Your MailboXsracrseeeoee sin EO a Creating Web Rares eisino a eea a E ES Transferring Fil s with gFTP i c cs ciccsescsscsstsaesa
479. ye single paragraph C Block Center M Below T Below from the Paragraph Environment r Vertical Spaces Indent dialog box Above None bd T Keep I No indent Change spacing Shove Below Smaliskip x I Keep and below paragraph Tienes Add space between lines Label Width Senseless with this layout Extra Options Apply Close 3 Change the paragraph alignment by clicking the appropriate Alignment button 4 If you want to add space above or below the paragraph select the spacing from the Above and Below lists boxes in the Vertical Spaces section 5 To move the first line of the paragraph to the right and away from the left margin make sure that the No indent checkbox is blank 6 To change the spacing of the lines within the paragraph select the appropriate option from the Line Spacing drop down list 7 Borders around a paragraph can be used to set off text such as notes or sidebars You can place a line above the paragraph a line below the paragraph or lines both above and below the paragraph Place a checkmark in the Above and Below check boxes in the Lines section to add a line above and below the paragraph 8 When you have finished making your changes click OK to return to the document You ll see the result of your changes Applying Character Formatting There are several character formatting attributes that you can apply to text Font size can be changed to show the level of importance of the tex
480. ystem Information 0 cee Determining Hardware Compatibility Getting Ready for the Installation sse cies seceeeseeeceeeseeeeeeeeeesseeetseseeseeaeeee Hour 2 Installing Linux Mandrake 21 Locating the Boot DISK os orpine ene aSa E R eas EERS Preparing the Hard Drive Installing the Distribution Hour 3 Troubleshooting the Linux Mandrake Installation 33 Adjusting the Video Display nsure cstssccisesecassensasess EN A EERS Wiring the Computer for Sound vi Sams Teach Yourself Linux Mandrake in 24 Hours Getme Helpysassst 255 ish 2ous sds aes cn teds cateaveidads a RRS Exploring the man Pages g Finding Helpon the IMErDEt srin eni eee ie oaae E a iia Part Il An Interface for All Occasions 47 Hour 4 Living in a Graphical Workspace 49 Finding a GUI An Open and Shut Case oo cece cceeseeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseneees 50 Moving Around the GUL sasise a NEA o aE Ra Taking a Look at the Desktop a Desperately Seeking Hel p ia vissetesscccsssthcivssseasasaissdcbedeisatcite codes saesdesanceacvavstvaes Exploring the Panel x ssjceiss cae sscevesewsgaceest lt a cana ceeasedete eteaieses r suds cabeeteate Working with Application WInNdOW Scese 60 Adjusting the WindOw SIZ ksr ierse tereni anie EEN EER 61 Moving Windows Out of Your Way cccccceseseseeseeseeseseeeeseeseeeeseeeteeateeeanenes 62 Hour 5 Changing Your View of the Desktop 67 Commuting ina Virtual World vc icesescescnesscesesvesscsus
481. ystem administrator Using find with the proper arguments can help you locate files across the whole system Backing Up the Filesystem 121 by filenames file permissions or by their last modification times This command can also execute programs for the files that it finds find can also produce a list of the files it finds and then that list can be used by tar to archive the files and the list Locating Files with the find Command When you need to find certain files in the Linux filesystem use the find command The syntax for the find command is find path expression lt SYNTAX The path argument indicates the place in the filesystem where you want to start looking such as in the root directory or the specific path to a directory to be searched The expression arguments specify the options that find should use to perform the spe cific tasks that you want The expression begins with a or an All the argu ments after it are interpreted as the remainder of the expression If you don t give find a path it will use the current directory If you don t give find an expression it will use print as the expression For example find mtime 7 type c print gt tmp backuplist weekly The above command will accomplish the following task e The path argument in this case begins the search with the root directory e The mtime 7 expression argument looks for files modified in the last 7 days e The typ

Summary

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents